Home

Paradyne 9126-II User's Manual

1. 7 60 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 20 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Errors Total Errors The number of total frame relay errors excluding LMI errors Short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors are included in this total Indicates that there may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames The number of invalid frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Short Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were less than 5 octets five 8 bit bytes in length There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Long Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were more than 8192 octets in length The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to DLCls outside the valid range that is a number less than 16 or greater than 1007 The device on the far end of the circuit may have been configured incorrectly or the DLCls configured for the FrameSaver unit may not match
2. If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would be lost 3 6 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Configuration Options 9128 A2 GB20 80 This chapter includes the following Using the Easy Install Feature on page 4 3 Using RIP with FrameSaver SLV CSU DSUs on page 4 4 Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock on page 4 5 Setting Up the Modem on page 4 6 Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature Setting Up Auto Configuration on page 4 8 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically Removing a Circuit Setting Up Dial Backup on page 4 12 Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration Modifying ISDN Link Profiles Restricting Automatic Backup and Configuring Backup Timers Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps Assigning DLCls to a Backup Group PVC Backup Over the Network Interface on page 4 19 Setting Up Back to Back Operation on page 4 19 Changing Operating Mode Configuration Option Tables on page 4 20 Configuring the Overall System on page 4 21 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System CSU DSUs Configuring Class of Service Definitions Configuring Service Level Verification Options September 2002 4 1 4 Configuration Options Configuring General System Options m Configuring Physical Inter
3. Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Normal Call 16 Call is being cleared No action is needed Clearing because either the caller or receiver has requested that it be cleared Normal Unspecified 31 Remote user has sent a No action is needed release message to the network No other cause in the normal class applies for this normal event No User 18 Called device does not Contact the network Responding respond to the call with an provider if the cause alert or connect indication continues within the prescribed period of time Internal network timers may be a cause Number Changed 22 Called number is no longer Look in the diagnostic field assigned for the new number then change the phone number in your ISDN link profile Only Restricted 70 An unrestricted bearer Arrange for the desired Bearer Capability service has been capability Available requested but the device sending the cause only supports the restricted version Outgoing Calls 52 Network is using Call Contact the network Barred Screening provider to turn Call Screening off Pre empted 45 Call has been pre empted Contact the network provider Protocol Error 111 No other cause in the Contact your service Unspecified protocol error class applies representative for this protocol error event Quality of Service 49 Requested Quality of No action is needed Unavailable Service requested cannot be provided e g through
4. lease days hours minutes infinite no lease days hours minutes infinite Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to specify or clear the lease time for an IP address assigned to a DHCP client After the lease time has expired the address assignment is no longer valid The default lease time is one day Example lease 120 23 0 days Number of days the lease is valid The default is1 Valid range of days is 0 365 hours Number of hours the lease is valid The default is 0 Valid range for hours is 0 24 minutes Number of minutes the lease is valid The default is 0 Valid range for minutes is 0 59 infinite Specifies an infinite lease time The IP address assignment does not expire default router jp address no default router ip address Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to configure or remove the default router IP address provided to clients by the DHCP server The default router address is provided to the clients in the DHCP reply message from the DHCP server and as the next hop router by the clients The IP address for the default router should be on the same subnet as the client Example default router 132 53 4 2 ip address Specifies the IP address of the default router The default is None domain name domain name no domain name domain name Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode
5. B 22 DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area B 23 m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order B 26 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations m CLI Commands 00 000 e eet eee C 1 Pager Command 0 0 eee eee tee C 3 Access Control Commands 0 eee eee C 3 Configuration Commands 0 0000 eee eee C 4 Interface CommandsS 0 cece eee C 5 IP Routing Commands 000 eee eee C 8 Bridge Commands 00 eee eet C 9 ARP Commands 000 00 e eee eens C 11 NAT COMMANAS 2 sete ge ak Ka Ka ga LAGA DBA aed C 12 DHCP Server Commands eee eee eee C 15 DHCP Relay Agent Commands 0 20 eee eee C 18 Filter access list Commands eee eee ee eee C 19 Diagnostic Commands 000 cece eee C 23 Show Commands cagda RAUL NA ge awed digg AN C 25 m Ethernet Type Codes 0 0000 e eee C 29 viii September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Contents m Protocol and Port Designations aaan ee eee C 31 ICMP Designations 000 a a eee C 31 TCP Port Designations 0 0 00 e eee eee C 33 UDP Port Designations eesi restinta Eae LEA EEEN C 34 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts m CLISummaries 0 0 ees D 1 Show Command Summary 0 0000 eee D 2 Access Control and System Level Command Summary D 3 CLI Command Summary 000 eee ee D
6. 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 17 Node IP Options 2 of 3 Default IP Destination Possible Settings None Modem COM Ethernet PVCname Default Setting None Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route Examples m If the default IP network is connected to the communications port select COM m lf the default IP network is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named London for the remote device located in the London office select the PVC name London as defined by the Name configuration option Table 4 18 Management PVC Options NOTE Ifthe link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected C
7. DLCI Records Available paths to DLCI Records Options depend on the FrameSaver model m Data Port is available only on CSU DSUs m ISDN is available only when the FrameSaver unit has an ISDN DBM installed m Virtual Router Ports is available only on the FrameSaver SLV Router Typically DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit the unit automatically configures non management DLCI Records and PVC Connections Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options 1 of 4 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from Oto 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 If the DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES lfa DLCI number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 14 DLCI Record Optio
8. No DLCls Available for Mgmt PVC New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all configured DLCls have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 DLCls and try again No DLCls Defined DLCI Records was selected from an interface s Configuration Edit Display menu and no DLCI Records have been created for this interface Select New and create a DLCI record No more DLCls allowed New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum number of DLCI Records had already been reached Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Record No Primary Destination Link DLCls Available New or Modify was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable Primary PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again If a network DLCI has been entered as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI to a user data port DLCI 2 Enter the network DLCI as the PVC s Primary Destination No Security Records to Delete Delete was selected from the Administer Login screen and no security records had been defined m No action needed m Enter a security record Password Matching Error Re enter Password Password entered in the Re enter Password field of the Administer Logins scree
9. Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 24 Communication Port Options 4 of 5 IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the IP Address is all zeros the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the sub
10. 9000 Series Access Carrier Installation Instructions 9126 A2 GL10 FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9126 II Quick Reference 9126 A2 GL12 FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 Router Quick Reference 9126 A2 GN10 FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions 9126 A2 GN11 FrameSaver SLV 9126 11 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions 9126 A2 GN12 FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router Installation Instructions 9128 A2 GL10 FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II Quick Reference 9128 A2 GN10 FrameSaver SLV 9128 1 Slot Housing to 9000 Series Access Carrier Upgrade Instructions 9128 A2 GN11 FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 I Network Access Module NAM Installation Instructions 9128 A2 GN12 FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7800 A2 GB30 OpenLane SLM Reports Reference Guide 7800 A2 GB32 OpenLane SLM Administrator s Guide NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus User Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Gui
11. Enable Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message s Disable Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for more information after receiving an SNMP trap Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether an incomplete call busy no answer etc is retried when an SNMP trap message is sent to the modem port If an Alternate Dial Out Directory is specified the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed then the alternate directory s telephone number is called see the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Enable Attempts to retry the call up to one time per SNMP trap message with a delay between the retry The delay is specified by the Dial Out Delay Time Min configuration option Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Time Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent the wait between call attempts see the Call Retry option 1 10 Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 6 of 6 Alternate Dial Ou
12. Hop The number of hops in the route to the destination 1 15 If 16 appears the route is in the process of being aged out 7 48 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 15 IP Routing Table Values 2 of 2 Column What It Indicates Type The method used to add the route to the table m RIP The route was discovered through Routing Information Protocol The route remains until its TTL Time to Live expires a better route is provided via RIP or there is a power reset m Loc The route was added due to the FrameSaver unit s local configuration a Default IP Address or an SNMP Manager Initial Route Destination have been configured The route remains until the unit s configuration changes m NMS The route was added by a Network Management System using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The route remains until there is a power reset of the unit m ICMP The route was added because an ICMP Internet Control Management Protocol redirect message was received from a router indicating a better route to the destination That is a datagram was sent to a router and the router is informing the datagram source through an ICMP redirect message of a better route m Tmp The route was added as a temporary route in order to respond to an IP packet that was received The route remains until its TTL expires or there is a power reset Interfac
13. In this DHCP Server at the remote site example The DHCP clients send IP address requests to the specified DHCP server The router is the DHCP server and provides IP addresses to DHCP clients on the local Ethernet segment This example creates a pool of 254 reusable IP addresses The command line syntax for this example is ip dhcp pool poo117 network 155 1 3 0 255 255 255 0 default router 155 1 3 254 DHCP Relay Agent The router provides the capability of serving as a DHCP Relay Agent as specified in RFC 2131 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol The router provides the capability to enable and disable the DHCP Relay Agent and to configure the IP address of the DHCP server to which the DHCP requests are to be sent 9128 A2 GB20 80 The DHCP server assigns an IP address to the end user system When DHCP Relay is enabled it is possible to limit the number of DHCP clients The router s IP Routing table and ARP table are automatically updated The DHCP relay agent in the router should be used when there is a DHCP server at the customer s headquarters or central site DHCP relay agent setup considerations include the following DHCP server IP address must be configured DHCP relay must be enabled i e both the server address and the interface closest to the server are configured The number of DHCP clients is limited to 1 253 DHCP server and DHCP relay functions cannot be enabled at the same time NAT and DHCP relay c
14. LMI is down ee BRI LMI Protocol configured or PRI m ee RFC Frame Relay link is disabled Synchronous Data Strings Port m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifString LMI down m devLastTrapString ifString administratively DTE Side of the Frame devHealthAndStatus shutdown Due to an Relay UNI mib intentional shutdown Supported by the media specific Frame Relay DTE s MIB m linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String SifString up supports the DTR lead state supports the RTS lead state whether the interface is enabled or disabled September 2002 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE If the LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon 9128 A2 GB20 80 Traps enterprise Specific B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps are listed below Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 1 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseCIR m devFrExtDicilflndex CIR has changed due to the LMI Change 15 devFrExt mib report LMI Protocol is set to devFrExtDiciDici Sa and the network s CIR devFrExt mib F String ee CIR on ifString changed t
15. September 2002 B 9 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps linkUp and linkDown B 10 These traps are supported on the following interfaces m Network DSX 1 and synchronous data ports Physical sublayer interfaces m Frame relay logical link layer interfaces Table B 5 linkUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational up and operational linkUp and linkDown variable bindings are in Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table B 6 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer T1 Network DSX 1 PRI Supported by the media specific DS1 MIB m iflndex RFC 1573 m ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m linkDown
16. Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Ethernet Table 7 23 Ethernet Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Port Rate Mbps The operating rate as detected on the Ethernet port One of the following may appear for this statistic m Disconnected The line is not connected m 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps The Ethernet port is operating at this rate m Disabled The Ethernet port has been disabled Duplex The duplex mode detected on the Ethernet port One of the following may appear for this statistic m Disconnected The line is not connected m Full The Ethernet port is operating in full duplex mode 4 wire m Half The Ethernet port is operating in half duplex mode 2 wire m Disabled The Ethernet port has been disabled Frames Transmitted The number of successfully transmitted frames on the port Frames Received The number of frames received on the port Errored Frames The number of errors detected on the port Possible errors include m Internal transmit and receive errors m Transmitter and receiver overruns m Receive checksum errors m Alignment errors m Long frames Excessive Collisions The number of failed frame transmissions due to excessive collisions Carrier Sense Errors The number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or was never asserted during frame transmissions Deferred Transmis
17. This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized Table B 3 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmStart FrameSaver unit has just reinitialized and stabilized itself Variable Binding devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m Reset command sent m Power disruption String Unit reset Trap authenticationFailure This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to lack of authentication Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the FrameSaver unit was attempted and failed m Bad password on COM port terminal String Unauthorized access attempted from COM port m Bad password on modem port terminal String Unauthorized access attempted from modem port m Bad password through telnet String Unauthorized access attempted from telnet user at SipAddress m SNMP bad community unauthorized IP address or unauthorized operation String Unauthorized access attempted from SNMP user at SipAddress authenticationFailure Variable Binding devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m An ISDN backup call has been received but the call was rejected String Bad Caller ID Sphone Sphone is either a phone number or no number 9128 A2 GB20 80
18. eee ee 7 50 Clearing Performance Statistics 7 51 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 7 52 DLCI Performance Statistics AA 7 57 Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI 7 59 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 7 60 ESF Line Performance Statistics Aa 7 64 DBM Call Performance Statistics A a 7 67 Ethernet Performance Statistics 7 68 api Event Logs a a MANNA a ght teed chk icky a ghd 7 69 Modem Operation 0 00 e eee eee 7 70 Activating the Modem PassThru Feature 7 70 Canceling Modem PassThru Operation 7 70 Manually Disconnecting the Modem 0000 7 71 Verifying Modem Operation a 7 71 m ISDN DBM Operation 0 00 00 eee eae 7 72 Forcing Backup Disruptive 0 00 eee ee 7 72 Placing a Test Call Nondisruptive 2 0 0505 7 73 Verifying ISDN LineS 0 00 c eee eee nes 7 74 Verifying That Backup Can Take Place 7 74 Bm FPP File lranstersit cai NAA GAN etka oat hah as DA 7 75 Upgrading System Software a 7 77 Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software 0 7 78 Determining Whether a Download Is Completed 7 79 Changing Software 0 00 ae 7 79 Transferring Collected Data 2 0 aa 7 80
19. icmp Internet Control Message Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol source ip The source IP Address to match source wildcard Specifies a 32 bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the source IP Address to ignore during matches This argument must be supplied when a source ip address is specified any Match any source host A source ip of 0 0 0 0 and a source wildcard of 255 255 255 255 are specified host Specify a single host source address to match source host ip The source host IP address to match dest ip The destination IP Address to match dest wildcard Specifies a 32 bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the destination IP Address to ignore during matches This argument must be supplied when a dest ip address is specified any Specifies to match any destination host A dest ip of 0 0 0 0 and a dest wildcard of 255 255 255 255 are specified host Specify a single host address to match dest host ip The destination host IP address to match icmp msg type Specify a specific ICMP message type to be filtered Valid if the protocol specified is icmp For valid ICMP message types refer to Table C 15 ICMP Designations Valid ICMP message type range is 0 255 icmp msg code Specify a specific ICMP message code to be filtered Valid if an icmp msg type has been specified and the protocol specified is icmp For valid ICMP messag
20. m Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key Example To save a configuration option change select Save S or s is the designated function key If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings Screen Contents What appears on the screens depends on m Current configuration How your network is currently configured m Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user m Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 2 9 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Navigating the Router s CLI Access the FrameSaver DSL Router s Command Line Interface by pressing the Shift r function key from the Main Menu There is no need to press Ctrl a first to access the function keys area of the screen Once the CLI is accessed you can use keyboard keys to navigate within the interface Using the router s CLI you can display and edit router configuration settings view router status and access router tests For details of all CLI commands and the conventions used when entering commands see Appendix C Router CL Commands Codes and Designations For asummary of abbreviated minimal command entries and their default settings see Appendix D Router Comman
21. 3 4 Maximum Link Rate Kbps Negotiated Rate Kbps ISDN Channel Remote Call ID Active Connected Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chn1 7 None None None None 64K Configured 64K B1 8135302000 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh NextLink PrevLink ConstLinkStatus Select the NextLink and PrevLink function keys to move forward or backward through the frame relay link that can be selected If the selected frame relay link is a multilink aggregate link select the ConstLinkStatus function key to see the status for selected constituent links For a multilink aggregate link Multilink Constituent Link appears under Link so a specific constituent link can be selected Otherwise the line is blank In addition the Most Recent Cause Value Previous Cause Values and Remote Call ID do not appear for a multilink aggregate frame relay link September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 13 DBM Interface Status 1 of 3 7 Operation and Maintenance Field Status What It Indicates Line Status Active Disabled Inactive Invalid SPID Invalid Local Number Call Rejected Invalid ID Caller ID Call Rejected No Far End ID Call Rejected ISDN Link Name Busy The overall status of the ISDN line m The ISDN line is active and no error conditions exist m The ISDN interface has been disabled Main M
22. 6 Security and Logins Creating a Login A login is required if security is enabled Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the communication port modem port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session Up to six login ID password combinations can be created using ASCII text and each login must have a specified access level Logins must be unique and they are case sensitive gt Procedure To create a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Select New and set the following configuration options as appropriate In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 m Level 1 User can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing m Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information m Level 3 User can only monitor and display status and configuration screens CAUTION Make sure at least one login is set up for Level 1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save
23. 9128 11 SLV 9128 11 only When an ISDN BRI DBM is installed if the OK LED comes on then goes off during power recycling the ISDN BRI DBM may have failed 2 On the Display LEDs amp Control Leads screen for the Model 9128 II only FR Mode is On or Off When On highlighted the FrameSaver unit is in Frame Relay mode September 2002 7 9 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 10 Table 7 2 Network DSX or PRI Interface LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means SIG Signal Green ON A recoverable signal is present on the Network DSX PRI interface OFF The signal cannot be recovered from the Network DSX PRI interface An LOS condition exists OOF Out of Frame Yellow ON At least one OOF was detected during the sampling period OFF No OOFs were detected during the sampling period ALM Alarm Yellow ON An alarm condition is present on the network DSX PRI interface Current alarm conditions m Loss of Signal LOS m Loss of Frame LOF m Out of Frame OOF m Excessive Error Rate EER m Yellow Alarm Signal m Alarm Indication Signal AIS OFF No alarm condition is present on the Network DSX PRI interface Table 7 3 User Data Port LED CSU DSUs Only Label Indication Color What It Means OK Operational Green ON The interchange circuits for the port are in Status the correct state to transmit and rec
24. 9128 A2 GB20 80 For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear make sure your environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file You need to Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager Configure agent properties Verify and correct domains and groups Monitor the agent and DLCls Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus refer to the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide to help you install the application monitor traffic and diagnose emerging problems on network segments NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you configure agents remote servers and report templates using the various NetScout products NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between the FrameSaver unit and its router and configure the probe on network segments you want to monitor September 2002 10 3 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network p gt Procedure 1 2 Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File v Agent AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the li
25. G Equipment List Model Feature Description Number 9000 Series Access Carrier 9128 II NAM only Access Carrier 9007 B1 409 Includes 14 Slot Housing Universal 90 250 VAC Power Supply Power Supply Tray Baffle Fan Tray Mounting Brackets and Installation Instructions Access Carrier 9007 B1 509 Includes 14 Slot Housing Universal 48 VDC Power Supply Power Supply Tray Baffle Fan Tray Mounting Brackets and Installation Instructions Baffle for Access Carrier 9007 S1 897 Fan Tray for Power Supply in Access Carrier 9007 S1 898 Fan Tray for Access Carrier 9007 S1 899 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 G 5 G Equipment List Cables G 6 This table lists cables you can order Description Part Number Feature Number RJ48C DSX 1 Network Cable 8 pin modular to 8 pin modular 20 feet 6 1 meters 035 0209 2031 3100 F 1 500 RJ48C T1 Network Cable RJ48C to RJ48C 20 feet 6 1 meters 035 0209 2031 3100 F 1 500 T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C to CA81A 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in Canada 035 0221 2031 3100 F1 510 COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable custom unkeyed 8 pin plug to 8 pin plug modular cable 14 feet 4 3 meters Used for a LAN Adapter LANA 035 0315 1431 3100 F1 910 Adapter DB25 plug to 8 pin modular receptacle Used with the COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable 002 0069 0031 3100 F 1 920 COM Port to Terminal Cable 8 p
26. NAT and NAPT Configuration Example m Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server on page 5 11 DHCP Server with NAT Configuration Example DHCP Server at Remote Site Configuration Example m Router Security on page 5 14 IP Router Filtering Bridge Filtering IP Filtering Land Bug Prevention Smurf Attack Prevention Provisioning the Router Interface on page 5 15 Provisioning the Router Interface on page 5 15 m Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation on page 5 16 Uploading and Downloading the Router Configuration Via the CLI 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 5 1 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router FrameSaver SLV Router Overview The FrameSaver SLV Router supports locally attached hosts or subnets and various customer premises distribution networks that contain IP forwarding devices or routers The router is shipped as an 802 1d bridge and it can be configured to simultaneously support IP routing and bridging of all non IP protocols The router maintains two routing tables to keep customer data and management data separate The router supports Internet Protocol IP specified in RFC 791 and Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP as specified in RFCs 792 and 950 with exceptions It acts as a router or gateway as defined in RFC 791 The router has two interfaces Network Interface Frame relay packets are transported over the T1 line using this interface Ethernet This is a 10 100
27. Specific Traps 4 90 enterprise specific traps B 13 equipment list G 1 Error Event LMI 4 23 4 62 Errors frame relay statistics 7 61 Esc key 2 6 ESF Line statistics 7 64 Ethernet Initial Route Destination 4 89 interface 5 2 Link Down 7 21 performance statistics 7 68 port MAC address 7 3 type codes C 29 Ethernet port 4 75 connector pin assignments E 16 default gateway address 4 95 even parity 4 97 Event Log Trap 7 69 8 14 exception points 11 7 Excess Burst Size Bits 4 66 Excessive Error Rate linkDown trap B 11 Error Rate Threshold 4 37 4 48 External Transmit Clock 4 39 F faceplates 7 4 9126 7 5 9128 7 7 FDR 1 10 September 2002 IN 5 Index feature sets advanced FLEX SLV 1 4 basic FLEX 1 4 field is blank empty 2 9 file transfer 7 75 filter access list CLI commands C 19 filtering bridge 5 14 IP with without NAT 5 15 router 5 14 FR Mode LED 7 9 Frame Delivery Ratio FDR 1 10 Frame Relay assigning time slots 4 52 configuring interface 4 61 configuring system 4 21 Discovery 4 9 saving a mode change 4 11 DSOs Base Rate 4 62 Mode LED 7 9 statistics 7 59 troubleshooting PVC problems 8 16 frames 4 78 FTP 1 7 7 75 file transfers 7 75 initiating a session 7 75 limiting access 6 6 6 7 Login Required 4 86 Max Transfer Rate kbps 4 86 Session 6 7 FTP file transfer protocol 4 86 Session 4 86 function keys 2 5 2 7 G G
28. dest operator Specifies how the destination port is evaluated This argument may only be specified if the protocol specified is tcp or udp Valid values are eq Match only packets with a port number equal to the destination port number gt Match only packets with a port number greater than the destination port number It Match only packets with a port number less than the destination port number neq Match only packets with a port number not equal to the destination port number range Match only packets in the range of port numbers specified by dest port and dest end port If range is specified enter both a dest port and dest end port dest port Specifies a specific TCP or UDP port number to be filtered This option only applies to a protocol of tcp or udp Many of the valid TCP and UDP ports are described in Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid TCP or UDP port number range is 0 65535 dest end port Specifies last TCP or UDP port number in a range of port numbers to be filtered This option only applies to a protocol of tcp or udp with dest operator set to range Many of the valid TCP and UDP ports are described in Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid TCP or UDP port number range is 0 65535 For Protocol Type Access Lists Example access list 200 permit 0x200 range 0x210 type code Specifies the 16 bit hexadecimal number writ
29. 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the port which can be viewed or edited i e a router on the LAN Clear Fills the default gateway s IP address with zeros Proxy ARP Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit will use the Proxy ARP Address Resolution Protocol technique acting as the gateway to other FrameSaver devices in its management network when there is an ARP request for a device not on the Ethernet Enable Proxy ARP is enabled on the port so the FrameSaver unit will act as an agent for or gateway to other units in its management network Using this technique the FrameSaver unit returns its own MAC Media Access Control address in response to ARP requests when it recognizes that the destination IP address is in its subnet but the device sending the ARP request is in another network Packets sent to the FrameSaver unit s gateway address are forwarded to the appropriate device Disable The Proxy ARP technique will not be used by the unit it will not act as an agent for other devices in its network September 2002 4 95 4 Configuration Options Configuring the Communication Port Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the communication port configuration options see Table 4 24 Communication Port Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication
30. 2 8 to new software 7 79 System Alarm Relay 4 33 turning off 7 81 and test status messages 7 19 configuring options 4 21 displaying information 7 3 entering information 4 5 Frame Relay and LMI options 4 21 General options 4 31 last reset 7 19 messages 2 5 Name Contact and Location 7 3 setting the clock data amp time 4 5 T1 Canadian line interface cable E 16 LMI Heartbeat 4 23 4 63 mass termination cable E 15 network cable E 15 E 16 network interface options 4 34 T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat 4 23 4 63 T3 LMI N4 Measurement Period 4 24 4 63 Tab key 2 6 Tc 4 65 TCP 7 75 filter 5 14 port designations C 33 technical specifications F 1 Telnet limiting access 6 6 Session 6 6 user interface options 4 84 Terminal COM port cable E 6 emulation settings for router 5 16 Port Use 4 96 4 100 Test Call 8 25 menu branch 2 4 Mode 7 9 Status messages DBM 7 27 September 2002 IN 13 Index Tests 1 6 aborting 8 21 available 8 18 Connectivity 8 25 Data Channel Loopback 8 32 DBM 8 19 DTE Loopback 8 30 Duration 4 31 IP Ping 8 35 Lamp 8 40 Line Loopback 8 27 pattern 8 34 Payload Loopback 8 28 physical 8 26 ping 8 35 PVC 8 22 PVC Loopback 8 23 Remote Line Loopback 8 31 8 33 Repeater Loopback 8 29 Send Monitor Pattern 8 24 starting or stopping 8 20 Test Call 8 25 Timeout 4 31 8 19 throughput 1 10 time setting 4 5 time slot assignments synchronous data po
31. 26 7 cm or 6U Width 17 2 inches 43 7 cm Depth 14 3 inches 36 3 cm Weight Empty access carrier without power supply 11 Ibs 6 oz 5 16 kg AC Power Requirements AC Power Supply DC Power Supply 90 to 265 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A maximum 48 VDC 6 6 amps 316 watts Heat Dissipation Max 227 VAC 48 VDC Fully loaded access carrier 585 Btu per hour maximum 465 Btu per hour maximum Typical Power Consumption AC Power Supply 1 power supply installed 2 power supplies installed DC Power Supply 1 power supply installed 2 power supplies installed 100 VAC 60Hz 1 7 amps 171 watts 120 VAC 60Hz 1 03 amps 60 watts 100 VAC 50Hz 1 15 amps 60 watts Result 207 Btu per hour 100 VAC 60Hz 1 25 amps 64 5 watts 120 VAC 60Hz 1 5amps 177 watts 230 VAC 50Hz 0 9amps 172 watts Result 221 Btu per hour 104 watts at 48 VDC Result 355 Btu per hour 124 watts at 48 VDC Result 423 Btu per hour September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table F 4 F Technical Specifications ISDN BRI DBM Optional Feature Technical Specifications Specification Criteria Standards Compliance ANSI T1 601 1992 physical layer Bellcore SR NWT 001937 Issue 1 February 1991 ITU Q 921 1992 link layer ITU Q 931 1993 network layer TR TSY 00860 ISDN Calling Number Identification Services February 1989 and Supplement June 1990 Power Consumption 60 mA at 15 VDC Average power
32. 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 23 4 Configuration Options Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 4 of 4 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 4 24 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Configuring Class of Service Definitions 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Select Class of Service Definitions from the System menu to display or change the Class of Service definitions to be used with latency availability and throughput measurements of IP traffic on IP Enabled circuits Main Menu Configuration System Class of Service Definitions The Class of Service Definitions screen appears gt Procedure To create a new Class of Service definition 1 To manually assign definition names and code points proceed to Step
33. 4 of 4 Alternate IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate IP address for the modem port If this configuration option is not configured i e it is zero the modem port s primary IP address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used for dial out traps Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the modem s alternate IP address which you can view or edit Clear Clears the alternate IP address for the modem port and fills the address with zeros Alternate Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the modem port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the modem port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 September 2002 4 103 4 C
34. 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router IP Routing The router uses destination based routing IP routing tables are maintained for both the customer data and management data domains to specify how IP datagrams are forwarded The router can support up to 32 entries in the data IP routing table and up to 300 entries for the management IP routing table When an IP address and subnet mask are assigned to an interface an entry is automatically created in the IP routing table Address Resolution Protocol The router supports Address Resolution Protocol ARP as specified in RFC 826 The router provides for 256 ARP table entries The timeout for completed and uncompleted ARP table entries is configurable The Command Line Interface provides the ability to m Create up to 64 static ARP table entries to be retained across power cycles m Display the ARP table m Delete ARP table entries m Display and delete automatically added static ARP table entries by the DHCP server and relay functions Refer to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server on page 5 11 Proxy ARP The router supports Proxy ARP Proxy ARP responses are based on the contents of the IP routing table for management traffic The IP routing table for management traffic must have an entry for every host that is reachable on the Ethernet interface including hosts for which the router will not forward packets because of IP filters For additional information on filtering refer
35. 8 36 responses 8 38 test 8 35 pipelining upstream 1 2 placing a test call 7 73 PLB 8 28 Policing Traffic 1 7 4 62 Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks 4 41 Access Level 4 98 4 101 6 3 assigning port to network or DSX 1 time slots 4 59 assignment clearing 4 60 Base Rate 4 39 bursting 1 10 communication options 4 96 control leads 7 11 Ethernet connector pin assignments E 16 Ethernet interface status 4 94 LED 7 10 modem options 4 100 Status data ports 4 38 9128 A2 GB20 80 Port continued TCP designations C 33 UDP designations C 34 Use 4 38 4 96 4 100 PPP 4 100 4 102 previous recent cause values 7 42 Primary Clock Failed 7 24 8 11 Source 4 31 Primary Destination DLCI 4 69 EDLCI 4 70 Link 4 69 Primary Frame Relay Link 4 79 4 81 Primary Link RIP 4 80 printed reports 11 7 printer COM port cable E 6 printing certificate report 9 9 problem indicators 8 2 product related documents xiii Profile ID SPID 4 45 profiles entering 4 49 Proprietary Caller Identification Method 4 51 6 5 RIP 4 80 Protocol address resolution 1 2 1 5 4 95 Address Resolution ARP 5 3 Link 4 100 4 102 LMI 1 2 4 61 Point to Point PPP 4 100 4 102 Routing Information RIP 4 80 4 99 Serial Line IP SLIP 4 100 4 102 Simple Network Management SNMP 4 83 Proxy ARP 4 95 5 3 PVC availability 1 10 backup over network interface 4 19 connection status 7 31 connections 4 68 to
36. 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 10 19 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Statistical Windows Supported 10 20 Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are supported for FrameSaver units For example All Convs conversations and TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected but conversations are not supported Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the following are supported Traffic Statistics Protocol Statistics Traffic Monitor Protocol Monitor Segment Zoom Protocol Zoom Segment Details TopNTalkers Domain History All Talkers Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only not a link If a link is selected all size distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero When a DLC is selected the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket i e bucket size lt 64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65 127 bucket and s1518 statistics appear in the 1024 1518 bucket Conversations and Long Term and Short Term Histories are not supported in this release As a result no data will appear on windows that include these panes September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices 9128 A2 GB20 80 FrameSaver units are compatible
37. Changes prompt No action is needed Test Active No higher priority System and Test Status messages exist and a test is running m Contact service provider if test initiated by the network m Wait until the test ends and message clears m Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test m Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from User Interface Already in Use Two Telnet sessions are already in use when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM port is made IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are also provided m Wait and try again m Contact one of the IP address user and request that they log off User Interface Idle Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM port is now available Log on to the FrameSaver unit Session has been ended due to timeout No action needed September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 6 Device Messages 6 of 6 7 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do Value Out of Range CIR entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid CIR 0 64000 Excess Burst Size entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid Excess Burst Size 0 1536000 DLCI Number entered is less
38. Hardware Version hhhh hhh 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 3 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 4 Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information 2 of 3 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer continued Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003002 S01P2 Port 2 if applicable Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh COM Communications port COM Port T1 FR NAM 101004001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Modem Modem port Modem Port T1 FR NAM 101005001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh ISDN BRI DBM ISDN BRI DBM ISDN BRI DBM T1 FR NAM 101110001 interface if applicable Child Card ISDN BRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh ISDN PRI DBM ISDN PRI DBM ISDN PRI DBM T1 FR NAM 101111001 interface if applicable Child Card ISDN PRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay Logical Layer FR Bundle Multilink Frame Relay FR Bundle Profile Link Name 9126 MFR Bundle Hardware Version hhhh hhh 101025001 to 101025051 9128 101025001 to 101025120 FR UNI Frame relay logical link For the DTE side 101015001 on the T1 network Network T1 of FR DTE interface T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical link For the user side 1010160
39. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 9128 A2 GB20 80 These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the NetScout alarm area Table B 11 identifies alarm defaults that do not change and Table B 13 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area identifies alarm defaults that change when the interface s line speed changes The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider Up to eight alarms per interface are allowed Any additional alarms are added to the Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software See Editing Alarms in Chapter 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices September 2002 B 23 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 13 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Current Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0 Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest min configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Average Latency A MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs None Must be 0 Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg kio mins ConngUrcrk
40. It should only be specified when a static protocol translation is specified Only one static route per protocol can specify a static port num The valid range of TCP UDP ports is 1 65535 clear ipnattranslation Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode Standard Allows you to clear all dynamic NAT translations from the translation table September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations DHCP Server Commands Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server commands are used to enable or disable the DHCP server and create or delete a DHCP pool Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands 1 of 3 no service dhcp Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to enable or disable the DHCP server The DHCP server is enabled by default but is not active until other DHCP server options are configured When an IP address is assigned to a host by the DHCP Server and there is no matching routing table entry a host entry for that IP address is created This entry is deleted from the routing table when the lease expires or the IP address is relinquished When an IP address is assigned to a host on the local Ethernet by the DHCP Server an ARP table entry is created mapping that IP address to the corresponding host MAC address This entry is deleted from the ARP table when the lease expires or the IP address is relinquished This entry is not deleted according
41. Main Menu Test Lamp Test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Test Timeout Feature on page 8 19 for additional information 8 40 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features This chapter includes m OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices on page 9 2 m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System on page 9 2 m Setting Up FrameSaver Support on page 9 3 m Ordering SLM Feature Set Activations on page 9 4 To Find Your License Key Number The Activation Certificate m Administering and Managing SLM Activations on page 9 6 Entering an Activation Certificate Checking Activation Certificate Status Scheduling Activations Checking the Status of Scheduled Activations Canceling Scheduled Activations Accessing and Printing the Certificate Summary Report 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 9 1 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices The OpenLane Service Level Management SLM system provides the following features m Web and database services m Web access to health and status information m Web access to real time as well as historical graphs and reports m Web access to SLV reports for units with the SLM feature set activated m On demand polling of FrameSaver devices SNMP polling and r
42. Network Data Port ISDN Call Physical Tests Network Data Port DSX 1 PRI 9128 11 Other IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Physical Tests e Local Loopbacks e Remote Loopbacks e Send Monitor Patterm Tests 7 Load Configuration Configuration Edit Display from System System Network DSX 1 Data Ports CSU DSUs e Frame Relay and LMI e Class of Service Definitions e Service Level Verification e General Network a Data Ports e Physical DSX 1 e Interface Status e Line Framing Format e Line Coding Format e Line Equalization Send All Ones nd Ports e DLCI Records Frame Relay DLCI Reco rds ISDN e Physical e Link Profiles e DLCI Records Virtual Router Virtual Router Ports Routers ISDN Time Slot Assignment Performance Statistics Frame Relay ESF Line DBM Call Ethernet e Clear All Statistics IP Routing Table e Destination e Mask e Gateway Hop e Type Interface eTTL rvice Level tification Cl MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install PVC Connections IP Path List Management and Communication Auto Backup Criteria IP Path List e Add and Display Static Paths Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments DSX 1 to Network Assignments Management and Communication
43. Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature True statistic counts are always maintained so SLAs can be verified and they can be viewed from an SNMP NMS However since statistics can be cleared locally the statistics viewed via the menu driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the NMS pp Procedure To clear all statistics Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics pp Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics 9128 A2 GB20 80 Use the CIrSLV8DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the following screens Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance statistics Performance Statistics Frame Relay Use the ClrNearStats or ClrFarStats function key to reset all near end or all far end Extended SuperFrame ESF line performance statistics Performance Statistics ESF Line Use the CIrDBMStats function key to reset the DBM call performance statistics Performance Statistics gt DBM Call Use the ClrStats function key to reset all Ethernet port performance statistics
44. Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Repeater Loopback The Repeater Loopback RLB loops data received from the data ports and the DSX 1 interface after the signal has passed through the framing circuitry Use RLB to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent over the interface This helps to indicate that the FrameSaver unit is operational Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be looped back l Oth Framer er T1 AIS ae Interface BP ae nterface 97 15338 The FrameSaver unit will not respond to any messages from the network during this test CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected interface While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An RLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface m All loopbacks on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface m Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous
45. Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure SNMP traps and dial out when a trap is generated see Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication SNMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for trap format standards and special trap features including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 1 of 6 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Ma
46. The following command specifies that inside address translation is performed on the addresses in Access List 1 and the outside address is the address of the Serial interface 0 sub interface x ip nat inside source list 1 interface se 0 x overload Specify which interface uses inside private and which uses outside public IP addresses int ethernet 0 ip nat inside int serial 0 x ip nat outside Save the configuration and exit the CLI save exit September 2002 5 9 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router NAT and NAPT Configuration Example 5 10 The router can be configured for NAT and NAPT simultaneously NAT and NAPT Example Public IP Z Addresses lt 1 3 10 1 1 1 Public Network FrameSaver SLV Router 02 17299 In this NAT and NAPT example m Multiple workstations in the private address space can use NAPT and the server in the private address space can use NAT m The server may need NAT to send more than TCP UDP traffic or accommodate multiple types of inbound traffic types For example a Web server that uses FTP for maintenance needs access from the public address side for HTTP and FTP using NAT B gt Procedure To configure the router for both NAPT and NAT 1 Set up the router for NAPT See Network Address Port Translation on page 5 8 2 Set up a static address for any host not using NAPT ip nat inside source static 10 1 1 1 155 22 17 1 September
47. This allows dial in access by a remote terminal when Port Use is set to Terminal When Port Use is set to Net Link Dial In Access must be set to Enable to allow an external NMS to dial in to the device Enable Dial in access is allowed Incoming calls are answered Disable Dial in access is not allowed Incoming calls are not answered You cannot disable Dial In Access when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled When you try the Cannot change Dial In Access when Modem PassThru is enabled message is displayed See Modem Operation in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for more information about Modem PassThru operation 4 100 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 25 Modem Port Options 2 of 4 Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the modem port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not require a login Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the modem port NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigne
48. and Communication options 4 73 General SNMP options 4 83 in band router 1 2 OpenLane 1 11 OpenLane system 1 11 PVCs 4 77 total number dedicated 1 6 SNMP 4 83 troubleshooting link 4 74 8 5 mass termination cable E 15 Max Port Rate 4 39 Maximum Link Rate 4 50 MDM connector E 17 menu branches 2 4 Configuration 3 2 main 2 4 path 2 5 selecting from 2 8 structure A 1 messages Cause Values 7 42 Device 7 12 Health and Status 7 20 Self Test Results 7 19 system 2 5 System and Test Status 7 19 Test Status DBM 7 27 MFR B 4 MIB access 6 10 downloading B 2 support B 2 Mode changing Operating 4 19 CLI command 6 14 Operating 7 40 Test 7 9 model number 2 5 9128 A2 GB20 80 modem 1 7 connector E 17 Health and Status messages 7 20 manually disconnecting 7 71 operation 7 70 PassThru 4 96 PassThru feature 1 7 4 7 7 70 port destination 4 75 4 89 port options 4 100 setting up 4 6 verifying setup and operation 7 71 modifying a login 6 13 Monitor DTR 4 40 Pattern 8 24 RTS 4 40 monitoring DLCI history data 10 16 FrameSaver unit 7 18 LEDs 7 5 7 7 LEDs and control leads 7 4 using NetScout Manager Plus 10 18 most recent cause values 7 42 Multilink Constituent Link 7 40 Multilink Frame Relay Bundle B 4 implementation 1 9 Multiplexed DLCI 4 69 4 71 4 79 4 81 DLCI Type 4 65 PVCs 8 25 N N1 LMI Status Enquiry 4 23 4 63 N2 LMI Er
49. and data received from the router on the COM port is transmitted out the modem port While Modem PassThru is active normal access to the FrameSaver unit through either its modem or COM port is suspended When an escape sequence minus minus minus with a minimum of 50 ms between each is detected the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation Canceling Modem PassThru Operation 7 70 When Modem PassThru is active but access to the FrameSaver unit s menu driven user interface is needed Modem PassThru can be cancelled from the Control menu Main Menu Control Disable Modem PassThru to COM September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Manually Disconnecting the Modem If Trap Disconnect is disabled a modem connection remains until it is manually disconnected Select Disconnect Modem from the Control menu Main Menu Control Disconnect Modem Respond yes to the Are you sure prompt Verifying Modem Operation B gt Procedure If Port Use is set to Terminal dial in access 1 Dial the modem s phone number using a remote VT100 compatible asynchronous terminal or PC 2 Verify that the Main Menu appears B gt Procedure If Port Use is set to Net Link SNMP Telnet FTP and trap dial out 1 Dial the modem s phone number using a PC running PPP or SLIP link protocol 2 From the PC run an IP Ping test to the modem interface If your results using either method are un
50. could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all elements in the network See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 11 3 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for the first time For a FrameSaver SLV unit the speed set would be the unit s CIR No additional configuration should be required However you should verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved NOTE If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured or if it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the units CIR to 0 Kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the units CIR before Network Health polls it If 0 Kbps is the speed setting you will need to edit the unit s CIR from Network Health Additional information can be edited as well See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information B gt Procedure To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens 2 Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element
51. lease days hours minutes infinite no lease days hours minutes infinite network network num netmask netmask prefix length prefix length no network network num netmask netmask prefix length prefix length Ping protocol dest ip source source ip Length bytes timeout time interface intf type intf num sub intf num no service dhcp traceroute protocol dest ip source source ip Length bytes timeout time hops hops interface intf type intf num sub intf num September 2002 D 5 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Command Default Settings D 6 The following list shows the default settings software version d1 06 04 no enable password ip routing no ip multicast routing service dhcp ip nat translation timeout 86400 ip dhcp relay max clients 256 bridge 1 acquire bridge 1 aging time 300 bridge 1 protocol ieee bridge 1 priority 32768 interface Ethernet 0 bridge group 1 arp timeout 14400 interface Serial 0 Encapsulation frame relay ietf bridge group 1 end September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Connectors Assignments Rear Panels 9128 A2 GB20 80 Cables and Pin This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit rear panels and pin assignments for the connectors interfaces and cables Standard interfaces are used on the unit so most cables do not have to be specially ordered they can be purchased anywhe
52. m CTS Down DBM Download Required DBM BRI Card Failed m Device Fail m DLCI Down m DTR Down m Ethernet Link Down m Excessive Error Rate EER detected at the Network or PRI interface m Internal Modem Failed m ISDN Network Failure m LMI Down m Network Communication Link Down m Out of Frame OOF at Network DSX 1 or PRI m Primary or Secondary Clock Failure m Power Supply Fan Failure m RTS Down m Self Test Failure m SLV Latency Exceeded m SLV Timeout m Suboptimal Maximum Link Rate Cannot be Achieved m Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device m Yellow Alarm Signal on the Network DSX 1 or PRI interface Enable Activates alarm conditions on the system alarm relay when an alarm condition occurs Disable Does not activate the system alarm relay when an alarm condition occurs 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 33 4 Configuration Options Configuring Physical Interfaces Characteristics for physical interfaces are explained in the following sections m Configuring the Network Interface Configuring a User Data Port CSU DSUs m Configuring the DSX 1 Interface m Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface Configuring the Network Interface When configuring the physical characteristics for the network interface select Physical from the Network menu see Table 4 6 Network Physical Interface Options Main Menu Configuration Network Physical Table 4 6 Network Physical Interface Options 1 of 4 Line Frami
53. m Correct the CIR setting so both units are configured the same m Check the line s error rate the physical line quality Contact the service provider 8 16 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 ISDN DBM Problems Table 8 4 ISDN DBM Problems 8 Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Cannot connect to the remote unit Misconfiguration m Verify that the link profiles are correct in both units both the area codes and phone or ID numbers see Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 4 Configuration Options m For a BRI DBM verify that the SPIDs and local area codes and phone numbers are correct see Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface in Chapter 4 Configuration Options m Verify that the unit at one end is configured to originate and the unit at the other end is configured to answer a call m Verify that the ISDN interface is enabled m Verify that Auto Backup is enabled and no time restrictions apply DBM LMI comes up but no data is transferred Misconfiguration Check that the DLCI numbers are correct and are the same at both ends See Table 7 14 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for additional information about ISDN problems Last Cause Value messages appear on the DBM Interface Status screen Main Menu Status s5 DBM Interface Status See Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface and Setting Up
54. m No signal being transmitted from the DTE m Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends m Check the DTE status LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 m Network cable problem m No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit m T1 facility problem m Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends m Check far end FrameSaver unit status m Contact your network provider Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link Check the router connected to the COM port OOF at DSX 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface m Incompatible framing format between the DTE and the FrameSaver unit m DSX 1 cabling problem m Check that the framing format for the DSX 1 DTE interface is correct m Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Li
55. m Turning Off the System Alarm Relay 0200 eae 7 81 8 Troubleshooting m Problem Indicators Ea an i teens 8 2 m Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication 8 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu 8 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 8 3 Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit 8 4 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 v Contents Troubleshooting Management Link Feature 8 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature 0 00 8 5 Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface 8 6 AAE 5A sostsceGaieni queen hesede ND kaed la NP REL dine 8 7 Viewing the Trap Event Log 0 00 anaana anaa 8 14 Troubleshooting Tables 0 00 0 eee ee 8 14 Devi e Problems aaa its eo hi a 8 14 Frame Relay PVC Problems eee eae eee 8 16 ISDN DBM Problems 0 00 eden OAR 8 17 Fests Available cs a paa pababa pa Kan ead a ae ee 8 18 Test Timeout Feature 2 2 cee ee 8 19 DEM TESIS ndi Ka eae ki oye ee ations deg ee 8 19 Starting and Stopping a Test 2 0000 0c eee eaee 8 20 Aborting All Tests 0 2 0 ee 8 21 RVG Tests ese erat Aatecatdret ad Magtdre fe KAG OLHKAD hoe diesen 8 22 PVG Loopback maana KPA Si apan RA ens 8 23 send Pattern oe seis ebb eee ee eee bee bee ees 8 24 Monitor Pattern seare Mee cto eta ab ba hha 8 24 CONMOCIIVILY aaa cok a ha n
56. performed successfully Switch to the newly downloaded software See Changing Software on page 7 79 File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was attempted but it was not successful m Try again making sure you type the filename correctly m Exit the FTP session or download another file See Changing Software on page 7 79 Invalid Already Active A test was already in progress when it was selected No action needed Invalid Character x A non valid printable ASCII character has been entered Reenter information using valid characters Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy A non valid date was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Invalid date and or time A non valid date or time was entered on the System Information screen The date does not exist e g February 30th Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format and or time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid Link Already Active Start was selected for a Test Call but the selected frame relay link is currently in use Wait until the link is available and try again Invalid No ISDN Channels Available Start was selected for a Test Call but all supported ISDN channels are currently in use Wait until a channel is available and try again Invalid No Test Call
57. stays at that number until the network issues a reset command 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 65 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 66 The following performance statistics are collected for ESF line conditions Table 7 21 ESF Line Condition Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Errored Seconds ES Any second with one or more ESF Error events Unavailable Seconds UAS Any second in which service is unavailable Begins incrementing at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds of severely errored seconds SES and stops incrementing after 10 consecutive seconds of no SESs Severely Errored Seconds SES Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one or more Out Of Frame OOF events Bursty Errored Seconds BES Any second with more than one but less than 320 CRC errors Controlled Slip Seconds CSS Any second with one or more controlled slips a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device This is collected for network performance statistics only Loss of Frame Count LOFC The number of Loss of Frame conditions Worst Interval The largest number of seconds for either ES UAS SES BES or CSS or the greatest Loss of Frame Count LOFC If more than one interval contains the same worst value then the oldest interval is displayed September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 DBM Call Performance Statistics 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operat
58. the maximum line rate available on the port 0 1536000 Specifies the network committed data rate Tc Possible Settings 1 65535 Default Setting Read Only Displays the DLCI s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval Tc in milliseconds This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst Size Bc Bits and CIR bps options Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size will follow the CIR or whether it will be entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the value in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained as well September 2002 4 65 4 Configuration Options 4 66 Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options 3 of 4 Bc Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 0 Allows you to display or change the DLCI s committed burst size Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other 0 1536000 Specifies the
59. the unit is detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored Primary amp Secondary Clocks Failed A failure of the primary and secondary clock sources configured for the unit are detected and the internal clock is providing timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame relay link 2 A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI on the frame relay link 1 2 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 8 7 Operation and Maintenance Health and Status Messages 6 of 7 Message What It Indicates RLB Active Interface A network Repeater Loopback RLB is active on the specified interface Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the secondary clock source configured for the unit is detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the p
60. 000 ee 11 6 About Service Level Reports a 11 6 About At a Glance Reports a 11 6 About Trend Reports e ee ee 11 7 Printed Reports 2 ANA ee de aasa 11 7 Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 2 2000005 11 7 A Menu Hierarchy 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 vii Contents B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Suppor a Kana DNA KAWA oe ease eal es Wana pea ae B 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps 0002 eee eae B 2 System Group mib 2 0 tee B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 B 3 m Interfaces Group mib 2 1 6 1 ee B 3 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 3 NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 6 m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 00 00 0 B 8 Trap warmStart 0 00000 eee B 9 Trap authenticationFailure ee eaee B 9 Traps linkUp and linkDown 0 000 e eee eee B 10 Traps enterprise Specific 2 0 eee B 13 Traps RMON Specific 0 2 0 ee B 16 Trap dialGontrol s 2 05 00 anara aa eee ae Goes WAWA ed a B 17 m RMON Alarm and Event Defaults 02000 eee B 18 Physical Interface Alarm Defaults 2 005 B 19 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 0 B 20 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area
61. 10 16 Number 4 64 9128 A2 GB20 80 DLCI continued Priority 4 66 Records 4 64 Source 4 68 statistics 7 57 status 7 29 Traps on Interfaces 4 91 Type 4 65 DNS 5 11 domains and groups correcting 10 6 verifying 10 5 download 7 77 downloading current router configuration 5 16 determining when completed 7 79 MIBs and SNMP traps B 2 SLV alarms 10 8 software 7 75 user history file 10 13 DSX 1 adapter pin assignments E 13 assigning data port to time slots 4 59 assigning time slots 4 53 connector pin assignments E 13 interface LEDS 7 10 setting up 4 43 signaling assignments 4 55 timeslot assignments 7 37 trunk conditioning 4 55 DTE Loopback 8 30 port connector pin assignments E 11 port initiated loopbacks 4 41 DTLB 8 30 DTR control lead 7 11 down 8 7 down from Port 1 Device 7 21 Ignore Control Leads 4 97 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 5 11 E Easy Install feature 4 3 EDLCI 4 80 4 81 Destination 4 70 4 71 Source 4 69 EER atISDN PRI 7 21 at Network 7 21 8 8 LED 7 8 7 10 linkDown trap B 11 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index EIA 232C COM Port connector E 4 EIR enforcement 4 62 statistics 7 53 elements DLCls 11 3 Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI 4 69 4 71 4 80 4 81 emulation programs configuring the router 5 16 ending a session 2 3 Enter Return key 2 6 entering ISDN call profiles 4 49 entering system information 4 5 Enterprise
62. 2002 10 59 Device Name 7 SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS SLV Sample Interval secs SLV Synchronization Role SLV Type Standard SLV Delivery Ratio Screen Area lt DLCI Down on SLV Timeout SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold ms SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold SLV Packet Size bytes NG Function Keys Area eae to access these functions ESC for previous menu Message Area Screen Format Description Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name Customer assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit 9126 9126 SLV 9126 IISLV FrameSaver units model number 9126 IIR 9126 IIRSLYV 9128 Il or 9128 IISLV Screen Area Selection display and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the FrameSaver unit Function Keys Area Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key then pressing Enter Message Area System related information and valid settings for input fields are in the lower left corner System and Test Status messages are in the lower right corner 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 2 5 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Navigating the Screens You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys m Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys Keyboard Keys Use the following keyboard k
63. 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server 9128 A2 GB20 80 The router provides a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Server feature as specified in RFC 2131 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and RFC 2132 DHCP Option and BOOTP Vendor Extensions DHCP is the protocol used for automatic IP address assignment DHCP setup considerations The range of IP addresses to be used by the DHCP server must be configured The maximum number of clients is 253 The DHCP server is not activated until one IP address and subnet mask are assigned to the Ethernet interface DHCP server and DHCP relay functions cannot be enabled at the same time When the DHCP IP address range is changed all binding entries automatically added routes and ARP table entries for the clients configured with the old address range are removed When the DHCP Server is enabled there can be only one IP address configured for the Ethernet interface The IP address for the next hop router provided to the hosts in the DHCP reply must be configured The minimum and maximum lease time settings can be configured The subnet mask can be configured along with the IP address range optional The DHCP server domain name can be configured optional The Domain Name Server DNS IP address can be configured optional September 2002 5 11 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router DHCP Server wi
64. 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Tx Underruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 34 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations CLI Commands The FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router is managed with text commands from the Command Line Interface CLI The CLI can be accessed m Locally via a PC or asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port m Remotely via a Telnet session The conventions used in the command line syntax are shown below Convention Meaning Brackets indicate an optional element Braces indicate a required entry Vertical bars separate mutually exclusive elements Enter one element only CH Braces within brackets indicate a required choice within an optional element Italics The entry is a variable Courier Bold The entry in its explicit form is typed as shown Most commands can be abbreviated See the FrameSaver SLV 9126 I Router Quick Reference for more information X X X X 32 bit IP address and mask information where x is an 8 bit weighted decimal notation XX XX XX XX XX XX MAC address information where x is a hexadecimal notation With the exce
65. 4 2 To automatically create Class of Service names and associate them with code points according to RFCs 2474 2497 and 2498 select RfcCodePoints The following settings are established Field Setting After RfcCodePoints Selected Class of Service Name 1 NewCtrl 2 Expd Fwd 3 AFClass4 4 AFClass3 5 AFClass2 6 AFClass1 7 Default Measure Latency amp Availability Code Points 1 NetwCtrl 110000 111000 2 Expd Fwd 101110 3 AFClass4 100010 100100 100110 4 AFClass3 011010 011100 011110 5 AFClass2 010010 010100 010110 6 AFClass1 001010 001100 001110 7 Default 000000 3 If these settings are satisfactory proceed to Step 10 4 Type a name of up to 8 characters into one of the Name fields next to IDs 1 6 5 To unassign all code points by inserting blank names select ClrAllCodePoints To assign all Code Points to a Class of Service name of Default select DefaultCodePoints 6 Select PgDn or PgUp The Code Point Assignment screen appears 7 For any Code Point you want to assign to the name type the name you selected in Step 4 into the Name field to the right of the Code Point September 2002 4 25 4 Configuration Options 4 26 8 Select Save then select PgDn or PgUp The Class of Service Definitions page reappears In the Code Points Assigned column next to your selected name there is now a Y for Yes 9 If latency and
66. 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag frFrExtDIciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciStsInactiveSecs 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 32 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 16 Alarm OID Cross Reference 2 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Current Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N Frame Size Upper Limits 1 5 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx
67. 8 Controlling SNMP Access eun sinipa tuhur apta enir tee ee 6 9 Disabling SNMP Access 000 eee eee eee ee 6 9 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 6 10 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 6 11 Creating a Login tee ee 6 12 Modifying a Login 6 13 Deleting a Logi cin eas ge eee ee ee eee NLNG PG hh 6 13 Controlling Router CLI Access 00 eee eeaee 6 14 Access Levels Command Modes 6 14 Changing Access LevelS 00 0 eee eee 6 15 7 Operation and Maintenance Displaying System Information 0 eee eee eee 7 3 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads a 7 4 FrameSaver SLV 9126 LEDs and Control Leads 7 5 FrameSaver SLV 9128 II LEDs and Control Leads 7 7 LED Descriptions aa e ea eee 7 8 Control Lead Descriptions 0 000 cee eee 7 11 Device Messages eee tee tees 7 12 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Contents m Status Information ros serani e a naa ENa A eee 7 18 System and Test Status Messages 7 19 Network LMI Reported DLC ls Status 7 29 IP Path Connection Status e eee ee eee 7 31 PVC Connection Status cee eee 7 33 Time Slot Assignment Status a 7 36 DBM Interface Status 0 00 cee eee 7 38 m IP Routing Table 00 cece tees 7 48 m Performance Statistics 0 0
68. 8 4 Backspace 2 6 2 10 Back to Back Mode Active 7 20 operation setting up 4 19 Backup Active 7 20 assigning DLCls to a group 4 18 auto 4 104 changing automatic configuration 4 14 dial 4 12 Group 4 67 ISDN 1 8 manually forcing 7 72 over network interface 4 19 setting timers and thresholds 4 17 verifying setup 7 74 Bc 4 66 Be 4 66 Bearer channel 4 45 BECN ISDN backup 1 9 Bit Stuffing 4 35 BKP LED 7 9 blank field value 2 9 branches menus 2 4 Bridge CLI commands C 9 filtering 5 14 bursting port 1 10 IN 2 September 2002 C Call Directories 4 6 Retry 4 92 Status 7 40 Caller ID 4 51 6 5 Identification Method 4 51 6 5 canceling activations 9 9 canceling Modem PassThru 7 70 Cause Value messages 7 42 central clock 1 10 certificate status 9 7 Certificate Summary Report 9 9 CGA 4 55 changing Access Levels 6 15 auto configuration 4 14 automatic backup configuration 4 14 configuration options 3 5 domains and groups 10 6 software release 7 79 changing operating mode 4 19 Channel Loopback 8 32 Character Length 4 96 matching 2 9 CIR enforcement 4 62 statistics 7 53 CIR bps 4 65 Circuit Identifier 4 37 4 48 circuit multiplexed PVCs 8 25 Class of Service Code Points 4 27 performance statistics 7 59 Clearing cross connection assignments 4 51 Event LMI 4 23 4 63 existing information 4 5 statistics 7 51 CLI access and configuration 1 3 comman
69. ASCII Text Entry Edit or display circuit identifier information maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information September 2002 4 37 4 Configuration Options Configuring a User Data Port CSU DSUs Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to display or change the physical characteristics of the data port connected to the DTE see Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options Main Menu Configuration Data Ports Physical Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 5 Port Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the data port is being used and can be configured Enable The port is active and can be used to transmit and receive data Disable The port is not active When the port is disabled the following will occur m No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated m LED for the port will be held in an Off state No The operation is cancelled Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl a key also acts as a No Yes Port status is disabled Port Use Possible Settings Frame Relay Synchronous Data Default Setting Frame Relay when the port supports frame relay Synchronous Data when the port only supports synchronous data Determines how the data port will be used Display Conditions This option only appears for user data on Port 2 Frame Relay The port is configured for f
70. Active Stop was selected for a Test Call and no test call is active on the selected link This can occur when the test is ended because the link is needed for an active connection but the PVC Test screen has not yet been updated to Start Start the Test Call again when the connection is Inactive again Invalid time must be hh mm ss A non valid system time was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the time in the hour minutes seconds format September 2002 7 13 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 6 Device Messages 3 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Invalid Password Login is required and an m Try again incorrect password was entered access is denied m Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test Combination A conflicting loopback or pattern test was in progress when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or another interface when Start was selected m Wait until other test ends and message clears m Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test m Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from Limit of six Login IDs reached An attempt to enter a new login ID was made and the limit of six login password combinations has been reached m Delete another login password combination m Reenter the new login ID Limit of Mgmt PVCs reached New
71. Assembler Disassembler FRAD a gender adapter is required to convert the COM Port to Terminal Printer cable s plug type interface to a socket type interface for the router s or FRAD s AUX port LAN Adapter Converter and Cable E 10 A LAN adapter converter and cable is not needed for the FrameSaver SLV 9128 II carrier mounted unit and cannot be used with the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II The following shows the pin assignments for the m DB25 plug to modular jack converter between the COM port and the 8 conductor LAN Adapter cable Feature No 3100 F2 920 m Custom 8 conductor cable with modular plugs on both ends between the converter and the LAN Adapter Feature No 3100 F2 910 Plug to Modular Rx Data Signal Ground Tx Data DTR CD RTS Rx Clock Jack Converter Cable Com Port 8 Position Plug to Plug to DB25 Plug Modular Jack Modular Jack LAN Adapter Tx Clock Unused DTR Tx Data Signal Ground Rx Data CTS Frame Ground Unused September 2002 98 16214 9128 A2 GB20 80 DTE Port Connector 9128 A2 GB20 80 The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34 position V 35 connector to the DTE E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Signal ITU CT Direction 34 Pin Socket Shield 101 A Signal Ground Common SG 102 B Request to Send RTS 105 To DSU In C Clear to Send CTS 106 From D
72. D Network Frames Dropped Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop CirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 59 1 D Network Frames Offered Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciOfferedFrOverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 61 1 D Network Frames Dropped Above EIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop OverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 63 1 D DLCI EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 8 1 D Backup Count MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciStsBackupCnt 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 9 1 D Backup Time MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsBackupTime 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Maximum Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyMax 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 29 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 4 of 5 Object I
73. DLCI EDLCI 0 to 62 For multiplexed DLCls a number IP from 0 to 62 identifies an individual link embedded within a DLCI PM For IP Enabled DLCls IP is displayed For payload managed DLCls not IP Enabled PM is displayed September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 12 PVC Connection Status 2 of 2 7 Operation and Maintenance Field Status What It Indicates Status Active Inactive Disabled Invalid Identifies whether the physical interfaces LMIs and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection m The PVC is currently active m The PVC is inactive because Alarm conditions and network and SLV communication status indicate that data cannot be successfully passed The unit has disabled the interface or frame relay link due to internal operating conventions Activation of an alternate virtual circuit is not warranted that is no alarm condition on the primary destination link has been detected m The PVC cannot be activated and is essentially disabled as a result of how the unit was configured Possible causes The physical interface at one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled The frame relay link on one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled m Some portion of the PVC connection is not fully configured For the circuit to be active both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active September 200
74. DLCI s committed burst size Excess Burst Size Bits Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Be Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 1536000 Allows you to display or change the DLCl s excess burst size 0 1536000 Specifies the DLCl s excess burst size DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as quality of service All data on Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface applies to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCls on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router NOTE For units with multiple user data ports since pipelining occurs on Port 1 it is recommended that higher priority data be connected to Port 1 Display Conditions This option is not available for the network interface or if the model has ISDN backup capability an ISDN DBM interface Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting
75. DSR To DTE Out 7 Not used 8 Clear To Send CTS To DTE Out 9 Not used Pins 1 6 and 8 are tied together E 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments COM Port for 9128 II Carrier Mount The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the carrier mounted FrameSaver SLV 9128 1 NAM s 8 position communication port interface connector Signal Direction Pin DCE Received Data RXD From DCE Out 2 Signal Ground SG To From DCE 3 DCE Transmit Data TXD To DCE In 4 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR To DCE In 5 DCE Carrier Detect CD From DCE Out 6 DCE Request to Send RTS To DCE In 7 COM Port to PC Cable Feature No 3100 F2 550 Order this cable when connecting the 8 position COM port to a PC The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position DTE Modular Plug DB9 Socket No Connection Rx Data 2 2 Rx Data Signal Ground 3 5 Signal Ground Tx Data 4 3 Tx Data DTR 5 4 DTR CD 6 1 CD RTS 7 8 CTS No 8 Connection 6 DSR 7 RTS 98 16166 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 E 5 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable Feature No 3100 F2 540 Order this cable when connecting the 8 position COM port to a terminal or printer rather than to a PC The following shows
76. Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Display Conditions This option does not apply to the FrameSaver SLV Router Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 97 4 Configuration Options 4 98 Table 4 24 Communication Port Options 3 of 5 Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be perm
77. Disabled 7 22 8 8 Protocol 4 100 4 102 setting up ISDN profiles 4 49 Source 4 68 Status 4 49 Traps 4 90 Traps Interfaces 4 90 troubleshooting management 8 5 TS Management 4 75 linkUp and linkDown events 4 90 traps B 10 LLB 8 27 8 31 8 33 September 2002 IN 7 Index LMI and PVC availability 1 10 Behavior 4 21 4 22 Clearing Event N3 4 23 4 63 configuring frame relay and 4 21 Down 7 22 8 9 Error Event N2 4 23 4 62 frame relay statistics 7 62 Heartbeat T1 4 23 4 63 Inbound Heartbeat T2 4 23 4 63 N4 Measurement Period T3 4 24 4 63 OK control lead 7 11 packet utility 8 5 Parameters 4 62 pass through 4 21 Protocol 1 2 4 61 Status Enquiry N1 4 23 4 63 trace log 8 6 uploading packet capture data 7 80 local external DTE loopback 4 41 locked out 6 3 6 12 8 4 LOF LED 7 10 Log LMI Trace 8 6 Trap Event 7 69 logging in 2 2 logging out 2 3 Login creating 6 12 ID 6 12 modifying and deleting 6 13 Required 4 85 4 97 4 101 6 3 6 6 6 7 logins 6 1 Loopback Data Channel 8 32 DTE 8 30 Line 8 27 Payload 8 28 Port DTE Initiated 4 41 PVC 8 23 Remote 8 31 8 33 Repeater 8 29 V 54 8 32 LOS at DSX 1 7 22 8 10 at ISDN PRI 7 23 at Network 7 23 8 10 LED 7 8 7 10 linkDown trap B 11 Loss of Signal linkDown trap B 11 IN 8 September 2002 M MAC address 7 3 Main Menu screen 2 4 maintenance 7 1 making input selections 2 9 Management
78. ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 7 7 Operation and Maintenance LED Descriptions Table 7 1 General Status LEDs identifies the alarms that cause the Alarm LED to light See Table 7 2 Network DSX or PRI Interface LEDs for network DSX 1 and PRI interface LED information Table 7 3 User Data Port LED CSU DSUs Only for user data port interface LED information and Table 7 4 Ethernet Port LED Routers Only for Ethernet interface LED information Table 7 1 General Status LEDs 1 of 2 Label Indiction Color What It Means OK Power and Green ON FrameSaver unit has power and it is Operational operational Status OFF FrameSaver unit is in a power on self test or there is a failure ALM Operational Red ON FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an Alarm Fail error or fault has been detected Error fault alarm conditions Alarm Indication Signal AIS CTS Down DBM BRI Card Failure DBM Download Failed DLCI Down DTR Down Ethernet Link Down Exceeded Error Rate EER Internal Modem Failed ISDN Network Failed LMI Down Loss of Signal LOS Network Communication Link Down Out of Frame OOF Power Supply Fan Failure Primary or Secondary Clock Failed Self Test Failed SLV Latency Exceeded SLV Timeout Suboptimal Link Rat
79. ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about ISDN DBM configuration 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 17 8 Troubleshooting Tests Available The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9126 9128 or 9128 II Test Menu Example main test 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 TEST Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests PRI Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit If the unit does not have the ISDN DBM feature ISDN Ca11 does not appear with the ISDN PVC Tests PRI Physical Tests only appears when an ISDN PRI DBM is installed PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured on the interface Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and secured Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5 x management system using its Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface as well as from the menu driven user interface 8 18 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Test Timeout Feature DBM Tests 9128 A2 GB20 80 A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the
80. Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port or a virtual router port Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options 4 of 4 Backup Group Possible Settings A B C Z None Default Setting None Assigns DLCls to a backup group so backup does not take place unless all DLCls in the group are no longer operational or latency has been exceeded Backup is terminated when one DLCI in the group is operational again This feature reduces backup charges when redundant PVCs have been configured Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port a virtual router port or an ISDN DBM interface A Z Specifies the designation for this group of DLCls Only DLCls in a PVC will be considered part of a Backup Group None No Backup Groups have been set up 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 67 4 Configuration Options Configuring PVC Connections 4 68 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections and their DLCI Records PVC Connections can also be created manually s
81. NAT Network Address Translation support provides the means to bind IP addresses in a private network to addresses in a public or global network for transparent routing between the two domains on all PVCs Up to 30 NAT pools are supported Routing table configuration permits configuration of static routes Up to 32 entries can be made IP forwarding to forward multicast IP packets and customer datagrams Filtering on the Ethernet and frame relay interfaces configurable from the CLI access list allows the router to filter MAC frames and prevent unwanted inbound connections Two filter access lists are supported per interface one for the transmit and one for the receive direction The following protocol is supported DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol support for dynamic allocation of IP addresses and automatic cleanup when a subinterface is deleted as well as allowing multiple IP address ranges for DHCP deny capability The DHCP server and relay cannot be enabled at the same time Up to 253 DHCP clients can be supported One DHCP pool of addresses and one IP address range per pool is supported September 2002 1 3 1 About the FrameSaver SLV FrameSaver Diagnostic and SLM Feature Sets Depending upon the model ordered the FrameSaver unit has the basic FrameSaver frame relay and diagnostic capability or it is enhanced with additional SLM Service Level Management reporting capability These are referred to as feature se
82. NAT static mappings to four public IP addresses NAT Mapping Public IP Addresses Private IP Addresses 192 128 22 28 10 1 3 2 192 128 22 29 10 1 3 3 192 128 22 30 10 1 3 4 192 128 22 31 10 1 3 5 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router p gt Procedure To set up NAT 1 From the Main Menu screen press Ctrl a then Shift r to access the router s Command Line Interface Enter the following commands en config t ip nat inside source static 10 ip nat inside source static 10 ip nat inside source static 10 ip nat inside source static 10 2 192 128 22 28 3 192 128 22 29 4 192 128 22 30 5 192 128 22 31 Enable NAT on interfaces with the following commands where x is the number configured for the sub interface interface ethernet 0 ip nat inside interface serial 0 x ip nat outside Save the configuration and exit the CLI save exit September 2002 5 7 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router Network Address Port Translation Network Address Port Translation NAPT allows multiple clients in a local network to simultaneously access remote networks using a single IP address This benefits telecommuters and SOHO Small Office Home Office users that have multiple clients in an office running TCP UDP applications NAPT is sometimes referred to as PAT Port Address Translation NAPT provides a many to one mapping and uses one pu
83. NOTE This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCls connected to a far end unit with hardware bypass capability Display Conditions This option appears only if SLV Type is Standard Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded causing the DLCl s status to turn Inactive an alarm and SNMP trap are generated and a Health and Status message created Disable Missed SLV packets are monitored but the DLCI is not declared down SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the DLCI Inactive status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 29 4 Configuration Options 4 30 Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options 3 of 3 SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold ms Available Settings 50 51 52 10000 Default Setting 10000 Specifies the number of milliseconds that must be exceeded before an SLV Latency Threshold alarm event is declared and backup if configured is initiated for a DLCI I
84. OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Frames Received D MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs None Must be 0 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames tmin configured OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Sent D MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs None Must be 0 Tag frCircuitSentFrames tmin configured OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0 EXGSCANGCIR Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutciR min conpgurad OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx CIR Utilization D MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs None Must be 0 Tag frCircuitSentOctets cen configuren OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 24 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Rx DLCI Link D MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 60secs 1 Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets min capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Tx DLCI Link
85. OO000000 000000000 00000000 N ADOT 0 999990000 O 9000000000 O O Q o zoo O 00 16850 Model 9128 II The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 E 3 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments COM Port Connector The type of COM port connector depends on the model COM Port for 9126 and 9128 II 25 Position The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9128 II units 25 position EIA 232C communication port connector Signal Direction Pin Shield GND 1 DCE Transmit Data TXD From DTE In 2 DCE Receive Data RXD To DTE Out 3 DCE Request to Send RTS From DTE In 4 DCE Clear to Send CTS To DTE Out 5 DCE Data Set Ready DSR From DTE In 6 Signal Ground SG 7 DCE Carrier Detect CD To DTE Out 8 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 20 Pins 5 6 and 8 are tied together COM Port for 9126 II 9 Position The following table provides the pin assignments for the 1 slot FrameSaver SLV 9126 II s 9 position EIA 232C communication port connector Pin Signal Direction 1 Data Carrier Detect DCD To DTE Out 2 Receive Data RD To DTE Out 3 Transmit Data TD From DTE In 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 5 Signal Ground GND 6 Data Set Ready
86. One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Alarm conditions include Loss of Signal LOS or far end loss of signal Out of Frame OOF Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm Strings ifString down No alarms exist e g Network T1 down due to yellow alarm ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp No alarms on the interface String SifString up Synchronous Data Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB m iflndex RFC 1573 m ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port Alarm conditions include DTR off RTS off Not DTR or RTS but link is down String ifString alarmString down e g Sync Data Port S01P1 DTR and RTS down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp No alarms on the port String ifString up 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTR lead state 2 The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state 3 If the LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enab
87. OpenLane SLM s extensive online Help the application is self documenting and you have access to the most current system information gt Procedure To set up FrameSaver support 1 2 O oa A O Start the OpenLane services then access the application Log in as Admin for access to customer profiles frame relay access facilities components and PVC components Add FrameSaver devices Create customer profiles Set up historical data collection Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data for FrameSaver devices with the SLM feature set activated See the Product Related Documents and OpenLane online Help to learn how to perform these steps and for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 9 3 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features Ordering SLM Feature Set Activations When advanced SLM functionality is needed at a site an Activation Certificate Feature No 9126 C1 220 or 9128 C1 220 can be ordered which will allow you to activate SLM features in FrameSaver devices with the diagnostic feature set You must have the OpenLane SLM system Release 5 3 or later to activate SLM capability in FrameSaver devices and to manage your certificates NOTE If you have a combination of models in your network a separate Activation Certificate must be ordered for each model number Each certificate can be ordered for a single unit or for many units Contact
88. Performance Statistics Ethernet September 2002 7 51 7 Operation and Maintenance Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 7 52 These statistics appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics Service Level Verification They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCls are multiplexed or IP Enabled Information displayed on the SLV Performance Statistics screen depends on DLCI type See Table 7 16 SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI or Table 7 17 SLV Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI On either screen select PrevDLCI or NextDLCI to view statistics for the previous or next DLCI on the link On the IP Enabled DLCI screen select PrevPath or NextPath to view statistics for the previous or next path associated with the DLCI For standard or multiplexed DLCls the statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the connection If the far end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit frame relay latency and FDR DDR performance statistics are collected The Frame Relay Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered frames offered frames the Data Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered octets offered octets If the far end device is a non FrameSaver device or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620 only frame relay statistics are collected Table 7 16 SLV Performance Statistics for Mu
89. Setting Enable Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated automatically Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the maximum duration of the tests Display Conditions This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes inclusive Primary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal DBM Default Setting Net1 Allows you to select the primary clock source for the unit The source selected provides all of the timing within the FrameSaver unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces Failure of the clock specified by this configuration option results in automatic fallback to the Secondary Clock Source configuration option setting NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set
90. Tag devFrExtLinkTx gamins Underruns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Rx Non octet D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Allgus Tag devFrExtLinkRx CIamning NonOctet OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx CRC D MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Ents Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr ero ming OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total LMI D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Errors 15 mins 1 contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is B 21 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area These alarms apply to all DLCls on the network interface and can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the Paradyne defined alarm area Table B 12 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 1 of 2 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID Interval Type Default Default DLCI Inactive D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 nggonga Tag devErExtDiciStsinactive 15 mins Secs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D Missing D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 5 5 e Ee Tag devErExtDiciMissedsivs 15 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1
91. TraceRoute test to the specified destination IP address The general format of the TraceRoute results is seen as follows Tracing route to x x x x over a max of nn hops with nnn byte packet 1 lt 100ms lt 100ms lt 100ms x x x x 2 lt 100ms lt 100ms lt 100ms x x x x 3 lt 200ms lt 200ms lt 200ms x x x x 4 lt 200ms lt 200ms lt 200ms x x x x The first column is the hop number which is the Time to Live TTL value set in the IP packet header Each of the three next columns contains the round trip time in 100ms intervals for each attempt to reach the destination with that TTL value If no response is received an asterisk is displayed in place of the roundtrip time The fifth column is the IP address of the responding system If no response is received for a hop the last column is blank protocol The protocol of the echo message for TraceRoute ip dest ip Address of the device to TraceRoute source The source IP address The default source IP address is the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address source ip The source IP address used in the TraceRoute test The default source IP address will be the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address The source IP address specified must be an IP address assigned to an interface or sub interface length Specify the length of packets sent bytes Number of data bytes Range 0
92. When no trap events have been logged No Events in Log appears in the Event column ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 69 7 Operation and Maintenance Modem Operation This section includes the following m Activating the Modem PassThru Feature m Canceling Modem PassThru Operationn m Manually Disconnecting the Modem m Verifying Modem Operation See Setting Up the Modem in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information Activating the Modem PassThru Feature Access to the router s VT100 compatible user interface is provided through the FrameSaver units Modem PassThru feature also known as Router Assist A dial up connection to the FrameSaver unit is used to access the router when the unit is set up for this use See Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature in Chapter 4 Configuration Options to configure the unit for Modem PassThru operation Once the unit is set up to use this feature each time access to the router is needed the feature is activated from the Control menu Main Menu Control Enable Modem PassThru to COM When this feature is active a logical connection between the unit s modem and COM ports is made and data received over the modem port is transmitted out the COM port to the router s AUX or console port
93. a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled 1 60 Up to an hour can be set FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client Disable Does not allow FTP sessions FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Transfer Rate Kbps Possible Settings 1 1536 Default Setting 1536 Sets the maximum r
94. address source ip The source IP address used in the ping request The default source IP address is the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address The source IP address specified must be an IP address assigned to an interface or sub interface length Specify the length of echo packets sent bytes Number of data bytes Range 0 1500 Default 64 timeout Specify the time in seconds before the ping test is abandoned time Number in seconds before the ping test is abandoned Maximum is 30 seconds Default 5 seconds interface Specify the target interface The default target interface is the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address intf type Two interface types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface intf num The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces 0 sub intf num The sub interface number Sub interfaces are only supported on the Network interface Serial 0 Sub interface number range is 0 4 294 967 295 September 2002 C 23 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 24 Table C 12 Diagnostic Commands 2 of 2 traceroute protocol dest ip source source ip length bytes timeout time hops hops interface intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard This command performs the
95. address bits belong to the network and subnet fields and which bits belong to the host field netmask The network mask for the pool of IP addresses prefix length or Specify the number of bits in a network mask address that are ones and define the network and subnet fields prefix length Number of ones bits in a network mask address Valid range is 1 32 NOTES Ifthe mask or prefix length is not specified the class A B or C natural mask is used When the DHCP address range is changed all binding entries and dynamic routes for the clients configured with the old address range are removed September 2002 C 17 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations DHCP Relay Agent Commands Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP relay agent commands Table C 10 DHCP Relay Agent Commands ip dhcp relay max clients max dhcp clients no ip dhcp relay max clients max dhcp clients Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to limit the number of DHCP clients supported The no dhcp relay max agents command resets the maximum number of DHCP clients supported to the default of 1 Example ip dhcp relay max clients 1 max dhep clients Number of DHCP clients supported 1 256 no ip dhcp server jp address Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to specify or remove the address of the DHCP server where DHCP requests received on
96. an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear Alternate Clears the Alternate Destination Link and Alternate Destination DLCI settings and suppresses Alternate Destination EDLCI Alternate Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI for a frame relay interface used for backup The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLC must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection Display Conditions This option does not appear when the Alternate Destination Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 15 PVC Connection Options 4 of 4 Alternate Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a backup connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Alternate Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 71 4 Configuration Options Configuring the IP Path List Select IP Pat
97. are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface intf num Interface index number for both the Ethernet and Serial interfaces 0 or 1 sub intf num Sub interface number Sub interfaces are only supported on the network interface Serial 0 If a Serial interface is specified a sub interface must also be specified Sub interface number range is 0 4 294 967 295 overload Specifies that Network Address Port Translation NAPT also known as Port Address Translation PAT is to be used for UDP and TCP static Specifies a fixed one to one mapping between an inside private IP address and port for PAT and a outside global IP address and port for PAT For inside source translation a private address and port for PAT is mapped to a global address and port for PAT Static inside and outside destination translations are not supported Static ip addr1 Specifies the first IP address in the static route For inside source translation this is the local address to be mapped static ip addr2 Specifies the second IP address in the static route For inside source translation this is the global address to be mapped protocol Protocol that applies to this static route which include tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol Static port num Specifies the second TCP UDP port in a static protocol route For inside source translation this is the local port
98. as described below No command is available to set IP options The router does not process and drops any IP datagrams with the following IP options m Loose source and record route type 131 m Strict source and record route type 133 m Security type 130 m Stream ID type 136 The router does process IP datagrams with the following IP options but does not provide its IP address or timestamp information in the response message m Record route type 7 m Timestamp type 68 Applications Supported by NAT 9128 A2 GB20 80 The router supports the following applications and protocols m FTP m HTTP m Ping m RealPlayer m Telnet TFTP September 2002 5 5 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router NAT Configuration Example 5 6 NAT Example Public IP Public Network FrameSaver SLV Router 02 17297 In this NAT example m NAT is used for one to one mapping of addresses m The Ethernet interface is in the private address space and the network interface is in public address space With NAT enabled a single global PVC is used to access the public network m When using NAT the network interface must be numbered because the Ethernet interface is configured within the private address space m The next hop router default gateway for the clients is the Ethernet IP address of the router 10 1 3 1 m There are four private IP addresses configured on the Ethernet side of the router with
99. cause in the Wait and try again Unavailable service or option not Unspecified available class applies for this not available event Switching 42 Switching equipment Wait and try again Equipment sending the cause is Congestion experiencing heavy traffic Suspended Call 83 A call resume has been 1 Verify the number in the Exists But Not Call attempted but no Inbound Calling ID ID suspended call exists for field for the suspended this phone number call 2 Reissue the Call Resume command using the correct number Temporary Failure 41 Network is not functioning Wait and try again correctly but the condition is not expected to continue for long September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 14 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 6 of 6 Message Cause No What It Indicates What To Do Unallocated Number 1 Destination requested cannot be reached because the Inbound Calling ID number is not assigned or allocated Assign the Inbound Calling ID User Access 43 Network was unable to No action is needed Information deliver the access Discarded information when trying to establish the call User Alerting No 19 During call establishment 1 Verify that the remote Answer an alerting was received but device is operational and a connection was not configured to answer 2 Retry the call User Busy 17 Called number c
100. config dhcp Allows you to specify or remove the domain name provided to clients by the DHCP server This domain name is provided to the clients in the DHCP reply message from the DHCP server domain name Specifies a string defining the domain name The domain name string contains 255 ASCII printable characters The default is None dns server ip address no dns server ip address Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to specify or remove the Domain Name System DNS IP address provided to clients by the DHCP server Example dns server 132 53 4 2 ip address Specifies the IP address of the DNS server September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands 3 of 3 network network num netmask netmask prefix length prefix length no network network num netmask netmask prefix length prefix length Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to specify or remove a subnet and subnet mask to a DHCP server pool The configured subnet and subnet mask will specify the range of IP addresses that will be allocated to clients by the DHCP server Only one network or subnet may be specified for a server pool Example network 8 network num The IP address of the DHCP address pool netmask Specify a network mask that indicates which
101. data 7 80 upstream pipelining 1 2 9128 A2 GB20 80 user history adding files 10 13 installing files 10 15 monitoring DLCI 10 16 statistics gathering 1 7 1 10 user interface 2 1 cannot be accessed 8 15 communication port options 4 96 resetting restoring access 8 4 Telnet session 4 84 user defined history 10 13 V V 35 connector E 11 crossover cable E 12 straight through cable E 12 V 54 Loopback 4 36 7 21 7 27 8 32 Value Out of Range message 4 64 4 65 variable bindings B 11 B 16 VCI 1 7 verifying DBM setup 7 74 ISDN lines 7 74 modem setup 7 71 viewing LEDs 7 5 7 7 packet capture results 8 6 virtual path or channel identifier 1 7 VPI 1 7 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index W warmStart events General Traps 4 89 trap B 9 warranty A Web site access to documentation xiii glossary xii Y Yellow Alarm B 11 Signal 7 8 at DSX 1 or Network 7 26 8 13 at ISDN PRI 7 26 September 2002 IN 15 Index IN 16 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80
102. data FTP data connections 21 ftp File Transfer Protocol 23 telnet Telnet 25 smtp Simple Mail Transport Protocol 37 time Time 43 whois Nicname 49 tacacs TAC Access Control System 53 domain Domain Name Service 70 gopher Gopher 79 finger Finger 80 www World Wide Web HTTP 101 hostname NIC hostname server 109 pop2 Post Office Protocol v2 110 pop3 Post Office Protocol v3 111 sunrpc Sun Remote Procedure Call 119 nntp Network News Transport Protocol 179 bgp Border Gateway Protocol 194 irc Internet Relay Chat 512 exec Exec rsh 513 login Login rlogin 514 cmd Remote commands rcmd 514 syslog Syslog 515 Ipd Printer service 517 talk Talk 540 uucp UNIX to UNIX Copy Program 543 klogin Kerberos login 544 kshell Kerberos shell September 2002 C 33 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations UDP Port Designations C 34 Use the User Datagram Protocol UDP port designations in Table C 17 UDP Port Designations when specifying a specific UCP port to be filtered Table C 17 UDP Port Designations UDP Port UDP Port Name Description 7 echo Echo 9 discard Discard 37 time Time 42 nameserver IEN116 name service obsolete 49 tacacs TAC Access Control System 53 domain Domain Name Service DNS 67 bootpc Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP client 68 bootps Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP server 69 tftp Trivial File Transfer
103. data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this network interface 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 29 8 Troubleshooting DTE Loopback 8 30 The DTE external Loopback DTLB test loops the received signal on a DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports Use this test for isolating problems on the DTE interface Main Menu Test Data Port Physical Tests An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back DSX Network Interface Interface gt DTLB DTLB DTE DTE Port 2 Port 1 98 16190 CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Send Line Loopback 9128 A2 GB20 80 The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Any Loopback on the same interface m Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use
104. downloading to an entire network or a portion of the network On demand polling of FrameSaver devices and SNMP polling and reporting are available The maintenance scheduling feature allows for the scheduling of multiple periodic maintenance periods and provides a record of all scheduled maintenance periods past present and future September 2002 1 11 1 About the FrameSaver SLV NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes 1 12 Provides complete LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for FrameSaver devices The following features are supported using this application m Thresholds for RMON 1 Remote Monitoring Version 1 alarms and events can be configured m Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2 Version 2 data NetScout Manager Plus s Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver devices to measure up to eleven network layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each Its IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network bandwidth for traffic and protocol analysis identifying the network s top six users In addition it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15 minute buckets with 96 buckets in a 24 hour period for up to five days worth of data m Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver devices at sites where full 7 layer monitoring a
105. effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol Configuring the Modem Port Select Modem Port from the Management and Communication menu to configure the modem port seeTable 4 25 Modem Port Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port Table 4 25 Modem Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the modem port NOTE If the Default IP Destination is set to Modem see Table 4 17 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The modem port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The modem port is a network communications link to the IP network You cannot change Port Use to Net Link when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled When you try the Cannot change Port Use Modem PassThru is enabled message is displayed See Modem Operation in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for more information about Modem PassThru operation Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the system through the internal modem
106. following System Overview System Overview below FrameSaver Diagnostic and SLM Feature Sets on page 1 4 FrameSaver Diagnostic Feature Set on page 1 5 FrameSaver SLM Feature Set on page 1 10 OpenLane SLM System on page 1 11 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes on page 1 12 Our system solution consists of FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier units OpenLane SLM Service Level Management system NetScout Manager Plus application Standalone NetScout Probes if needed This solution provides increased manageability monitoring and diagnostics so customers can identify problems more efficiently troubleshoot those problems faster and maximize their network to control costs It is also compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software The FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router and 9126 9126 II and 9128 1 CSU DSUs operate with other FrameSaver devices and when teamed with internationally based FrameSaver devices in multinational applications provide a complete global frame relay management solution 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 1 1 1 About the FrameSaver SLV CSU DSU Specific Features The following features only apply to the FrameSaver SLV 9126 9126 II and 9128 I CSU DSUs Two Interfaces Provides two interfaces for traffic Synchronous DTE port for user data Ethernet Interface for management data Upstream Pipelining Provides pipelining capability into the Wide Area Network WAN f
107. following will occur m No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated m All port uses that refer to the Ethernet port like the Default IP Destination and Initial Route Destination will be reset to their default values see Table 4 17 Node IP Options and Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the Ethernet port 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the port which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the IP address with zeros Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the Ethernet port 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Set the Ethernet port s subnet mask The range for each byte is 000 to 255 Clear Fills the subnet mask associated with the IP address with zeros September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 23 Ethernet Management Options 2 of 2 Default Gateway Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address for the port s default gateway It is used for packets that do not have a route
108. for both interfaces Specify that messages for all IP addresses should be routed to the upstream router at 172 20 95 1 en config t int e 0 ip address 10 1 3 1 255 255 255 0 no bridge group 1 int se 0 x ip address 172 20 95 2 255 255 255 0 no bridge group 1 exit ip route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 172 20 95 1 save exit 5 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router Network Address Translation Network Address Translation NAT is used when a private network s internal IP addresses cannot be used outside the private network IP addresses may be restricted for privacy reasons or they may not be valid public IP addresses The router provides NAT as described in RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT NAT allows hosts in a private local network to transparently access the external public or global network by using a block of public addresses Static mapping enables access to selected local hosts from the outside using these external IP addresses Traditional NAT and Network Address Port Translation NAPT are supported When both NAT and NAPT are enabled one to one NAT mapping is performed by translating a range of assigned public IP addresses to a similar sized pool of private addresses followed by many to one NAPT bindings Up to 254 IP addresses can be allocated for NAT usage IP Options Processing The NAT and NAPT functions handle and process the IP datagrams with options set
109. gt Communication Port Table 4 24 Communication Port Options 1 of 5 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Modem PassThru Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port NOTE If the Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 4 17 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port You cannot change Port Use to Net Link when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled When you try the Cannot change Port Use Modem PassThru is enabled message is displayed Modem PassThru Available to the FrameSaver SLV 9626 only the COM port is connected to the router s auxiliary AUX or console port so the router can be accessed via a dial up connection to the unit When this feature is active a logical connection between the unit s modem and COM ports is made and data received over the modem port is transmitted out the COM port to the router s AUX or console port When an escape sequence minus minus minus with a minimum of 50 ms between each is detected the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilo
110. gt Status Performance Statistics ESF Line Only seven T1 network statistical intervals appear on the screen at any one time You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering m Interval Number 01 96 m Time Hours and Minutes NOTES Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one etc Selecting a specific time is useful when the approximate time at which a specific event occurred is known Edit any of the interval or time fields on lines 10 13 or 16 When Enter is pressed the values change to the selected range To select intervals You must enter an interval or time on Occurring on and before a__ Line 10 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded before it Bracketing a selected Line 13 The display will include the selected interval plus interval or time the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals recorded after it Occurring on and after a Line 16 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded after it 7 64 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance ESF Line Performance Statistics Screen Example main status performance esf 9128 II Device Name Node A 05 26 2000 23 32 Network 1 ESF LINE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Current Interval
111. hhhh hhh For the network side ISDN PRI DBM of FR SERVICE Profile Link Name T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN PRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 5 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with NetScout Probes use the following ifName ifDescr and iflndex Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information 1 of 2 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Frame Relay Logical Layer Frame Relay 1 Frame relay logical link For the DTE side 1 Network on the network RMON IN OUT Network T1 of interface FR DTE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side RMON IN OUT Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay 3 Frame relay logical link For the user side 3 Sync Data on Synchronous Data RMON IN OUT Synchronous Port 1 Port 1 Data Port of FR DTE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay 4 Frame relay logical link For the user side 4 Sync Data on Synchronous Data RMON IN OUT Synchronous Port 2 Port 2 Data Port of FR DTE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware V
112. interface DTE has detected a LOS or OOF condition Yellow at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only A yellow alarm signal is received on the ISDN network interface m Active Backup call was in progress m dle DBM was in Idle mode Indicates a possible cable problem Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface Possible reasons include m Network cable problem m T1 facility problem nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI 7 26 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Test Status Messages These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 7 9 Test Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates DCLB Active frame relay link or DCLB Active Port 2 A Data Channel V 54 Loopback DCLB is active on the specified frame relay link or Port 2 DTE External LB Active Port n An external DTE Loopback is
113. interface cross connect assignments are cleared m Alarms or traps associated with the DSX 1 interface are not generated m LEDs associated with the DSX 1 interface are held in an off state Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX 1 interface D4 Uses D4 framing format ESF Uses Extended Superframe ESF framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the DSX 1 interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AM1 line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 43 4 Configuration Options Table 4 8 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Line Equalization Possible Settings 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 Default Setting 0 133 Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet 0 133 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 133 266 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 266 399 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 399 533 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 533 feet of ca
114. is not available until a new sample has been received appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful Max RdTrip Latency Same as average Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 samples appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance For an IP Enabled DLCI statistics are shown for last minimum average and maximum round trips and for dropped SLV responses for each of the seven classes of service Table 7 17 SLV Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the DLC connection None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Path Up Time The number of days hours minutes and seconds since the last transition of this DLCI from Inactive to Active Far End Circuit Number of the DLCI at the other end of the connection None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end SLM Poll Type The role played by the far end FrameSaver in the collection o
115. is performed factory Enter configuration mode and a copy of the factory default settings is loaded into the edit buffer Any changes made in the buffer overwrite the copied default settings when the save command is entered the configuration is saved to the currently running configuration terminal and an automatic reset is performed This is the default save Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode All config modes Causes configuration changes to be saved to the currently active configuration and the router to be reset If the save command is entered and changes made require a reboot of the device a prompt states that a reset is required for the changes to take effect If yes is entered changes are stored and the device resets automatically A message displays when the save is complete If no is entered you stay in configuration mode C 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Interface Commands 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Interface commands allow you to configure the Ethernet and network interfaces and their sub interfaces Table C 4 Interface Commands 1 of 3 interface intf type intf num no interface intf type intf num sub intf num point to point Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config config if config subif Allows you to enter interface or sub interface configuration mode and create sub interfaces All comman
116. is restored m Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends m Contact your network provider nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI 8 11 8 Troubleshooting 8 12 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 6 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the configured secondary clock source for the unit was detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns Self Test Failure The unit did not pass its basic verification tests when it was powered on or reset m Reset the unit m Contact your service representative SLV Latency Exceeded DLCI nnnn frame relay linkt 23 The measured latency of SLV communication responses from the remote unit on this DLCI is excessive so the DLCI has been declared unsuitable for normal multiplexed PVC operation DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed Wait until the DLCI is declared operational again If the unit has ISDN backup capab
117. keyed modular USOC RJ49C jack BRI NI 1 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps ISDN PRI DBM Interface FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only Service supported Data rates Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack PRI NI 1 or NI 2 1 536 Kbps D4 ESF B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable Ethernet Port FrameSaver SLV 9126 II 9126 II Router and 9128 II Standard Data rates 8 position modular unkeyed jack ANSI IEEE Standard 802 3 Ethernet Version 2 10 100 BaseT auto sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet rates Table F 3 14 Slot 9000 Series Access Carrier Technical Specifications 1 of 2 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 Class A digital device FCC Part 68 Refer to the equipment s label for the registration Industry Canada NRTL C and CSA number Refer to the equipment label for the certification number Refer to the equipment label September 2002 F 5 F Technical Specifications F 6 Table F 3 14 Slot 9000 Series Access Carrier Technical Specifications 2 of 2 Specification Criteria Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Physical Dimensions Height 10 5 inches
118. link layer failure at the remote end user equipment is offline September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 14 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 2 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Facility Rejected 29 Requested facility is not No action is needed provided by the network Incoming Calls 54 Called user is not permitted Turn off network call Barred to accept the call screening Incompatible 88 Request to establish a call Arrange for the desired Destination has been received but capability low layer high layer or another compatibility attribute e g data rate cannot be provided Incorrect format of the destination link Identified Channel 82 Channel requested for acall Make sure the network is Does Not Exist is not activated on the configured for 2B service if interface a BRI DBM Contact your service provider to verify that your service is provisioned for two B channels Info Element 99 Device sending this cause 1 Verify that the Inbound Nonexistent or has received a message it Calling ID has been Nonimplemented does not recognize defined This cause will not prevent 2 Verify that the Inbound the message from being Calling ID is part of your precessed service Interworking 127 Precise cause of a No action is needed Unspecified message cannot be determined because the interwork
119. list 200num The output type access list number valid range for protocol type code access lists 200 299 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 ARP Commands 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Address Resolution Protocol ARP commands are used to create entries in the ARP table specify how long the information will be retained and remove dynamic entries in the table Table C 7 ARP Commands arp ip address mac address arp type no arp ip address mac address arp type Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to create or delete a single static ARP table entry Static ARP entries created with this command are permanent and are retained across resets power cycles Up to the maximum number of static ARP entries specified may be entered There are no static ARP entries by default ip address The IP address of the ARP entry to be created or deleted mac address MAC address arp type Specifies the ARP type Valid ARP type is arpa the standard Ethernet style ARP RFC 826 arp timeout time no arp timeout time Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Ethernet Allows you to specify the amount of time that ARP information is retained in the ARP cache The no arp timeout command restores the default ARP timeout value Example arp timeout 28000 NOTES The amount of time the device waits before reattempting to a
120. m Physical Tests on page 8 26 Line Loopback Payload Loopback Repeater Loopback DTE Loopback Send Line Loopback Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link Send Remote Line Loopback Send and Monitor Pattern Tests m P Ping Test on page 8 35 m Lamp Test on page 8 40 Problem Indicators 8 2 The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems Indicators See LEDs Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance as well as the user interface screen Main Menu Status gt Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and Status Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance Main Menu Status System and Test Status Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Statistics in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance to help you determine how long a problem has existed Alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap Alarms on page 8 7 SNMP traps Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps supported include warm start authentication failure enterprise specific those specific to the unit link up and link down September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication You can reset the un
121. m SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold m SLV Packet Size Standard The options selected apply to standard FrameSaver SLV measurements utlizing an EDLCI for FrameSaver to FrameSaver communication This option is not available if the SLV Feature is disabed COS 1 COS 7 The options selected apply to this Class of Service Different settings may be saved for each Class of Service 4 28 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options 2 of 3 SLV Delivery Ratio Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled To use this capability both ends of all PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV devices If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s they must be running software version 1 2 or higher Display Conditions This option appears only if SLV Type is Standard Enable An extra byte for FDR DDR statistics collection is included with each frame which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the network Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units
122. menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics gt DLC Table 7 18 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates DLCI Up Since Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network DLCI Up Time Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the amount of time since the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Total Tx Frames Tx Octets m Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR With DE Set With BECN Set Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link m The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate m The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate m The number of frames an
123. mode Routing without bridging and simultaneous routing and bridging are also options Use the bridge command from the router s CLI to configure the bridge and routing attributes Also enter an Ethernet IP address and a DHCP IP address Refer to Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations for command line syntax and information about CLI commands For a list of default settings see CLI Command Default Settings in Appendix D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 5 15 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation The CLI is available via a Telnet session or a direct connection over the router s COM port to a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program You access the CLI through the router s menu driven user interface From the Main Menu press Shift r to access the CLI Verify the required terminal settings Data rate is set to 19 2 Kbps 19200 bps Character length is set to 8 Parity is set to None Stop bits is set to 1 Flow control is set to Off or None Uploading and Downloading the Router Configuration Via the CLI 5 16 Use the show configuration command to output command strings needed to restore the current running configuration Output from the show configuration command can be captured to a text file using most terminal emulation programs Once the text file is captured the router c
124. model device name or IP address and click on the prompt below the selection table Entering an asterisk in the Name or Device IP field will display all FrameSaver devices in your system so you can pick and choose devices that will be activated Select whether to activate selected devices Select the FrameSaver devices to be activated at this time under Select devices by model device name or IP address then click on the prompt below the device selection table The table in the lower frame lists all the devices in the selected category Entering an asterisk in the Name or Device IP field will display all FrameSaver devices in your system so you can pick and choose devices that will be activated In the lower frame click on the box in the Activate column to select or deselect a specific FrameSaver device for activation Proceed through the list until you have selected all the devices to be activated at this time Proceed through the other steps included on this screen then click on the prompt under Perform the scheduled verification activation to verify what you scheduled The Verify Schedule Feature Activations screen appears so you can verify the scheduling information If the information is correct click on Apply If not or if you want to verify or change the devices that will be activated or the time the activations are to occur click on the prompt to return to the previous screen and resel
125. multiple of 64 Kbps in the specified bandwidth This bundle of constituent links will function as a single frame relay multilink When the multilink aggregate link is activated calls will be placed or answered on as many constituent links as possible based upon available B channels September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 11 ISDN Link Profile Options 3 of 3 Caller Identification Method Possible Settings Caller ID Proprietary Default Setting Caller ID Specifies the method used to identify callers NOTE The Caller Identification Method setting must be the same at both ends of the circuit Caller ID Incoming calls will only be answered and the frame relay link on this Link Profile will only be activated when the Caller ID received from the switch matches one of the configured Inbound Calling IDs Proprietary Incoming calls will always be answered even when no Caller ID is provided by the switch provided the following conditions are met m Link Status is set to Auto the default m Atleast one ISDN Link Profile is enabled When using the Proprietary method the unit queries the originating unit for its Local Phone Number If the returned phone number matches one of the configured Inbound Calling IDs the call is accepted If the queried unit does not respond with its phone number within five seconds the unit drops the call Alternate Outbound Phone Number Possib
126. option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network interface has no DLCls defined Net1 FR1 would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the destination of the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link Rtr SO For the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router specifies the virtual router port as the destination link Primary Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTES Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value When an ISDN DBM is installed and the DLCI assigned to the PVC is in a Backup Group see Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options the letter designation assigned to the group of DLCls appears next to the primary destination DLCI number on the Management PVCs Options screen 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 69 4 Configuration Opti
127. or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about these configuration options 6 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 6 Security and Logins Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access m Disabling SNMP access m Assigning SNMP community names and the access type m Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit Disabling SNMP Access When the SNMP access is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages gt Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Disable the SNMP Management option 3 Save your change See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 6 9 6 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an SNMP manager SNMP manager access can be limited by m Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver units Management Information Base MIB m Specifying the type of access all
128. or not Caller ID is provisioned on the ISDN circuit A secondary backup phone number is also available to call when a backup link cannot be established with the primary backup site Supports simultaneous origination answering or origination and answering backup calls as needed based upon how the ISDN Link Profile is set up This feature is also known as peer to peer calling Provides automatic configuration of an alternate route and DLCI for automatically created PVCs at either the remote site or central site based upon the learned far end DLC number When the automatic backup feature is enabled backup and restoration occur automatically Provides backup timers that can be configured to better control the amount of time required before backup is initiated when a backup call will be terminated once the failure condition clears and a delay before normal service is restored These features are useful during periods of frequent service disruption In addition round trip latency thresholds can be configured that will initiate backup when configured thresholds are exceeded Supports backup call groups where redundant PVCs can be assigned to a specified call group Using this feature the unit only goes into backup when all PVCs in the group are down and it returns to normal service as soon as one PVC in the group is operational again This feature is useful when multiple PVCs are going to redundant central sites 1 8 Sep
129. packets two commands If a specified access list does not exist all packets are passed access list 1 199num The access list number The valid ranges for access lists are 1 99 Standard IP access lists 100 199 Extended IP access lists in Specifies that filters will be applied to inbound packets out Specifies that filters will be applied to outbound packets If no direction in or out is specified the filter is applies to outbound packets by default C 22 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Diagnostic Commands 9128 A2 GB20 80 Diagnostic commands allow you to ping or trace the route to a specified destination Table C 12 Diagnostic Commands 1 of 2 ping protocol dest ip source source ip length bytes timeout time interface intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Pings the specified destination address For a successful ping the results are shown as Ping reply x x x x bytes of data packet length Where packet length is the length of echo packets sent For a timeout the results are shown as Ping reply x x x x REQUEST TIMED OUT For an ICMP echo response of unreachable destination the results are shown as Ping reply x x x x DESTINATION UNREACHABLE protocol The protocol of the IP echo message ip dest ip Address of the device to ping source Specify the source IP
130. passing LMI data but the Maximum Link Rate configured in the ISDN Link Profile has not been achieved for the link m AFrame Relay Link Down message indicates that the call attempts were not successful NOTE Primary network data is not affected by a test call If there is a network failure while a test call is active the test call is terminated and the call is automatically converted to a backup call 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 25 8 Troubleshooting Physical Tests 8 26 Physical tests require the participation of your network service provider Main Menu Test 5 Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests PRI Physical Tests If the unit does not have the ISDN PRI DBM feature PRI Physical Tests does not appear A FrameSaver unit s physical tests screen for the network interface is shown below Physical Tests Screen Example main test network 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 NETWORK 1 PHYSICAL TESTS Test Command Status Results Local Loopbacks Line Loopback Inactive Payload Loopback Inactive Repeater Loopback Inactive Remote Loopbacks Send Line Loopback Down Inactive Pattern Tests Send user defined Oa0a Active 0 00 00 Errors 99999 Monitor user defined0a0a Active 0 00 00 Errors 999991 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit InjectErr ResetMon The InjectErr function key at the bottom of the screen only appears
131. rate is 64 Kbps Nx56 The base rate is 56 Kbps LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 13 Interface Frame Relay Options 3 of 3 LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI
132. selected multilink constituent link when the Most Recent Cause Value is Cal1 Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chn1 7 Only appears for a constituent frame relay link 2 If Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle the Remote Call ID ISDN Channel and Negotiated Rate fields will not appear relay links 7 40 September 2002 Appears for frame relay links with only one constituent and for all constituent frame 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 13 DBM Interface Status 3 of 3 7 Operation and Maintenance Field Status What It Indicates Call Status Connected Outbound m An outbound call has been placed Call and is actively connected and continued available for data transfer on the selected multilink constituent link when the Most Recent Cause Value is Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chn1 7 Most Recent Cause Value 3 Various ITU cause Refer to Table 7 14 Most Recent messages and Previous Cause Value Messages for additional information Previous Cause Values 3 Maximum Link Rate BRI DBM The maximum link rate that was Kbps 64K 128K configured for the selected link This PRI DBM is the maximum rate the link will 64K 128K 1472 attempt to achieve when activated Negotiated Rate Kbps 64K per B channel 56K per B channel The negotiated rate of the connection link For a multilink aggregate frame relay link the negotiated rate wil
133. set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface m Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface pp Procedure To start and stop a Line Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests 2 Select the Up code in the Send Line Loopback row to put a remote device in loopback 3 To start the test highlight Send under Command in the Send Line Loopback row and press Enter The code is sent for up to 10 seconds or until an acknowledgement is received from the remote end The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Results column 4 To stop the test send the Down code to take the remote device out of loopback September 2002 8 31 8 Troubleshooting Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link A network initiated Data Channel Loopback DCLB loops data over the frame relay link DSOs received on the network interface through the FrameSaver unit s framing circuitry and back to the same interface A DCLB can be controlled over the frame relay link using one of the following in band methods m V 54 Loopback m ANSI 711 403 Annex B Fractional T1 FT1 Channel Loopback The frame relay service provider can use DCLB to verify the integrity of the frame relay circuit po Other Ty al DCLB interface Interface 1s Cg 98 16223 CAUTION V 54 and FT1 Loopbacks may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned
134. settings select the Edit button to the right of the Domain section of the Property Editor window The Edit Domain window opens Edit Domain Domains Logging DLC MP art List State Enable Disable Hosts Enable 4 Disable Conversations Disable 4 Disable Short Term History samples Long Term History samples seconds OK Cancel 4 Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following Property Description Setting Groups Stats S Statistics collection Enabled for all domains Hosts H Level 3 information Enabled for IP domain only network Disabled for all other domains Conversations C Protocols being used Disabled for all domains Logging Event logging Disabled for all domains and groups 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply the changes Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 10 7 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be configured and assigned to each DLCI OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms DLCI alarms can be configured manually but using the Paradyne alarm defaults template greatly reduces configuration time The following alar
135. that would be used with the corresponding Network side value Typical pairs of values are shown in the table below If you change the Network side value the DSX side value is changed to the corresponding default value Table 4 12 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 1 of 3 Network Side Meanings DSX 1 Side None No signaling used on this DSO Use this setting if None there is no voice signaling information being passed on this DSO clear channel RBS default Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DSO but no RBS trunk conditioning Signaling bits will be passed to the T1 interface to which this DSO is cross connected when this T1 interface is not in CGA but the signaling bits will be all ones when CGA is present The following values configure the cross connect for RBS as well as perform the trunk conditioning Although ABCD signaling bits for each setting are described only AB bits are transmitted when the cross connected T1 network interface is using D4 framing September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 12 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 2 of 3 Network Side Meanings DSX 1 Side E amp M idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an E amp M interface ABCD 0000 E amp M idle E amp M busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T
136. the link profile will be deleted Use ASCII text 8 characters maximum ASCII Text Entry Assigns a name to identify the ISDN link maximum 255 characters NOTE To prevent confusion do not use the following link names Network Net1 FR1 Port 1 or Port 2 These names will be treated as nonunique and the Link Name Not Unique message appears and you must enter another name HG Site The link name configured in the remote site unit originating a backup call for the central site unit answering a backup call One link has a default value of HQ Site to allow for Automatic Backup Configuration Link Status Possible Settings Auto Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the ISDN frame relay link is in or out of service Auto The link is configured to be in service when needed Packets will be transmitted and received on the interface and the LMI for a PVC connection will become active when the link is required If this profile is configured as the alternate link and the primary link or DLCI fails the unit dials the Outbound Phone Number or the Alternate Outbound Phone Number if the first call was unsuccessful The unit also answers calls from Inbound Call IDs associated with this link This link profile becomes active when m This profile is configured as the alternate link and there is a failure of a primary link or DLC m Source or Primary Destination DLCls are configured on this link When the primary lin
137. the FrameSaver CSU DSU and Router s screens which can help you navigate the menus and access information ISDN backup and Data Ports options do not apply to the router The Virtual Router Ports option does not apply to the CSU DSUs September 2002 A 1 A Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status lt Test System and Test Status e Self Test Results e Last System Reset e Health and Status e Test Status PVC Tests DLCI Number e PVC Loopback e Send Pattern e Monitor Pattern e Connectivity e Test Call LMI Reported DLCIs DLCI e Status CIR bps System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCls IP Path Connection Status IP Path Connection Status Device Name IP Address e Status e Discovery Source PVC Connection Status Timeslot Assignment Status DBM Interface Status IP Routing Table Eas Configuration Auto Configuration Control VANGELI Performance Statistics Trap Eventlog Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Timeslot Assignment PVC Connection Status e Source Link DLCI EDLC e Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status Identity e System NAM e DBM Trap Event Log e Number of Trap Events e Time Elapsed Since Event e Event Status e Network Timeslot Status eDSX 1 Timeslot Status Sei Ve eDL MAIN MENU Status Test Test lt PVC Tests
138. the management circuit was created If an existing PVC with an associated payload managed management circuit is deleted then the payload management circuit is also deleted Table 4 18 Management PVC Options 1 of 6 Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g Tampa for Tampa Florida ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 77 4 Configuration Options 4 78 Table 4 18 Management PVC Options 2 of 6 Payload Managed Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the PVC is payload managed Display Conditions This is a read only field set to Enabled if the PVC is IP Enabled Enable The network PVC created will be monitored for the presence of IP frames containing the IP address specified in the Intf IP Address field When such a frame is identified it is extracted from the data stream and sent to the management stack Disable A normal management PVC is created using the specified DLCI or EDLCI Intf IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an external IP network t
139. their DLCls Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the Poller Configuration which are used to poll the units IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their elements These elements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of elements that can be polled are m Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis m Conversation elements Provide RMON and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes pp Procedure To find SLV device elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located and the Community String Community Name in the FrameSaver unit The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network it
140. to P Filtering on page 5 15 If an ARP request is received on one interface for an IP address that is reachable on the other interface the router will respond with its own MAC address Proxy ARP is enabled via the user interface Refer to Configuring Ethernet Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Proxy ARP and NAPT cannot be enabled at the same time 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 5 3 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router Interface Configuration The following examples require that IP addresses have been assigned to the Ethernet and Serial interfaces and that a passthrough PVC connection exists to Rtr SO Optionally you might also disable bridging In the following example the Serial 0 sub interface is shown as x The valid range is 0 4 294 967 295 pp Procedure To set up the router s interfaces 1 If a Net1 FR1 DLCI does not exist Create one using the Network Circuit Records screen then select CreatePVC When the Create PVC using DLCI Number prompt appears select a DLCI and press Enter When the Create Pass Thru PVC Connection to prompt appears enter Rtr S0 Save the configuration 2 From the Main Menu screen press Ctrl a then Shift r to access the router s Command Line Interface Set the IP addresses of the interfaces The following example commands Set the Ethernet interface address to 10 1 3 1 Set the Serial 0 x interface to 172 20 95 2 Disable bridging
141. to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The primary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The primary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX 1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is enabled see Configuring the DSX 1 Interface on page 4 43 Internal The primary clock is the internal clock DBM The primary clock is derived from the DBM This selection only appears if the DBM is installed and enabled September 2002 4 31 4 Configuration Options 4 32 Table 4 5 General System Options 2 of 3 Secondary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal DBM Default Setting Internal Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fails The source selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds If the secondary clock source fails the clock source will switch to internal The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Ne
142. to an outside public IP address and port if overload is specified for NAPT source Specifies source address translation list Specify the access list number for dynamic address translation For inside source translation this access list describes local addresses If no rules have been created for the specified access list no translations based on this rule will occur access list 1 99num A standard IP Access list The valid range is 1 99 Continued on next page September 2002 C 13 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 14 Table C 8 NAT Commands 3 of 3 Continued from previous page pool Specify the name of a pool of addresses available for dynamic address translation For inside source translation this is the pool of local addresses pool name The name of a NAT pool comprised of 1 20 ASCII printable characters interface For dynamic address translation specifies an interface or sub interface that provides the address for the translation For inside source translation specifies the interface that provides the global address If there is no address on the interface the interface has not been specified as an outside interface or the interface is not operational no translations based on this rule will occur If a public IP address is specified for NAPT on this interface that address is used instead of the interface s assigned IP address intf type Two interface types
143. to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted 8 32 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Send Remote Line Loopback 9128 A2 GB20 80 The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Any Loopback on the same interface m Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface m Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface pp Procedure To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 5 Network Physical Tests PRI Physical Tests 2 Select the desired network interface shown in the screen title 3 Select the Up code in the Remote Line Loopback row to put a remote device into loopback 4 To start the test highlight Send under Command in the Remote Line Loopback row and press Enter The code is sent for up to 10 seco
144. unit Main Menu Status System and Test Status 5 Health and Status column System Operational should appear If ISDN Network Failed appears check that both ends of the ISDN cable are seated properly for a good physical connection If that does not clear the message verify that you entered ISDN physical option information correctly then contact the network service provider See DBM Interface Status on page 7 38 and Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages for additional status information Verifying That Backup Can Take Place As each remote site is installed verify its backup operation by unplugging the network cable so the system is forced into backup m Verify the ISDN lines by checking the DBM Interface Status Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status Line Status should be Active If an invalid Inv status e g Inv SPID is displayed verify that you entered ISDN physical options correctly m Check backup setup and that data can be passed between DBMs m Reconnect the network cable See Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages Viewing LEDs and Control Leads on page 7 4 and DBM Call Performance Statistics on page 7 67 for additional information 7 74 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers 9128 A2 GB20 80 The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP A complete binary image of the configuration file
145. used in the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI When an ISDN DBM is installed and the DLCI assigned to the PVC is in a Backup Group see Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options the letter designation assigned to the group of DLCls appears next to the primary destination DLCI number on the Management PVCs Options screen 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 79 4 Configuration Options 4 80 Table 4 18 Management PVC Options 4 of 6 Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLCls identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls t
146. verifying setup 7 74 DCLB 8 32 DDR 1 10 DE Set 4 78 Default IP Destination 4 75 DefaultCodePoints 4 25 Delete key 2 6 2 10 deleting a login 6 13 designations ICMP C 31 TCP port C 33 UDP port C 34 Destination 4 89 based routing 5 3 Default IP 4 75 DLCI 4 69 4 70 EDLCI 4 70 4 71 Link 4 69 4 70 Device messages 7 12 troubleshooting problems 8 14 IN 4 September 2002 DHCP 5 11 Relay Agent 5 13 CLI commands C 18 configuration example 5 14 server at remote site configuration example 5 13 CLI commands C 15 with NAT configuration example 5 12 diagnostic CLI commands C 23 dial backup 4 12 dialControl traps B 17 dialCtlPeerCall traps B 17 Dial In Access 4 100 controlling 6 4 Dial Out Delay Time Min 4 92 Directory 4 93 options 4 6 4 88 Trap 4 92 Directory Alternate Dial Out 4 93 disabling SNMP access 6 9 system alarm relay 7 81 disaster recovery 4 12 4 19 Discard Eligible DE 4 78 Disconnect modem 7 71 Time Minutes 4 86 4 98 4 102 discovering elements DLCls 11 3 Discovery frame relay FR 4 9 Frame Relay Mode saving a mode change 4 11 time slot 1 6 displaying configuration options 3 4 identity information 7 3 LEDs and control leads 7 4 DLCI 4 79 4 81 Alternate 4 81 assigning to a Backup Group 4 18 Destination 4 69 4 70 Down 7 21 8 7 on SLV Timeout 4 29 interface status 7 30 IP Enabled 4 65 LMI reported status 7 32 monitoring user history
147. view the statistics for a multilink constituent link select the ConstLinkStats function key All enabled multilink constituent links become available for selection Select the desired constituent link from the Multilink Constituent Link field The frame relay performance statistics collected for any frame relay link are collected for multilink frame relay links unless the link is a multilink aggregate link In this case statistics for Frame Relay LMI and Frame Relay HDLC Errors are not collected these statistics are available for multilink constituent links only Table 7 20 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent The number of frames sent over the interface Frames Received The number of frames received over the interface Characters Sent The number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Characters Received The number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs Received The number of forward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends FECNSs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received The number of backward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator
148. was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of management PVCs has already been created m Do not create the management PVC m Delete another management PVC and try again Limit of PVC Connections reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of PVCs has already been created m Donot create the PVC connection m Delete another PVC connection and try again Name Must be Unique Name entered for a management PVC has been used previously Enter another 4 character name for the logical management link No Destination Link DLCls Available New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again No DLCls available for connection New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but all configured DLCls have been connected No action needed or configure more DLCls and try again New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all Link DLCI pairs have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try again September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 6 Device M essages 4 of 6 7 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do
149. when Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 109 or 10 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period ora 105 or 10 or 10 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1077 108 10 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 108 107 108 10 or 10 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period Circuit Identifier Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmission vendor s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting
150. 0 NetScout Manager Plus 10 3 network interface 4 34 router 5 16 SLV options 4 28 System options 4 21 the system 3 1 connecting to a PC terminal or printer E 5 Connectivity test 8 25 Control keys 2 6 lead descriptions 7 11 Leads Ignore 4 97 menu branch 2 4 Control Leads and LEDs displaying 7 4 controlling asynchronous terminal access 6 2 dial in access 6 4 FTP access 6 6 ISDN access 6 5 SNMP access 6 9 Telnet access 6 6 conversation elements 11 3 copyrights A COS applying SLV measurements 4 28 performance statistics 7 59 CRC 7 63 creating a login 6 12 new PVC connections management links 3 5 user history files 10 13 cross connections 4 51 CTS down 8 7 down to Port Device 7 20 current software revision 7 3 September 2002 IN 3 Index D Data Channel Loopback 4 36 7 21 8 32 Delivery Ratio DDR 1 10 Inverse ARP for 1 2 Link Control Identifier DLCI 4 79 4 81 Port physical options 4 38 port connector pin assignments E 11 Rate Kbps 4 96 selection criteria 2 9 uploading SLV and packet capture 7 80 Date amp Time setting 4 5 DBM BRI Card Failed 7 20 call performance statistics 7 67 changing BRI software 7 78 configuring interface 4 45 configuring to send traps 4 18 connector E 17 Download Required 7 21 forcing backup and placing a call 7 72 Health and Status messages 7 20 interface status 7 38 ISDN problems 8 17 test status messages 7 27 tests 8 19
151. 01 on the Sync Data Port 1 Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information 3 of 3 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Frame Relay Logical Layer continued FR UNI Frame relay logical link For the user side 101016002 on the Sync Data Synchronous Data Port of FR Port 2 if applicable DTE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical link For the user side 101018001 on BRI if applicable ISDN BRI DBM of FR DTE 101018002 Profile Link Name T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN BRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side 101018001 ISDN BRI DBM of FR 101018002 SERVICE Profile Link Name T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN BRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical link For the user side 101017001 on PRI if applicable ISDN PRI DBM of FR DTE to Profile Link Name 101017024 T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN PRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version
152. 1 PE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 CJ 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 10 17 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected you can click on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 11 26 17 11 27 17 11 28 17 11 29 16 11 30 16 Wed Oct 21 WE 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 TE 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 HU 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 E 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 I 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 Click to Zoom Out 8 Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view see Step 7 on page 10 17 Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Object ID Cross References Numeric Order and RMON Alarm and Event Defaults in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults to identify OID information being shown Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus select either the Traffic or Protocol radio
153. 1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an E amp M interface ABCD 1111 E amp M busy FXOg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXSg idle FXOg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSg busy FXOl idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSl idle FXOl busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSI busy FXSg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOg idle FXSg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOg busy FXSl idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOl idle FXSI busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interf
154. 13 cross reference numeric order B 27 B 32 OK LED 7 8 7 10 OOF at DSX 1 or Network 7 23 8 10 at ISDN PRI 7 24 LED 7 8 7 10 linkDown trap B 11 OpenLane 1 11 copying directory 10 2 SLM support 9 2 operating mode changing 4 19 operation 2 1 7 1 Operator CLI Access Level 6 14 ordering Activation Certificates 9 4 organization of this document xi Out of Frame 7 8 linkDown trap B 11 Out of Sync message 8 16 8 24 Outbound Management Priority 4 66 Phone Number 4 50 alternate 4 51 P packet capture uploading data 7 80 utility 8 5 packets 4 78 pager CLI command C 3 Parity 4 97 PassThru modem feature 1 7 7 70 Password 6 12 PAT Port Address Translation C 14 see NAPT 5 8 patents A pattern send monitor interior 8 24 tests 8 34 Payload Loopback 8 28 payload management configuration option 4 76 enable 4 78 PC COM port cable E 5 IN 10 September 2002 peer to peer calling 1 8 performance statistics 7 50 8 2 clearing 7 51 for Class of Service 7 59 Phone Number 4 45 4 46 physical data port options 4 38 DSX 1 4 43 ISDN options 4 45 tests 8 26 pin assignments COM port E 4 to cable E 10 to PC or terminal printercable E 5 COM port to router 1 slot unit E 7 NAM E 8 Ethernet port E 16 ISDN DBM connector E 17 modem connector E 17 Port connector E 11 T1 cable E 15 T1 line interface cable E 16 V 35 crossover cable E 12 ping IP ping test options
155. 1500 Default 64 timeout Specify the time in seconds before the TraceRoute test is abandoned time Number of seconds before the TraceRoute test is abandoned Range 1 30 Default 5 seconds hops Specify the maximum number of hops to be tested hops The maximum number of hops to be tested Range 1 128 Default 8 interface Specify the target interface The default target interface is the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address intf type Two interface types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface intf num The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces 0 sub intf num The sub interface number is only supported on the Network interface Serial 0 The following sub interface numbers are supported 0 4 294 967 295 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Show Commands 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Show commands allow you to display information Table C 13 Show Commands 1 of 4 show arp Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the devices in the ARP table The general format of the show arp command is IP Address Timeout min MAC address Type Interface X X X X STATIC XX IXX XX IXXIXXIXX ARPA X X X X time XX IXX IXXIXXIXX XX ARPA Interface The first column displays the IP address The second column displays the act
156. 2 7 35 7 Operation and Maintenance Time Slot Assignment Status Time slot assignments are made using the Time Slot Assignment configuration option See Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for making time slot assignments Use the Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display time slot assignments for the network channels and the DSX 1 channels Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments Use the Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display DSO assignments for each DSO on the network interface Main Menu Status Timeslot Assignment Status Network The Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one network interface time slot The top field represents the timeslot of the network interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field network time slot Network Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example main status timeslot net display 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 NETWORK 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 D5 1 01r D5 1 02r D5 1 03r S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRlyl FrameRly1 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Slot 1 Tl FR NAM
157. 2 5 30 5 43 6 31 6 44 7 32 7 45 September 2002 E 15 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3100 F 1 510 The T1 line interface cable is used in Canada as an interface between the FrameSaver unit s network connector and the T1 network interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Transmit Ring Transmit Tip White Orange Transmit Tip Ethernet Port Connector 98 16215 The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver unit s Ethernet port 8 position unkeyed modular jack Signal Direction Pin 10 100 BaseT Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 1 10 100 BaseT Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 2 10 100 BaseT Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 3 10 100 BaseT Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 6 E 16 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Modem Connector The dial modem interface connector that is integrated into the FrameSaver unit is an RJ11 6 position 4 contact unkeyed modular jack The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Ring R To Local Loop 2 Tip T To Local Loop 3 ISDN DBM Connector The backup connection is through the DBM interface connector which is an 8 position keye
158. 4 CLI Command Default Settings 0000 0000 D 6 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E Rear Panes Ka ad de takes ween LNAG ALA ee ee She E 1 m COM Port Connector eee eee E 4 COM Port for 9126 and 9128 II 25 Position E 4 COM Port for 9126 II 9 Position E 4 COM Port for 9128 II Carrier Mount 2 4 E 5 COM Port to PC Cable Feature No 3100 F2 550 E 5 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable Feature No 3100 F2 540 E 6 COM Port to Router Cables 0 0 0 cee eee eee E 7 Gender Adapter Changer 0 000 eee eee eee E 10 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable anaana E 10 m DTE Port Connector 00 cee E 11 Standard V 35 Straight through Cable E 12 Standard V 35 Crossover Cable eee eee E 12 E DSX 1 Connector mak 2 ews Hawke eg ESE ed Be eddie ad E 13 DSX 1 Port for 9126 9126 11 and Carrier Mounted 9128 II 8 POSItION aa ka ee ie te ee Paa E 13 DSX 1 Adapter Feature No 9008 F1 560 E 13 DSX 1 Port for 1 Slot 9128 II 15 Position E 14 m T1 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F1 500 E 15 T1 Mass Termination Cable Feature No 9007 F1 500 E 15 Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3100 F1 510 16 m Ethernet Port Connector 002000 e eee eee E 16 Modem Connector 0000 cece eee eee E 17 ISDN DBM Connect
159. 41 as specified by V 54 The port remains in loopback as long as the circuit stays on DCLB The DTE attached to the port controls DCLBs via circuit RL CCITT 140 as specified by V 54 The far end equipment must support inband V 54 loopbacks Both The DTE attached to the port controls both local DTPLBs and remote DCLBs Invert Transmit and Receive Data Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether transmitted and received data for the synchronous data port is logically inverted before being transmitted or after being received from the network Use this configuration option for applications where data is being transported using HDLC protocol whereby inverting the data ensures that the ones density requirements for the network are met Display Conditions This option only appears for Port 2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Enable Inverts the transmitted and received data for the port Disable Does not invert the transmitted and received data for the port 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 41 4 Configuration Options Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options 5 of 5 Action on Network Yellow Alarm Possible Settings None Halt Default Setting Halt Specifies the action to take on the synchronous data port when a yellow alarm is received on the network interface A yellow alarm indicates a problem with the signa
160. 795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Rx FECNs D MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs Rising 1 1 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs tmin OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 41 D Rx BECNs D MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs Rising 1 1 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs rib OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Congested D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 5 5 Seconds Tag devFrExtDiciSts my CongestedSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 1 1 TEGES py Tag devFrExtDIciNetDropFr mn OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D 1 contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 22 September 2002 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 2 of 2 Tag devFrExtLatencyMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 1 D Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type 4 MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Maximum A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 0 0 Latency 1 min D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute
161. 8 A2 GB20 80 Operation and Maintenance 9128 A2 GB20 80 This chapter includes the following Displaying System Information on page 7 3 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads on page 7 4 FrameSaver SLV 9126 LEDs and Control Leads FrameSaver SLV 9128 I LEDs and Control Leads LED Descriptions Control Lead Descriptions Device Messages on page 7 12 Status Information on page 7 18 System and Test Status Messages Network LMI Reported DLCls Status IP Path Connection Status PVC Connection Status Time Slot Assignment Status DBM Interface Status IP Routing Table on page 7 48 Performance Statistics on page 7 50 Clearing Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics Frame Relay Performance Statistics ESF Line Performance Statistics DBM Call Performance Statistics Ethernet Performance Statistics September 2002 7 1 7 Operation and Maintenance Trap Event Log on page 7 69 Modem Operation on page 7 70 Activating the Modem PassThru Feature Canceling Modem PassThru Operation Manually Disconnecting the Modem Verifying Modem Operation ISDN DBM Operation on page 7 72 Forcing Backup Disruptive Placing a Test Call Nondisruptive Verifying ISDN Lines Verifying That Backup Can Take Place FTP File Transfers on page 7 75 Upgrading System Software Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software Determining Whether a Download Is Completed Changing Software Changi
162. 9 watt 3 07 Btu per hour Weight 0 27 lbs 4 3 oz 0 12 kg 122 grams Switch Compatibility National ISDN 1 NI 1 Service Supported Capability Package IOC B for 1B service which supports up to two circuit switched B channels BRI B1 and BRI B2 with one Service Profile Identification SPID number and one local phone number Capability Package IOC R for 2B service which supports up to two circuit switched B channels BRI B1 and BRI B2 with two SPID numbers and two local phone numbers Switched Network Interface One USOC RJ49C 8 pin keyed modular plug and jack specified in ISO IEC 8877 Transmit Interface Signal Level Impedance 13 5 dBm nominal over frequency band 0 Hz 80 kHz 1350 Receive Interface Dynamic Range Impedance Operates on 2 wire loops defined in ANSI T1 601 1992 1350 Modulation and Frequency 2B1Q line coding with 4 level amplitude modulation PAM at 80 Kbps baud Channel Equalization Receiver Automatic adaptive equalizer with echo cancellation 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 F 7 F Technical Specifications F 8 Table F 5 ISDN PRI DBM Optional Feature Technical Specifications Specification Criteria Standards Compliance ANSI T1 403 1989 physical layer and AT amp T 62411 Bellcore SR NWT 002120 Issue 1 May 1992 ITU Q 921 1992 link layer ITU Q 931 1993 network layer TR TSY 00860 ISDN Calling Nu
163. A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring the Overall System The System menu options are explained in the following sections m Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System CSU DSUs Configuring Service Level Verification Options m Configuring General System Options Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System CSU DSUs Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system see Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Main Menu gt Configuration System Frame Relay and LMI See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface on page 4 61 to set an interface s frame relay options Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 4 LMI Behavior Possible Settings Independent Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Net1 FR1 Follows Port 2 Net1 FR1 Follows Rtr S0 Port 1 Follows Net1 FR1 Port 2 Follows Net1 FR1 Rtr S0O Follows Net1 FR1 All Ports Follow Net1 FR1 Port 1 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Port 2 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Rtr S0 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Default Setting Independent Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to another determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state Sometimes referred to as LMI pass through Display Conditions Port n options are available on CSU DSUs and Rtr S0 options are available on the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router N
164. Activations 0 0 00 eee 9 8 Checking the Status of Scheduled Activations 9 9 Canceling Scheduled Activations 0000 00a 9 9 Accessing and Printing the Certificate Summary Report 9 9 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Preparation eann tied duatide nG TG AR LAT ese bas eee 10 2 Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 00 e eee ee 10 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus NetWare arrapa gd bare dud sees ae eed 10 4 Verifying Domains and Groups a 10 5 Correcting Domains and Groups a 10 6 Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template 10 8 Editing Alarms oeras na a eee ee eee eee ee eae 10 9 Adding SLV Alarms Manually 00000 cee eae 10 11 Creating History Files 0 0 0 i EERTE eee 10 13 Installing the User Defined History Files 10 15 Monitoring a DLCl s History Data 0 0200 10 16 Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus 10 18 Statistical Windows Supported 00 e eee eee 10 20 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Installation and Setup of Network Health 11 2 Discovering FrameSaver Elements eee eens 11 3 Configuring the Discovered Elements 00 ee eee 11 4 Grouping Elements for Reports 00 0 cee ee eee 11 5 Generating Reports for a Groyp
165. Applitek Corporation 6010 6014 3Com Corporation 80C8 80CC Intergraph Corporation 7000 Ungermann Bass download 80CD 80CE Harris Corporation 7002 Ungermann Bass dia loop 80CF 80D2 Taylor Instrument 7020 7029 LRT 80D3 80D4 Rosemount Corporation 7030 Proteon 80D5 IBM SNA Service on Ether 7034 Cabletron 80DD Varian Associates 8003 Cronus VLN 80DE 80DF Integrated Solutions TRFS 8004 Cronus Direct 80E0 80E3 Allen Bradley 8005 HP Probe 80E4 80F0 Datability 8006 Nestar 80F2 Retix 8008 AT amp T 80F3 AppleTalk AARP Kinetics 8010 Excelan 80F4 80F5 Kinetics 8013 SGI diagnostics 80F7 Apollo Computer 8014 SGI network games 80FF 8103 Wellfleet Communications 8015 SGI reserved 8107 8109 Symbolics Private 8016 SGI bounce server 8130 Waterloo Microsystems 8019 Apollo Computers 8131 VG Laboratory Systems 802E Tymshare 8137 8138 Novell Inc 802F Tigan Inc 8139 813D KTI 8035 Reverse ARP 814C SNMP 8036 Aeonic Systems 9000 Loopback 8038 DEC LANBridge 9001 3Com Bridge XNS Sys Mgmt 8039 803C DEC Unassigned 9002 9003 3Com Bridge TCP IP Sys amp loop detect 803D DEC Ethernet Encryption FFOO BBN VITAL LanBridge cache C 30 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Protocol and Port Designations The following tables are used for filtering ICMP Designations Use the Internet Control Management Protocol ICMP designations in Table C 15 ICMP Designations when specifying a specific ICMP
166. BaseT interface that automatically negotiates the rate If all attached Ethernet devices support 100BaseT the router defaults to 100BaseT Otherwise the router operates at 10BaseT The interface has a unique MAC address In router mode the router accepts on the Ethernet interface only those frames with its own MAC address or a broadcast or multicast MAC address In bridge mode the router accepts all frames and forwards only ones for which the destination MAC address does not match an entry in the bridge table This is the default setting NOTES The configuration examples included in this chapter cover some common configurations providing only a few of the possible scenarios IP addresses used in the examples are for illustrative purposes only they are not intended to be used when configuring your local network Command syntax will vary based on your network setup Configuration commands require an access level of Administrator Config and changes need to be saved when being configured to take effect For additional information refer to Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for details on the supported MIBs and RFCs Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations for specific commands and complete syntax Appendix D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts for specific command default settings and abbreviated command line syntax September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80
167. CI derived from the first SLV message received on the each network DLCI Multi_Site_Backup Alternate destinations are automatically configured using a separate ISDN Link Profile to backup each network PVG default for a PRI DBM Connection and Management PVC over the ISDN interface Used at central sites since multiple ISDN links are needed one for each remote site Initially all DLCIs are configured on the ISDN links using the same DLCI number as the network DLCI being backed up However primary destination PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface are automatically updated to use a different DLCI number for the alternate destination DLCI derived from the first SLV message received on the each network DLCI Automatically created alternate destination Link Profiles appear as Bkupnnnn nnnn being the DLCI number e g Bkup200 would be configured for network DLCI 200 Disabled No automatic configuration takes place on the DBM interface and no alternate destinations are created for PVCs NOTE Changes must be saved to take effect See Setting Up Auto Configuration on page 4 8 to see a screen example 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 13 4 Configuration Options 4 14 When the Automatic Backup Configuration setting is changed the following prompts appear No is the default for these prompts The following prompt When the appears If you select m Automatic Backup Saving will cause m No No Auto C
168. Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed Alternate DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate DLCI number to be used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI Display Conditions This option does not appear if Payload Managed is enabled The DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank NOTE Clearing Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive Alternate EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected for the frame relay link EDLCls identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is av
169. Codes and Designations for access level details for each command line entry 6 14 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 6 Security and Logins Changing Access Levels 9128 A2 GB20 80 The Operator and Administrator have the same Login ID with different passwords for their access level To determine the level of access for a session refer to Access Levels Command Modes on page 6 14 After accessing the router s CLI m You can access the Administrator access level by entering enable m The router s defaults to no password required To require a password to access the Administrator access level enter enable password password Once saved the router responds with a prompt to enter a password for Administrator access This command is in effect until no enable password password is entered and saved m You can end the current Administrator access level by entering exit This command results in ending the current Administrator access level session Exit may need to be entered several times to reach Operator level and or end the session m You can end the Administrator access level by entering end This command results in ending the Administrator access level session and returning immediately to Operator level For further details refer to Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router and Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations September 2002 6 15 6 Security and Logins 6 16 September 2002 912
170. Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh 7 36 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance The following information is available for network interface time slots NO1 N24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates Unassgn The time slot is unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to the network frame relay link Port 2 The synchronous data port Port 2 is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 Ds p tt The DSX 1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 Ds p ttr The DSX 1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r Displaying DSX 1 Time Slot Assignments Use the DSX 1 Timeslot Assignments Status screen to display all of the DSO assignments for each DSO on the DSX 1 interface Main Menu Status Timeslot Assignment Status DSX 1 The DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one DSX 1 interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the DSX 1 Interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field DSX 1 time slot DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example main status timeslot dsx_display 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DSX 1 TIMESLOT ASS
171. D OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 8 1 D Latency Packet Size MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyPacketSz 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 44 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N Frame Size Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 2 1 D N Burst Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 3 1 D N Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 4 1 D N Burst Frames 1 5 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 2 1 LMI Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx Short Frames MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 71 71 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSeqErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1
172. D MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 60secs 1 Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization Tag frCircuitSentOctets min capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 25 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Object ID Cross References Numeric Order The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing the NetScout Custom History screen shown below which provides the OID instead of the alarm condition NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 See Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference for an RMON histo
173. Disable Does not send trap messages for Path Unavailability events September 2002 4 93 4 Configuration Options Configuring Ethernet Management 4 94 For the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II or 9128 Il select Ethernet Management from the Management and Communication menu or Ethernet Management Options Screen from the Easy Install screen to configure the Ethernet port see Table 4 23 Ethernet Management Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Ethernet Management Main Menu Easy Install Ethernet Management Options Screen Table 4 23 Ethernet Management Options 1 of 2 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the Ethernet port is being used and can be configured Enable The port is active It can receive Version 2 or IEEE 802 3 MAC frames and transmit Version 2 MAC frames only When the Ethernet port is enabled the Would you like to set the Node s IP Destination to Ethernet prompt is displayed m f you select Yes the Default IP Destination see Table 4 17 Node IP Options is automatically changed to Ethernet so the Ethernet port s Default Gateway Address is used for packets that do not have a route This is required when the NMS is ona different subnet than the unit m f you select No the COM port or a PVC will be used for packets without a route Disable The port is not active When the port is disabled the
174. Dn PgUp ClearAll VocAssign FrAssign For easy movement between screens select the FrAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen or the DSXAssign function key to go to the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 55 4 Configuration Options 4 56 Only those DSX 1 to Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this page from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order by network and time slot When a CGA condition LOS OOF or AIS is declared for a T1 interface the signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DSO are forced to idle for two seconds except for user defined patterns which are transmitted immediately This drops any call in progress The signaling bits are then forced to the selected state Busy or Idle and remain in this state until the CGA condition clears At this point the received signaling bits from the T1 interface which formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1 interface NOTE Trunk conditioning will only occur on DSOs that are cross connected to another T1 interface All other DSOs remain unaffected by trunk conditioning Enter one of the values shown in Table 4 12 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values in each of the fields on both the Network side and the DSX 1 side Although you can choose any value for the DSX 1 side the default value displayed is based on a typical setting
175. E 14 The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the 15 position DSX 1 interface on the FrameSaver SLV 9128 II standalone units A DSX 1 adapter is not required for this interface Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Receive Tip Ti From DTE 1 Transmit Tip T To DTE 3 Shield 2 4 Receive Ring R1 From DTE 9 Transmit Ring R To DTE 11 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments T1 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F1 500 Network access is via a 20 foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Receive Ring R1 From Network 1 Receive Tip Ti From Network 2 Transmit Ring R To Network 4 Transmit Tip T To Network 5 T1 Mass Termination Cable Feature No 9007 F1 500 9128 A2 GB20 80 The following pin assignments are for the T1 Mass Termination cable that connects multiple carrier mounted FrameSaver units to an M66 block It has a 50 pin RJ48H plug at one end and seven RJ48C plugs at the other end Function Circuit Line Pin Function Circuit Line Pin Receive ring R1 1 1 Transmit ring to R 1 14 Joma 2 2 the network 2 15 3 3 3 16 4 4 4 17 5 5 5 18 6 6 6 19 7 7 7 20 Receive tip T1 1 26 Transmit tip to the T 1 39 a 2 27 network 2 40 3 28 3 41 4 29 4 4
176. Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually To load OpenLane default settings for alarms see Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template on page 10 8 B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens see the window in Editing Alarms on page 10 9 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Add button to the right of the list The Add Trap window opens Add Trap State Type Ethernet Stats Trap Yariable Drop Events Absolute _ Delta Rising _ Falling Both Threshold Severity script bool I es Description Rising Threshold Reached Falling Threshold Reached Community public public Trap Number 4 2 Check every po Cancel September 2002 10 11 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 10 12 4 Click on the button to the right of indicated fields for a drop down list from which selections can be made Minimally configure the following fields Field Select or Enter Domain U
177. FrameSaver SLV 9126 9126 11 and 9128 I CSU DSU and 9126 11 Router User s Guide Document No 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 WANADIAN S Copyright 2002 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service re
178. FrameSaver unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and seta duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options NOTE These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE like a DTE initiated External Loopback The Test menu allows you to run PVC loopbacks and test patterns on the unit and its DBM interface It is available to users with a security access level of 1 or 2 Currently there are no physical tests for a BRI DBM interface DBM tests are started and monitored the same as the network tests See System and Test Status Messages in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for ISDN backup related test messages appearing on the System and Test Status screen See PVC Tests on page 8 22 on for additional information September 2002 8 19 8 Troubleshooting Starting and Stopping a Test 8 20 Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests on page 8 21 When the status of a testis The only command available is Inactive Start Active Sto
179. Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 47 4 Configuration Options 4 48 Table 4 10 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options 3 of 3 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 10 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 10 or 10 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period ora 108 or 10 5 or 107 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Dec
180. I DBM Physical Interface Options or Table 4 10 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options for configuration information 4 12 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration The Automatic Backup Configuration feature is used to automatically create alternate DLCI records and PVC connections on the ISDN DBM backup interface for current or newly discovered PVC Connections and Management PVCs This feature is already set up with Single_Site_Backup as the default for units with a BRI DBM and Multi_Site_Backup for units with a PRI DBM If the unit at the central site has a BRI DBM change the Automatic Backup Configuration to Multi_Site_Backup if necessary Main Menu Auto Configuration Automatic Backup Configuration If you select Then Single Site Backup Alternate destinations are automatically configured using a default for a BRI DBM single ISDN Link Profile to backup all network PVC Connections and Management PVCs over the primary Used at remote sites since destination ISDN link only one ISDN link to the Initially PV ith al inati nfigur n central site is needed nitially PVCs with alternate destinations are configured o the first ISDN Link Profile using the same DLCI number as the network DLCI being backed up However primary destination PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface are automatically updated to use a different DLCI number for the alternate destination DL
181. I comes up on the network That is LMI on each port follows the network interface s LMI The state of LMI on the port will not affect the state of LMI on the network interface Port 1 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down or LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit It is not recommended since it makes fault isolation more difficult Port 2 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Reacts like the Port 1 Codependent with Net1 FR1 selection but for Port 2 instead The state of LMI on the network interface will not affect the state of LMI on Port 1 Rtr S0 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Rtr SO goes down or LMI down on Rtr SO when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 3 of 4 LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occ
182. IGNMENT STATUS D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D05 1 01r D05 1 02r D05 1 03r S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Slot 1 Tl FR NAM Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 37 7 Operation and Maintenance The following information is available for DSX 1 interface time slots D01 D24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates the blank The time slot is unassigned Net1 tt Network interface 1 time slot tt is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Clear Channel Net1 ttr Network interface 1 time slot tt is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r DBM Interface Status 7 38 When an ISDN DBM is installed these interface statuses appear when DBM Interface Status is selected from the Status menu Main Menu s Status DBM Interface Status DBM Interface Status Screen Example main status dbm Device Name Node A Line Status Link 9128 II 5 26 2000 23 32 DBM INTERFACE STATUS Call Rejected HQ Site Disabled Colorado Multilink Constituent Link Colorado 1 Link Operating Mode Call Status Most Recent Cause Value Previous Cause Value 1 2
183. ISDN DBM interface 2 Interface is one of the following Network 1 DSX 1 Port n ISDN BRI or PRI 3 nnmn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 7 28 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Network LMI reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status LMI Reported DLCIs The LMI Reported DLCls screen displays the status and CIR if supported by the switch for each DLCI whether the DLCI is configured or not LMI Reported DLCls Status Screen Example 9128 II 5 26 2000 23 32 main status lmi dlcis Device Name Node A frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs Page 1 of 2 STATUS CIR bps STATUS CIR bps Active 16000 Active 32000 Inactive Active 32000 Deleted Deleted Inactive Active 32000 Inactive Active 32000 Inactive Active 32000 Active Inactive Active 256000 Active 64000 DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp Next Link PrevLink An asterisk next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for the link DLCls without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit These DLCls pass through the unit transparently without being monitored and with no demultiplexing multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being performed Only DLCls on the Net1 FR1 and Port 1 frame relay links appear on this screen nonconfigured DLCls on other lin
184. MI OK ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router main status leds 9126 IIRSLV Device Name Node A 08 23 2002 11 59 DISPLAY LEDS 4 Control Leads TI FR NAM NETWORK 1 DSX 1 Ethernet Sig Sig OK OOF OOF Alm Alm LMI OK ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance FrameSaver SLV 9128 II LEDs and Control Leads The FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il faceplate includes 12 LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the FrameSaver unit its network interface DSX PRI and DTE interface The FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il with an Ethernet port faceplate is shown below 9128 a IS RE KF Se Sd FrameSaver SLV GINIDNID OO0000000 NETWORK DSX PRI PORT 00 16833 To access the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs and Control Leads The following example shows the screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II with an ISDN PRI DBM installed Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il main status leds 9128 11 Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS 4 Control Leads TI FR NAM GENERAL NETWORK 1 DSX 1 OK Sig Sig Alarm OOF OOF Test Alm Alm Backup LMI OK DTR FR Mode ISDN PRI Sig OOF
185. Main Menu Status Identity September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Determining Whether a Download Is Completed Changing Software To see whether a download has completed check the Identity screen Main Menu Status Identity Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column If a software revision number appears the file transfer is complete If In Progress appears the file is still being transferred If Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful Once a software upgrade is downloaded it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets then executes the downloaded software With this feature you control when the upgrade software is implemented p gt Procedure 9128 A2 GB20 80 To switch to the new software 1 Go to the Control menu and select Select Software Release Main Menu Control Select Software Release The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just transferred are shown If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure Upgrading System Software if this occurs Select Switch amp Reset Enter Yes to the Are you sure prompt The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current Software Revision Main Menu Status I
186. O For the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router specifies that the frame relay link on the virtual router port be used in the connection Clear All Clears all Link and DLCI settings and suppresses EDLCls Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 15 PVC Connection Options 2 of 4 Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLC for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number Primary Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 ISDN Link Name Rtr SO Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration
187. OTE LMI Behavior cannot be changed while Auto Backup is enabled A warning message appears at the bottom of the screen if auto backup is enabled First disable Auto Backup and then change LMI Behavior Independent Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface Provides LMI Spoofing This is the recommended setting when backup is configured and for Network Service Providers NSPs 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 21 4 Configuration Options 4 22 Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 4 LMI Behavior continued Net1 FR1 Follows Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port 1 That is the network interface s LMI follows Port 1 s LMI Used at central sites this setting is useful when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Net1 FR1 Follows Port 2 Reacts like the Net1 FR1 Follows Port 1 selection but for Port 2 instead Rtr S0 Follows Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI
188. Options e Node IP e Management PVCs e General SNMP Management e Telnet and FTP Session e SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps e Ethernet e Communication Port e Modem Port Assignments 9128 I NAM e Clear Assignments Yo New or Modify Management PVC Entry September 2002 PVC Connection Table e Source Link DLCI EDLCI e Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI e Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLC New or Modify PVC Connection Entry 02 17304a 9128 A2 GB20 80 A Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Control Automatic Circuit Removal Automatic Backup Easy Install Configuration MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Control Modem Call Directories Easy Install System Information e Device Name e System Name Location Contact e Date e Time 9128 A2 GB20 80 System Information Administer Logins Change Operating Mode Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Enable Disable Modem PassThru to COM Disconnect Modem Reset Device Administer Logins Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility e Login ID e Current Release Capture Interface e Password Alternate Release e Packet Capture Start Stop e Access Level e Switch amp Reset e Status e Packets in Buffer e Display LMI Trace Log LMI Tr
189. P Relay Agen oe nami ana KAGUYNNE Hae die Hada deat September 2002 Contents 4 51 4 52 4 53 4 59 4 60 4 61 4 64 4 68 4 72 4 73 4 74 4 77 4 83 4 84 4 87 4 88 4 94 4 96 4 100 4 104 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 8 5 8 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 13 iii Contents Router Security Ka mna senegal id da AG OA View nee a Vers 5 14 IP Router Filtering 2 4 Acts cals Ad ek ink daa LAGA 5 14 Bridge Filtering soco errau errie e eee 5 14 P FREIN 2 LAGA Nh NAGA WID la Kaede dae Hanes iat 5 15 Land Bug Prevention ee rress ikre reran eee eee eee 5 15 Smurf Attack Prevention 0 000 cece eee 5 15 Provisioning the Router Interface a 5 15 Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation 5 16 Uploading and Downloading the Router Configuration Via the CLI 5 16 6 Security and Logins Limiting Access rri seca ne eee BER ei Sa ee 6 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 6 2 Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port 6 4 Controlling ISDN Access ananunua cee eee 6 5 ISDN Call Security 0 2 ee eee 6 5 Disabling ISDN Access 0 000 cece eee 6 5 Controlling Telnet or FTP Access c cee eee eee 6 6 Limiting Telnet Access 0 0 e eee eee ee 6 6 Limiting FTP Access 2 00 e eee eee 6 7 Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Hika han AA Marable et tata sata aaa maar nt 6
190. Pango Gj Bursi Range 2 E Burst Range 3 E Burst Range 4 E Burst Range 5 Network Frame Drops sec 1 ne LCI oe ng EE Tr tt oa 1 Frames Out Size Distribution Irames sec HB 10100 bytes E lt 0200 bytes E lt 0500 bytes DLCI Up Time Bl 1000 bytes E lt 4000 bytes aa Link Up Time 25 wa 100 Ba BN an ma a ba ma a nan a Se a ee aa Sa ff O C Pa st Pa PF ge x Pa Na go Pd Time Time Auto Range Custom From 10 27 1986 03 10 PM To 1027 1998 03 39 PM Created 10 29 1998 04 10 07 PM 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices m Trend Reports Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCl s poor Health Index rating See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports 11 10 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Menu Hierarchy Menus 9128 A2 GB20 80 The Menu Hierarchy on the following pages shows a pictorial view of the organization of
191. Protocol 111 sunrpc Sun Remote Procedure Call 123 ntp Network Time Protocol 137 netbios ns NetBios name service 138 netbios dgm NetBios datagram service 161 snmp Simple Network Management Protocol 162 snmptrap SNMP Traps 177 xdmcp X Display Manager Control Protocol 195 dnsix DNSIX security protocol auditing 434 mobile ip Mobile IP registration 512 biff Biff mail notification comsat 513 who Who service rwho 514 syslog System Logger 517 talk Talk 520 rip Routing Information Protocol September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Summaries For summaries of Command Line Interface commands see m Table D 1 Show Commands m Table D 2 Access Control and System Level Commands m Table D 3 CLI Commands For default settings see CL Command Default Settings on page D 6 The minimal characters that must be typed when entering commands are shown in courier bold for these tables For details on each command and the conventions used for command line syntax see Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 D 1 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Show Command Summary D 2 Table D 1 Show Commands lists all of the show or display commands for the CLI Table D 1 Show Commands Command Function show arp Displays all the devices in the router s ARP table show bridge Displays the router s bridge forwar
192. R LL lt inov 2 gt gt MINOWSECXEIN P2 Pin X September 2002 gt KIMOTNWSAEXXCSESBNOTDDNHA 98 16165a 9128 A2 GB20 80 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments DSX 1 Connector The type of DSX 1 port connector depends on the model DSX 1 Port for 9126 9126 II and Carrier Mounted 9128 II 8 Position The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the 8 position modular DSX 1 interface on the FrameSaver SLV 9126 9126 II and 9128 II carrier mounted units The DSX 1 Adapter is required for this interface Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Receive Ring R1 From DTE 1 Receive Tip Ti From DTE 2 Shield 3 Transmit Ring R To DTE 4 Transmit Tip T To DTE 5 Shield 6 DSX 1 Adapter Feature No 9008 F1 560 The DSX 1 adapter cable is used as an interface between the FrameSaver unit s DSX 1 connector and the DTE s DB15 interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each 8 Position Modular Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring Receive Tip Shield DB15 Socket Receive Ring Receive Tip Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip 9128 A2 GB20 80 99 16216a September 2002 E 13 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments DSX 1 Port for 1 Slot 9128 IT 15 Position
193. Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask B 30 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 5 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Total Tx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Total Rx Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 2 I N Port Burst Upper Limits MIB pdn_FrExt mib E ae Tag devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 3 I N Rx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 4 I N Tx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E T
194. SI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 35 4 Configuration Options 4 36 Table 4 6 Network Physical Interface Options 3 of 4 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the network Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the unit s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 Network Initiated DCLB Possible Settings Disable V 54 8 ANSI Default Setting V 54_ amp ANSI Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback DCLB V 54 Loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate or DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant from the network on the DSOs used for the network frame relay link When enabled and a DCLB activate sequence is received the unit initiates a DCLB on the network interface When a DCLB release sequence is r
195. SLV capability 9 4 9128 A2 GB20 80 adding SLV units to network 11 3 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 5 3 Administrator changing access levels 6 15 CLI Access Level 6 14 configuration commands 5 2 AIS alarm condition 8 7 at DSX 1 or Network 7 20 at ISDN PRI 7 20 LED 7 8 7 10 linkDown trap B 11 Alarm 8 7 Fail 7 8 7 9 adding manually 10 11 conditions 8 2 8 7 configurable thresholds 1 10 editing 10 9 LED is lit 8 14 Relay turning off 7 81 RMON defaults B 18 using template 10 8 ALM LED 7 8 7 10 Alternate Dial Out Directory 4 93 IP Address 4 103 Outbound Phone Number 4 51 software revision 7 3 Subnet Mask 4 103 Alternate Destination DLCI 4 70 EDLCI 4 71 Link 4 70 Annex A and D LMI Protocol 4 61 ANSI Performance Report Messages 4 36 4 47 ANSI T1 403 Annex B FT1 Channel Loopback 8 32 applications supported by NAT 5 5 ARP 5 3 CLI commands C 11 inverse 1 2 1 5 Proxy 4 95 proxy 5 3 arrow keys 2 10 September 2002 IN 1 Index assign DSX 1 time slots 4 53 frame relay time slots 4 52 synchronous data port 4 59 time slots and cross connections 4 51 assigning community names and access levels 6 10 DLCls to a Backup Group 4 18 At a Glance report 11 6 authentificationFailure trap B 9 Auto Backup Criteria 4 104 restricting 4 17 Auto Configuration 1 6 2 4 Active 7 20 setting up 4 8 availability LMI and PVC 1 10 B back door access when locked out
196. SU Out D Data Set Ready DSR 107 From DSU Out E Receive Line Signal Detector 109 From DSU Out F RLSD or LSD Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 2 To DSU In H Local Loopback LL 141 To DSU In L Transmit Data TXD 103 To DSU In P A S B Receive Data RXD 104 From DSU Out R A T B Transmit Signal Element Timing 113 To DSU In U A DTE Source XTXC or TT W B Receive Signal Element Timing 115 From DSU Out V A DCE Source RXC X B Transmit Signal Element Timing 114 From DSU Out Y A DCE Source TXC AA B Test Mode Indicator TM 142 From DSU Out NN September 2002 E 11 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Standard V 35 Straight through Cable A standard V 35 straight through cable can be used to connect a DTE port toa DTE where a 34 pin plug type connector is needed for the data port anda 34 position socket type connector is needed for the DTE No special order cables are required Standard V 35 Crossover Cable A standard V 35 crossover cable with a 34 pin plug type connector on each end of the cable can be used to connect the FrameSaver unit s DTE port to another DCE The following illustration provides the pin assignments for the V 35 crossover cable Cmte p He bd ii jag 3 o N o TXDA TXD B RXDA RXD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B ETXC A ETXC B FRM GND SIG GND RTS CD DTR DS
197. Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about setting Telnet configuration options 6 6 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Limiting FTP Access FTP access can be limited by 6 Security and Logins m Disabling FTP access completely m Requiring a user ID and password to login m Limiting FTP bandwidth p gt Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Access Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login on page 6 12 If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers including downloads keep the access at Level 1 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV historical information Limit bandwidth for FTP FTP Max Transfer Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is requ
198. Saver devices that are scheduled for activation as needed Generate and print a report that summarizes the activity on all Activation Certificates in your system which includes the number of activations ordered the number of activations remaining on the certificate and the date the certificate was ordered The report also includes information about each activated unit its system name IP address location model serial number and date of activation The sections that follow describe what you need to do to get Activation Certificate information into your OpenLane SLM system and to activate SLM capability in units with the diagnostic feature set September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features Entering an Activation Certificate Once you receive an Activation Certificate enter the Activation Certificate number into your OpenLane SLM system s database pp Procedure To enter the Activation Certificate number 1 Open the OpenLane SLM application and provide your access level which must be Admin Select Firmware Feature Maintenance from the OpenLane Administration screen In the Feature Activations area select View Add activation certificates located near the bottom of the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu If no Activation Certificates have been entered into the system or if adding another certificate Click inside the New certificate box u
199. Setting 1 Specifies in seconds the amount of time to wait between pings 1 900 The ping wait time September 2002 8 37 8 Troubleshooting 8 38 Table 8 5 Ping Options 3 of 3 Response Timeout Default Setting 2 Available Settings 1 60 1 60 The response timeout period Specifies the amount of time in seconds to wait before a host that has not responded toa ping is declared unreachable When the ping has completed normally timed out or been stopped using the Stop command informational fields are displayed as shown in Table 8 6 Ping Responses Table 8 6 Ping Responses Field Possible Values Description Status m n Progress m Ping has been sent m Alive m Ping was successful m Destination m The host could not be reached See Unreachable RFC 792 for possible causes m Ping Timed Out m There was no response in the period specified in Response Timeout m No route inthis m The IP address is not in the routing device table and no Default IP Destination is configured Ping Loss Ratio 0 100 The ratio of pings received to pings transmitted Pings Transmitted 1 999999 The number of pings transmitted Pings Received 1 999999 The number of pings received Pings Lost 1 999999 The number of pings transmitted less the number of pings received Current Roundtrip m O m No measurement exists ey m 1 9999 m The time in milliseconds that it took to complet
200. Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSegErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Tx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Nonoctet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 94 71 19 1 Tx Total Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 71 20 1 Rx Total Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Rx Overruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 33 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 16 Alarm OID Cross Reference 3 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1
201. Supplemental Report Shows DLCI availability and latency The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you have a broader view of the service provided by the network m Service Level Reports Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Executive Service Level Report Provides service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals IT Manager Service Level Report Provides service level information for various groups Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCls along with details on individual DLCls within that group Customer Service Level Report Provides service level information for customers This report is used to provide service level information to service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines daily volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page m At a Glance Reports Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page At a Glance R
202. TU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 Kbps T1 Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit stuffing 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack Up to 1 536 Mbps Fractional T1 service frame relay service RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable AT amp T TR 62411 DSX 1 Interface Physical interface FrameSaver SLV 9126 9126 II and 9126 I Router FrameSaver SLV 9128 II Framing format Coding format DTE line equalization Send AIS 8 position modular connector with 8 position modular to DB15 adapter D Sub 15 socket 15 position D Subminiature connector D Sub 15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 196 5 meters Selectable September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 F Technical Specifications Table F 2 1 Slot CSU DSUs and Router Technical Specifications 3 of 3 Specification Criteria Data Port 34 position V 35 connector Standard V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Data rates Variations for T1 rates automatically set to the network rate Modem MDM Interface Data rates Link Protocol 6 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ11C jack Up to 14 4 Kbps PPP SLIP ISDN BRI DBM Interface Service supported Data rates 8 position
203. Timer ESF Error Events Near 123 Far 124 Near 15 Far 12 ES CSS LOFC Time Near Far Near Far Near Far Current 10 37 0 0 0 Line 10 Int 01 10 35 Int 02 10 20 Int 03 10 05 Line 13 Int 04 09 50 Int 05 09 35 Int 06 09 20 Line 16 Int 07 09 05 O OO 200 00 cg O OO 200 00 cg 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BO OO 00 00 cg DO OO 200 00 cg OO 200 00 cg Worst Interval 24 24 Near Tot valid 96 00010 Far Tot valid 96 00010 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrFarStats ClrNearStats Select 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 For the ESF line performance statistics the following performance statistics are kept for each 15 minute interval over the past 24 hour period A Near set and a Far set are kept for each statistic The Far set is based on information kept by the unit at the other end of the local loop and is only available when ANSI performance report messages are enabled in the unit Summary information that appears near the top of the screen includes m Near Far Current Interval Timer Contains the number of seconds that have elapsed in the current 15 minute interval for the near or far information which can show a value up to 900 seconds m Near Far ESF Error Events Maintains a count of ESF error events as specified by AT amp T TR 54016 which counts CRC and OOF events A maximum of 65 535 error events can be counted Once 65535 is reached it
204. a and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 39 4 Configuration Options Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options 3 of 5 Monitor RTS Control Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send RTS circuits on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When this condition is detected CTS is deasserted LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE Disable RTS is not monitored RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready DTR circuit on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When this condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine whether data should be tran
205. a DLCI Record on the network interface that will be used for backup then modify the PVC Connections or Management PVCs to add the alternate destination Setting Up Back to Back Operation Using this special feature you can set up two FrameSaver units that are connected back to back without frame relay switches between them as in a test bench setup using a crossover cable Changing Operating Mode When setting up back to back operation m One unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation m The other unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI user network interface Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed pp Procedure To set up back to back operation 1 On the unit to be configured for Back to Back operation manually configure DLCls DLCls should be configured before connecting the two units 2 Access the Change Operating Mode screen Main Menu Control Change Operating Mode 3 Select Back to Back Operation and respond Yes to the Are you sure prompt 4 Save the change B gt Procedure To return the unit to normal operation 1 Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard Operation 2 Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change The units can be reconnected to a standard frame relay network 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 19 4 Configuration Options Configur
206. a NBA NG Haha Gad NGO ees NN Na 8 25 Testaa naat Kac nk Dba TANG hh An bbb he Mad 8 25 Physical TESIS eee haa Pale Tye ae ata aad eee E 8 26 Line Loopback a ice jane ke e ee ee PPL ee 8 27 Payload Loopback 0 0 00 e eee eee 8 28 Repeater Loopback 0 e eee eee ee 8 29 DTE Loopback ian Gd ee ea See a i 8 30 Send Line Loopback risu erora a E eee 8 31 Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link 8 32 Send Remote Line Loopback 00 00 eee eae 8 33 Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 0 00 eae 8 34 IP Ping TES Ena a ee Gh ee eed Ged ees 8 35 IP Ping Test Procedure 1 2 cee eee ee 8 39 IP Ping Test Procedure 2 0 cc eee eee 8 40 Lamp Test cae secre eee dae ee ee ee See 8 40 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features vi OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 9 2 Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System naaraana 9 2 Setting Up FrameSaver Support anaana ee ee 9 3 Ordering SLM Feature Set Activations 0 00000 0 9 4 To Find Your License Key Number 0 000 9 4 The Activation Certificate 00000 0c eee eee 9 5 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Contents m Administering and Managing SLM Activations 9 6 Entering an Activation Certificate 0 9 7 Checking Activation Certificate Status 9 7 Scheduling
207. a dynamically configured standard NAT non port translation mapping can remain unused before the mapping is automatically deleted The default is 24 hours To reset the timeout to the default use the no nat translation timeout command Example ip nat translation timeout 604800 NOTE When NAPT is enabled mappings are automatically deleted based on a separate set of non configurable timeouts UDP translations timeout 5 minutes TCP translations timeout 24 hours ICMP translations timeout 1 minute time The timeout value in seconds The valid range is 1 2147483647 The default is 86400 seconds 24 hours C 12 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 8 NAT Commands 2 of 3 ip nat pool pool name start ip addr end ip addr netmask netmask prefix 1length prefix length no ip nat pool pool name start ip addr end ip addr netmask netmask prefix 1length prefix length Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Defines a pool of addresses for Network Address Translation Addresses can then be allocated from the pool as needed Up to 30 NAT pools can be supported To remove a pool use the no ip nat pool command No NAT pools are configured by default Example ip nat pool Largo 132 53 4 2 132 53 4 250 24 pool name Name of the pool comprised of 1 20 ASCII printable characters start ip addr St
208. a to switch between screen areas see the example in Main Menu on page 2 4 B gt Procedure To switch to the function keys area 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area 2 Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key 3 Press Enter The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again 2 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting a Field Once you reach the desired menu or screen select a field to view or change or issue a command Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current setting or value appears to the right of the field Entering Information You can enter information in one of three ways Select the field then m Manually type in enter the field value or command Example Entering bjk as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch m Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Example When configuring a port s physical characteristics with the Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks configuration option field selected possible settings include Disable Local DTPLB DCLB and Both entering d or D displays the first value starting with d Disable In this example entering dt or DT would display DTPLB as the selection
209. ables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps see Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults See Trap Event Log in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for a screen example and additional information Troubleshooting Tables The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble free service However if a problem occurs refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Device Problems Table 8 2 Device Problems 1 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs are not lit The power cord is not securely plugged into the wall receptacle to rear panel connection Check that the power cord is securely attached at both ends The wall receptacle has no power m Check the wall receptacle power by plugging in some equipment that is known to be working m Check the circuit breaker m Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power On Self Test fails Only Alarm LED is on after power on The unit has detected an internal hardware failure m Reset the unit and try again m Contact your service representative m Return the unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales Service and Training Information on page A of this document 8 14 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 8 2 Device Problems 2 of 2 8 Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Caus
210. ace ABCD 1111 PLAR4idle PLAR4busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D4 interface ABCD 0000 PLAR4busy DPO idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPO interface ABCD 0000 DPT idle DPO busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state fora DPO interface ABCD 1111 DPT busy DPT idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPT interface ABCD 0000 DPO idle DPT busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state fora DPT interface ABCD 1111 DPO busy USER xxxx The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent a user defined pattern of ABCD xxxx USER xxxx xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX 1 sides September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or DSX 1 Time Slots 9128 A2 GB20 80 For a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II which has two data ports another assignment screen is available Use the Sync Data Port Assignment screen to view the status of m All DSO assignments on the Networ
211. ace Log New i MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install lt Easy Install e Node IP Address and Subnet Mask e TS Access e Create Dedicated Network Management Link e Time Slot Assignment Screen e Ethernet Port Options Screen e Selected Network Physical Interface Options 02 17304b September 2002 A 3 A Menu Hierarchy A 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This appendix contains the following m MIB Support on page B 2 m Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps on page B 2 m System Group mib 2 on page B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 m Interfaces Group mib 2 on page B 3 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps on page B 8 Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Traps linkUp and linkDown Traps enterprise Specific Traps RMON Specific Trap dialControl RMON Alarm and Event Defaults on page B 18 Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order on page B 26 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 1 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The FrameSaver uni
212. ace during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOl busy FXOD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXODN interface ABCD 0000 FXSD idle FXOD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXODN interface ABCD 1111 FXSD busy FXSD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 0000 FXOD idle FXSD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 1111 FXOD busy September 2002 4 57 4 Configuration Options 4 58 Table 4 12 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 3 of 3 Network Side Meanings DSX 1 Side PLAR3idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D3 interface ABCD 0000 PLAR3idle PLAR3busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D3 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR3busy PLAR4idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D4 interf
213. active on the user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port n An external DTE Loopback is active on the user data port DTPLB Active Port n A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB is active on the user data port Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off LLB Active Interface A network Line Loopback LLB is active on the specified network DSX 1 or ISDN PRI interface No Test Active No tests are currently running PLB Active Interface A Payload Loopback PLB is active on the specified network DSX 1 or ISDN PRI interface PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame relay link 3 A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI for the frame relay link RLB Active Interface A network Repeater Loopback RLB is active on the specified network or DSX 1 interface Send Pttn Active Interface A Send Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay 1 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n for a 1 slot unit or SsPort n for a NAM in a multislot housing the frame relay link associated with the specified user data port in the specified slot ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 2 Interface is one of t
214. address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 87 4 Configuration Options Table 4 21 SNMP NMS Security Options 2 of 2 Access Type Possible Settings
215. ag devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask See Table B 16 Alarm OID Cross Reference for an RMON alarm OID cross reference 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 31 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 16 Alarm OID Cross Reference 1 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 5 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 Tag dsx1TotalUASs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Received MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1
216. ailable and the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI This option does not appear if Payload Managed is enabled NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses the EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number inclusive 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 81 4 Configuration Options Table 4 18 Management PVC Options 6 of 6 Encapsulation Possible Settings Routed Default Setting Routed This read only field specifies that the IP encapsulation used is RFC 1490 RFC 2427 routed Network Level Protocol IDentifier NLPID encapsulation and not SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP encapsulation Display Conditions This option appears only if the PVC is IP Enabled or Payload Managed is enabled Routed IP encapsulation is routed NLPID 4 82 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring General SNMP Management 9128 A2 GB20 80 Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols see Table 4 19 General SNMP Management Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication General SNMP Management You must have Level 1 access to display or configure these options Table 4 19 General SNMP Management Options 1 of 2 SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Sett
217. ally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and reporting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network performance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCls can be included in an At a Glance Report Using the FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report on page 11 9 you can compare a DLCI s volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled In addition all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV device can accurately
218. alue RFC 1757 alarmValue AlarmFalling Threshold m alarmFallingThreshold e g Octets received on Network RFC 1757 T1 frame relay fell to threshold of m devLastTrapString 1 devHealthAndStatus mib September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Trap dialControl B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These traps indicate when an ISDN backup call is initiated or terminated or when an outgoing call is rejected by the far end device Table B 9 dialControl Traps 1 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause Standard Dial Control MIB dialCtlPeerCall Information m callHistoryPeerld RFC 2128 m callHistoryPeerlflndex RFC 2128 m callHistoryLogicallflndex RFC 2128 m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m callHistoryPeerAddress RFC 2128 m callHistorySubAddress RFC 2128 m callHistoryDisconnect Cause RFC 2128 m callHistoryConnectTime RFC 2128 m callHistoryDisconnect Time RFC 2128 m callHistorylnfoType RFC 2128 m callHistoryCallOrigin RFC 2128 A peer to peer call has been ended String Call sequence on ifString using B Chnl channel terminated due to causeString The B channel in this example is only provided if it is known See Most Recent and Previous Cause Values Table 7 13 DBM Interface Status in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for a list of the ScauseStrings and their cause numbers dialCtlPeerCall S
219. ame relay link and one containing system type OIDs Any of these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files specific to the FrameSaver unit These files have a pdn udh user defined history format and are found in the OpenLane netscout userHistory directory The userHistory files should be moved to NSHOME usr So they can be used A separate udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded Use a text editor to create these udh files by m Copying one of the interface specific files DLCI or link and editing it using one of the examples provided as a guide m Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the FrameSaver unit CAUTION Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the unit UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 These files must not be modified These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCls before starting to be sure your agent and DLCI lists are current To rediscover agents and their DLCls select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected September 2002 10 13 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices p gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Copy an example or int
220. an be placed in configuration mode The text file can then be fed back to configure the router September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Security and Logins This chapter includes the following 9128 A2 GB20 80 Limiting Access on page 6 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access on page 6 2 Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port on page 6 4 Controlling ISDN Access on page 6 5 ISDN Call Security Disabling ISDN Access Controlling Telnet or FTP Access on page 6 6 Limiting Telnet Access Limiting FTP Access Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Link Controlling SNMP Access on page 6 9 Disabling SNMP Access Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses Creating a Login on page 6 12 Modifying a Login on page 6 13 Deleting a Login on page 6 13 Controlling Router CLI Access on page 6 14 September 2002 6 1 6 Security and Logins Limiting Access The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces m Asynchronous terminal m Telnet m FTP SNMP Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time that is you can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions or one Telnet session and one active asynchronous terminal session or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal sessions Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Direct asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface ca
221. an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 September 2002 4 83 4 Configuration Options Table 4 19 General SNMP Management Options 2 of 2 Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 4 84 Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP File Transport Protocol session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time see Table 4 20 Telnet and FTP Session Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Session When a TS Access Management Link has been set up and activated the following options have no effect upon the PVC m Telnet Login Required m Session Access Level m FTP Login Required September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration O
222. annot Wait and try again receive the call September 2002 7 47 7 Operation and Maintenance IP Routing Table The IP Routing Table shows all the routes configured in the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Status IP Routing Table IP Routing Table Screen Example main status ip route 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 Destination Page 1 of 2 IP ROUTING TABLE Gateway Interface 135 001 001 135 001 002 135 001 220 135 001 221 135 001 220 135 001 222 135 001 222 135 001 002 135 001 002 135 026 135 026 135 042 135 042 135 042 135 026 135 026 135 026 135 026 PVCMgmt 1001 PVCMgmt 1002 Ethernet Modem COM Modem PVCMgmt 1003 PVCMgmt 1004 PVCMgmt 1005 CMgmt 1006 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 previous menu MainMenu Exit The table is sorted by the Destination IP address from the lowest number to the highest If no routes exist the No Routes message appears instead of routing information Table 7 15 IP Routing Table Values 1 of 2 Column What It Indicates Destination The Destination IP Address for the route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Mask The Destination Subnet Mask for the route m 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 for network routes m FFF FFF FFF FFF for host routes m 127 may appear as well It is a reserved number Gateway The Gateway IP Address for the route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255
223. annot be enabled at the same time With DHCP relay enabled the router sends the DHCP request to the DHCP server September 2002 5 13 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router Router Security IP Router Filtering Bridge Filtering 5 14 The router offers security via the following m Filtering can be enabled or disabled for inbound and or outbound traffic Ethertype ICMP Message Type Code IP Protocol Type TCP UDP or ICMP TCP UDP Ports IP Source Destination IP Address m Always enabled Land Bug Prevention Smurf Attack Prevention Router filtering does not apply when the router is in bridge only mode By default filtering is disabled on the router Filtering provides security advantages on LANs by restricting traffic on the network A filter consists of a set of rules applied to a specific interface to indicate whether a packet received or sent on that interface is forwarded or discarded Filters are configured in general router configuration mode then applied to the Ethernet or frame relay network interface Filters are applied to traffic in either the transmit or receive direction on that interface There is one filter access list per interface per direction with a maximum of 33 rules per list For IP filters all rules with a source host IP address are applied first all rules with a destination host IP address are applied next The remaining filters are applied in the order in which they w
224. ap Variable Keyt Key2 Threshold Severity Script Description Community Trap Number Check every Edit Trap USRDEF Ethernet Stats Drop Events io Boo Absolute Delta Rising _ Falling _ Both 45000 a a lied i ls SLV Frames Snt Rising Thresh Falling Threshold Reached public public Hi 2 4 Edit any trap defaults that may be required See Step 4 on page 10 12 of Adding SLV Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply your changes The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears 6 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to apply your changes Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds 10 10 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Manually 9128 A2 GB20 80 Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be defined and assigned to each DLCI When configuring alarms manually every alarm must be configured for each DLC that is if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCls 160 trap configurations must be created 8 x 20 For this reason it is recommended that the OpenLane defaults be used
225. arting IP address of the range of addresses in the address pool end ip addr Ending IP address of the range of addresses in the address pool netmask Specify a network mask that indicates which address bits belong to the network and subnet fields and which bits belong to the host field netmask Network mask of the network for the pool addresses prefix length or Specify the number of bits in a network mask address that are ones and define the network and subnet fields prefix length The number of bits in a network mask address that are ones Valid range is 1 32 no ip nat inside source list access list 1 99nuM pool pool name overload list access list 1 99num interface intf type intf num sub intf num overload static static ip addr1 static ip addr2 protocol static ip addr1 static port num static ip addr2y y Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows a user to specify or remove Network Address Translation rules Both dynamic and static address translations may be specified Command forms that include an access list are used to specify dynamic translation rules Packets from addresses that match the access list are translated using addresses allocated from the named pool or the IP address assigned to the interface No NAT rules are configured by default Example Refer to Chapter 4 Configuration Options inside Inside address translation converts an inside private IP address
226. as occurred or the download was not successful Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Ethernet MAC Address Media Access Control MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port during manufacturing 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 3 7 Operation and Maintenance Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 7 4 View this field To find the ISDN DBM Card Type The type of dial backup module installed ISDN BRI or ISDN PRI if applicable m f an unsupported DBM is installed Unsupport displays m Ifthe DBM has failed Failed displays Software Revision Software version currently being used by the FrameSaver unit s DBM Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels For an ISDN PRI DBM None displays because the DBM does not have loaded software it runs from the NAM s software Hardware Revision FrameSaver DBM s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by 2 digits and 1 alphabetic character FrameSaver SLV faceplates include LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the unit and its interfaces These faceplates are shown in the following sections The Display LEDs and Control Leads feature allows you to monitor a remote unit it is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen shows the appropriate interfaces for the unit w
227. ates Line Status continued Call Rejected ISDN Link Name Disabled m The incoming call was rejected because the enabled ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming Caller1 ID or local phone number was disabled The ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming call is displayed Link ISDN Link Name The selected ISDN backup link for which status will be displayed Multilink Constituent Link ISDN Link Name The selected multilink constituent link for which status will be displayed Link Operating Mode Disabled Idle Active The status of the ISDN DBM m The ISDN Link Profile is disabled m An ISDN link is not currently needed so there is no ISDN connection m The ISDN link is required for frame relay traffic and needs an active ISDN connection Call Status Not Connected Invalid Link Profile Not Connected Connected Connected Incoming Call The overall status of the ISDN frame relay link m No calls are currently connected on the selected link because the ISDN Link Profile is incomplete m No calls are currently connected on the selected link m Atleast one call is actively connected and available for data transfer on the selected ISDN frame relay link when the Most Recent Cause Value is Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chn1 7 m An incoming call has been answered and is actively connected and available for data transfer on the
228. ateway 7 48 Gateway Address Default 4 95 gender adapter changer E 10 General LEDs 7 8 options 4 31 SNMP management options 4 83 Traps 4 89 generating reports 11 6 glossary Xii grouping elements for reports 11 5 IN 6 H hardware revision DBM 7 4 NAM 7 3 HDLC errors frame relay statistics 7 63 Health and Status 8 2 messages 7 20 history adding files 10 13 installing files 10 15 monitoring DLCI 10 16 Hop 7 48 hyperlink to more information highlighted text xiv I ICMP 5 2 designations C 31 IP routing table type 7 49 Identity displaying 7 3 Ignore Control Leads 4 97 Inactivity Timeout 4 86 4 98 4 101 in band router management 1 2 Inbound Calling ID 4 50 Initial Route Destination 4 89 installation 1 5 installation and setup Network Health 11 2 installing Network Health 11 2 user history files 10 15 Interface CLI commands C 1 C 5 route C 6 interface DBM status 7 38 status 6 5 user 2 1 Interface Status Ethernet port 4 94 Network 4 43 Internal Transmit Clock 4 39 Inv SPID Local Number Call ID 7 39 Inverse ARP 1 2 1 5 Invert Transmit and Received Data 4 41 Invert Transmit Clock 4 39 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Address 4 103 default destination 4 75 filtering 5 15 node information 4 74 options processing 5 5 ping test 8 35 routing 5 3 CLI commands C 8 Routing Table 1 7 7 48 Validation NMS 4 87 IP Address 4 78 4 99 4 102
229. ation Option Tables Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order even though this may not be the order in which you access each when configuring the unit The following configuration option tables are included m Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options m Table 4 2 Class of Service Definitions m Table 4 3 Code Point Definitions m Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options m Table 4 5 General System Options m Table 4 6 Network Physical Interface Options m Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options m Table 4 8 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options m Table 4 9 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options m Table 4 10 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options m Table 4 11 ISDN Link Profile Options m Table 4 12 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values when Assigning DSX 1 to Network Time Slots Cross Connections m Table 4 13 Interface Frame Relay Options m Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options m Table 4 15 PVC Connection Options m Table 4 16 IP Path List m Table 4 17 Node IP Options m Table 4 18 Management PVC Options m Table 4 19 General SNMP Management Options m Table 4 20 Telnet and FTP Session Options m Table 4 21 SNMP NMS Security Options m Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options m Table 4 23 Ethernet Management Options m Table 4 24 Communication Port Options m Table 4 25 Modem Port Options m Table 4 26 Auto Backup Criteria Options 4 20 September 2002 9128
230. attern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Sequence Errors 99999 Data Errors 99999 Connectivity Inactive RndTrip Time ms 99999 Test Call Active Frame Relay Link Up Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit If the unit does not have the ISDN DBM feature or if the ISDN Link Profile s Link Status is disabled Test Call does not appear An Outbound Phone Number must be configured for Test Call to appear NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver units If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest 8 22 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting PVC Loopback The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames received from another FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device Main Menu s Test Network PVC Test Network PVC Loopback DTE i _ gt hg ah ee Network 98 16186 Main Menu Test Data Port PVC Tests Port PVC Loopback DTE PVC x Cor aki UP HG PVC x l Network lt lt 98 16187 Main Menu Test ISDN Call PVC Tests ISDN PVC Loopback DTE PVC x_ T ISDN DBM ____y SDN PVC x Network Oooo O O O O FER gt 98 16188 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 23 8 Troublesh
231. availability should be measured for the selected name change the N in the Measure Latency amp Availability column to Y 10 Select Save To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay Table 4 2 Class of Service Definitions Class of Svc Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting For IDs 2 7 blank For ID 1 Default Specifies a name to identify a Class of Service definition ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the definition maximum length 8 characters Measure Latency 4 Availability Possible Settings N Y Default Setting For IDs 2 7 N For ID 1 Y Determines whether latency and availability are measured for this Class of Service ID Display Conditions This option is set to N and is read only until the class of service is defined and code points are assigned to it N Latency and availability are not measured for this Class of Service ID Y Latency and availability are measured for this Class of Service ID Code Points Assigned Possible Settings Y N Default Setting For IDs 2 7 N For ID 1 Y This read only field shows whether a Code Point has been assigned to this Class of Service ID on the Code Point Definitions screen N No Code Point is assigned to this ID Y At least one Code Point is assigned to this ID September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Code Poin
232. bb Major minor build format NAM CCA number hardware version in hhhh hhh format Serial number sssssss FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 The following is the system object identifier sysObjectID system 2 or OID for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver units FrameSaver SLV 9126 SLV 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 7 FrameSaver SLV 9126 11 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 7 1 FrameSaver SLV 9126 IISLV 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 7 FrameSaver SLV 9126 1IR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 11 4 1 FrameSaver SLV 9126 IIRSLV 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 11 4 FrameSaver SLV 9128 11 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 8 1 FrameSaver SLV 9128 IISLV 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 8 Interfaces Group mib 2 Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 1573 and RFC 1213 which is an SNMPv1 MIB is provided in this section Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable The following table provides the ifName for each interface type the ifDescr and the iflndex that Paradyne has assigned to each Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information 1 of 3 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer Network T1 T1 network interface Network T1 T1 FR NAM 101001001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh DSX 1 T1 DSX 1 interface DSX 1 T1 T1 FR NAM 101002001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003001 S01P1 Port 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM
233. ber 2002 4 45 4 Configuration Options Refer to the Table 4 10 when configuring a PRI DBM Table 4 10 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options 1 of 3 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the ISDN interface is available for use Enable The ISDN interface is enabled Disable The ISDN interface cannot be configured nor can it transmit or receive data No PVC connections or frame relay DLCls will be deleted Disabling the ISDN interface results in the following m All currently connected ISDN calls are terminated m Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated or displayed m LEDs associated with this interface are held in an off state Specifically the DSX PRI LEDs are held off if they represent the PRI status Switch Type Possible Settings NI 2 ATT_4ESS ATT_5ESS Default Setting NI 2 Specifies type of ISDN switch provided by the server NI 2 The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the National ISDN 2 switching standard ATT_4ESS The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the ATT 4ESS switching standard ATT 5ESS The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the ATT 5ESS switching standard Local Phone Number Possible Settings 10 digits Default Setting Clear Provides the telephone number associated with all Bearer channels All blan
234. bits per second 9 6 115 2 Kbps Sets the communication port speed Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character NOTE Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link 4 96 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 24 Communication Port Options 2 of 5 Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd Stop Bits Possible Settings 1 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR
235. ble between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 533 655 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the DSX 1 LOS continuous OOF or AIS Enable Sends all ones on the DSO channels allocated to the DSX 1 interface in the event of an LOS AIS or continuous OOS condition on the DSX 1 interface Disable No action is taken when a signal fails on the DSX 1 interface The data received is passed through the network interface channels unchanged 4 44 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface For models with ISDN backup capability select Physical from the ISDN menu to configure the physical characteristics for DBM Interface Main Menu Configuration ISDN Physical When configuring a BRI DBM refer to Table 4 9 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options When configuring a PRI DBM refer to Table 4 10 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options Table 4 9 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the ISDN interface is available for use Enable The ISDN interface is enabled Disable The ISDN interface cannot be conf
236. blic address to interface numerous private users to an external network All hosts on the global side view all hosts on the local side as one Internet host The local hosts continue to use their corporate or private addresses When the hosts are communicating with each other the translation is based on the IP address and the IP port numbers used by TCP IP applications Only TCP UDP applications can access the public network NAPT Configuration Example NAPT Example Ethernet Private Network Public IP Address Public Network FrameSaver SLV Router 02 17298 In this NAPT example the router is configured for NAPT using m A single public IP address Multiple public addresses can be used m A public network NAPT can also be used between private networks m Anaccess list A pool can also be used instead or in addition NAPT Mapping Public IP Address Private IP Addresses 172 20 95 2 zzzz 10 1 3 2 zzzz 172 20 95 2 yyyy 10 1 3 3 yyyy 172 20 95 2 xxxx 10 1 3 4 xxxx 5 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router p gt Procedure To set up NAPT 1 From the Main Menu screen press Ctrl a then Shift r to access the router s Command Line Interface Set up an access list The following command specifies a list that includes addresses 10 1 3 1 through 10 1 3 254 access list 1 permit 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 Enable NAPT
237. button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls NOTE Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent s traffic The procedure is the same for protocol monitoring but you may be prompted to select a Domain Group as well as an agent or DLCI 10 18 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices pp Procedure 1 Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 If you want to monitor one of the agent s DLCls highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on an applicable icon The selected graphical report should open Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain History In the example below the Domain History icon was selected which is actually a real time report NetScout RMON History Grenada43 File View Format Refresh Applications NetScout RMON History Grenada43 Utilization 11 17 02 11 28 06 11 34 15 11 40 24 11 46 33 Mon Sep 14 NOTE If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed via OpenLane the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate Only default size distributions are tracked
238. cal connection between the unit s modem and COM ports is made and data received over the modem port is transmitted out the COM port to the router s AUX or console port When an escape sequence minus minus minus with a minimum of 50 ms between each is detected the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation See COM Port to Router Cables in Appendix E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments for cable information p gt Procedure 1 Configure the COM port to use Modem PassThru Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port 2 Set Port Use to Modem PassThru 3 Save the configuration September 2002 4 7 4 Configuration Options Setting Up Auto Configuration The auto configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver unit as well as to automatically remove DLCls and connections that are no longer supported by the network service provider Main Menu Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Screen Example main auto configuration Device Name Node A 9128 II 8 18 2000 23 32 AUTO CONFIGURATION Frame Relay Discovery Mode 1MPort Automatic Circuit Removal Enable Automatic Backup Configuration Single Site Backup Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save This feature also maintains associated DLCI option settings when Standard LMI is used on
239. client process returns a Connection refused message at the bottom of the screen m f two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit over the COM port or modem port not via Telnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed In addition the type of connection Telnet Connection Direct COM Port Connection or Direct Modem Port Connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID p gt Procedure To end the session 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Enter For a terminal connected to the COM port the session is ended Foraterminal connected to the modem port the session is ended and the modem is disconnected Fora Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from the Configuration branch see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Configuration Procedures 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 2 3 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Main Menu Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu which has six menus or branches The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when security has been set up main Access Level 1 9128 II Device Name Node A 05 26 2000 23 32 Slot 1 Type TI FR NAM MAIN MENU Status Test Configurat
240. collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency 11 6 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 About Trend Reports 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLCls on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a line graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings Printed Reports All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units 9128 A2 GB20 80 Exception Reports Provide summary and detail information that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends These reports identify those DLCls that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points It is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCls having the most problems can be attended to first DLCls contained on this report need immediate attention If a DLCI sudden
241. cquire ARP information for incomplete entries is 5 seconds and is not configurable The internal ARP timeout timer has one minute precision so the ARP timeout is implemented by rounding up to the nearest minute time The ARP timeout value in seconds Valid range is 1 4294967 seconds The default is 14400 clear arp cache Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode Standard Deletes all dynamic ARP table entries from the ARP cache September 2002 C 11 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations NAT Commands Network Address Translation NAT commands are used to enable or disable NAT on an interface or sub interface and specify whether IP addresses on the interface are public or private Table C 8 NAT Commands 1 of 3 no ip nat inside outside Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if config subif Allows you to specify if Network Address Translation NAT is performed on an interface or sub interface and whether IP addresses on the interface are private or public addresses NAT is disabled by default Example ip nat inside inside Specifies inside private IP addresses on this interface outside Specifies outside public IP addresses on this interface ip nat translation timeout time no ip nat translation timeout time Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to specify the amount of time that
242. d Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Keyboard Keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the router s CLI Most terminal emulation programs use these same keys Press To Enter Return Accept the current command line input Ctrl c m Clear the current command line entry m Abort a command line prompt without answering m Exit a command in progress Ctrl z Exit Configuration mode and returns to Standard mode A prompt appears to save any unsaved changes Backspace Erase the character to the left of the cursor Delete Erase the character the cursor is on Down Arrow Recall command line history buffer with the most recent command displaying first Buffer contains ten lines of history Up Arrow Scroll to the last valid command for editing Right Arrow Move the cursor one position to the right Left Arrow Move the cursor one position to the left q Abort a Move display and return to the command line prompt or any key but Spacebar or Enter Return 2 10 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Configuration Procedures This chapter includes the following m Basic Configuration Configuration Option Areas Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options Basic Configuration 9128 A2 GB20 80 Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates Use the FrameSaver unit s Con
243. d Maintenance Placing a Test Call Nondisruptive Use this procedure to test the ISDN path to each remote site This procedure will not put the system into backup p gt Procedure 1 Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles and DLCls are set up correctly for the DBMs at each end see Modifying ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Main Menu Configuration ISDN Link Profiles Main Menu Configuration ISDN DLCI Records 2 Place a Test Call from one of the devices Main Menu Test ISDN Call PVC Tests Select the link to be tested Start a Test Call The Status should be Active If the Result is Then Frame Relay Link Up The call was successful Frame Relay Link Down The call was not successful Verify the configuration and Link Status in the ISDN Link Profile Select Stop to end the Test Call Use this procedure to test the ISDN path to each remote site This procedure will not put the unit into backup 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 73 7 Operation and Maintenance Verifying ISDN Lines Use either of the following methods to verify operation of the ISDN lines m Check the status of the DBM interface Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status Line Status should display Active If an invalid Inv status appears e g Inv SPID for an ISDN BRI DBM in the Line Status field verify that you entered ISDN physical options correctly m Check the status of the
244. d modular jack The following tables show pin assignments for the ISDN PRI and BRI DBMs and the purpose of each FrameSaver SLV 9128 II ISDN PRI pin assignments Function Circuit Direction Pin Number PRI Receive Ring DBM1 From Local Loop 1 PRI Receive Tip DBM2 From Local Loop 2 PRI Transmit Ring DBM4 To Local Loop 4 PRI Transmit Tip DBM5 To Local Loop 5 FrameSaver SLV 9126 ISDN BRI U pin assignments Function Circuit Direction Pin Number BRI Transmit Receive Ring DBM4 To From 4 Local Loop BRI Transmit Receive Tip DBM5 To From 5 Local Loop ISDN Modular Cable The ISDN cable comes with the FrameSaver unit ordered with the DBM feature 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 E 17 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E 18 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Technical Specifications The following technical specifications are included NAM Technical Specifications Table F 1 m 1 Slot CSU DSUs and Router Technical Specifications Table F 2 m 14 Slot 9000 Series Access Carrier Technical Specifications Table F 3 ISDN BRI DBM Optional Feature Technical Specifications Table F 4 m ISDN PRI DBM Optional Feature Technical Specifications Table F 5 Table F 1 NAM Technical Specifications 1 of 3 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 Industry Canada Safety Class A digital device Refer to the equipment s label for th
245. d octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate m The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set m The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNSs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator 9128 A2 GB20 80 Only appears for the network interface September 2002 7 57 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 58 Table 7 18 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Total Rx Frames Rx Octets m Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR With DE Set With BECN Set With FECN Set Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes received for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link m The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate m The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate m The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate m The number of frames and octets received on the selec
246. d to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only Level 3 access will be permitted for the modem port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is determined by the user s access level Otherwise the access level is 1 CAUTION Before changing the modem port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that either Telnet Session Access Level or the communications port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and at least one Login ID are set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is 2 for User ID access levels of 1 or 2 User IDs set to access Level 3 have only Level 3 access Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can only display and monitor status and configuration screens If Login Requir
247. dard Shows the status of the named interface sub interface or all interfaces and sub interfaces on the device intf type The interface type The following two types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Serial interface intf num The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces 0 sub intf num The sub interface numbers are only supported on the Network interface Serial 0 Sub interface numbers supported 0 4 294 967 295 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 13 Show Commands 3 of 4 show ip dhcp binding p address Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Allows users to display address bindings associated with the DHCP server If the IP address is not specified all DHCP server bindings are displayed If an IP address is specified only the DHCP server binding for the specified client is displayed ip address Specifies the DHCP client s IP address for the binding to be displayed The general format of the show ip dhcp bindings command is as follows IP Address MAC address Lease Expires X X X X XX XX XX XX XX XX ddd hh mm The first column displays the IP addresses in use The second column displays the MAC address bound to each IP address The third column displays the remaining lease time in days hours and minutes or Infinite show ip nat translati
248. dat or Imitrace syc cannot be put into a FrameSaver node m LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit s currently active configuration September 2002 7 75 7 Operation and Maintenance gt Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a UNIX host type ftp followed by the FrameSaver unit s IP address 7 76 If a login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter 6 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd
249. de Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals To order a paper copy of this manual m Within the U S A call 1 800 PARADYNE 1 800 727 2396 m Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 8623 September 2002 xiii About This Guide Conventions Used xiv Convention Used When Used Italic To indicate variable information for example DLCI nnnn where nnnn denotes a 4 digit number Menu sequence To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step For example Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status indicates that you should select Status from the Main Menu then select System and Test Status Path To provide a check point that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm Brackets To indicate multiple selection choices when more than one selection is available e g Performance Statistics Status Network Port 1 Text highlighted in blue To indicate a hyperlink to additional information when viewing this manual online Click on the highlighted text September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 About the FrameSaver SLV This chapter includes the
250. defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 63 4 Configuration Options Manually Configuring DLCI Records 4 64 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their PVC Connections DLCI Records can also be created manually see Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Network Data Port ISDN Virtual Router Ports
251. dentity NOTE If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit s Identity screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying System Information on page 7 3 to see what is included on the unit s Identity screen September 2002 7 79 7 Operation and Maintenance Transferring Collected Data SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Transfer Rate Kbps option see Table 4 20 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options NOTE Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet data the data files are not in user readable format LMI packet capture data can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log see Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for additional information B gt Procedure To retrieve data 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data will be retrieved 2 Type bin to enter binary transfer mode 3 Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment 4 Type cd data to change to the data directory If
252. dialog box opens 3 In the Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the unit in the text box Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts e g enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per second or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second 4 Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the units are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports 11 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Grouping Elements for Reports 9128 A2 GB20 80 Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLClIs should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all SLV elements Once grouped you can then run reports on all DLCls in the network as well as reports on individual DLCls B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups
253. dialog box opens Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z 0 through 9 dashes periods and underscores can be used No spaces can be included and the word All cannot be used Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list Highlight all the DLCls listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCls move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCls have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That chapter also tells you how to customize reports September 2002 11 5 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Generating Reports for a Group Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCls and the DLCls have been grouped you can start generating reports When selecting a report Section select WAN from the drop down list See Running Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table gener
254. ding database entries show configuration Displays the router s current configuration show configuration saved unsaved Shows the current configuration either saved in memory or entered during the current session show frame relay map Shows the status of all frame relay DLCls on the router s frame relay interface show interface intf type intf num sub intf num Shows the status of the specified interface sub interface or all interfaces and sub interfaces for the router show ip dhcp binding ip address Shows the address bindings associated with the DHCP server m lf an IP address is specified only bindings for that client will be displayed m f no IP address is specified all DHCP server bindings are displayed show ip nat translations Displays all the address bindings associated with the DHCP server show ip route p address Shows the Routing Table entry for the device with the specified IP address or all Routing Table entries if no IP address is specified show ip traffic Shows IP statistics for the router show spanning tree Displays the router s spanning tree topology September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Access Control and System Level Command Summary 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table D 2 Access Control and System Level Commands lists of all of the access control and system level commands
255. directory Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp command Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a list of all Known commands is printed Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is specified the current one is used put file file2 Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the current directory of the FrameSaver node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file on the FrameSaver node recv file file 2 Same as a get send file file 2 Same as a put pwd Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you must transfer the upgrade of the nam ocd file in the system memory directory using the put command NOTE Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC or through the COM po
256. distributing to other FrameSavers 4 72 Ethernet port 4 94 NMS number 4 87 4 89 Node 4 74 IP address validation 4 76 IP addressing limiting SNMP access 6 11 IP Enabled DLCI performance statistics 7 59 DLCI Type 4 65 SLV performance statistics 7 54 IP SLV availability traps 4 93 ISDN Active 7 21 backup 1 8 BRI DBM 1 8 troubleshooting problems 8 17 controlling access 6 5 DBM connector E 17 DBM operation 7 72 Link Profile Invalid 7 22 8 8 Network Failed 7 22 8 8 physical options 4 45 PRI DBM 1 8 setting up link profiles 4 49 updating software 7 78 verifying line 7 74 K keyboard keys 2 6 keys CLI navigation 2 10 keyboard 2 6 screen function 2 5 2 7 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index L Lamp Test 7 27 8 40 LAN adapter and cable E 10 land bug prevention 5 15 last reset 7 19 latency 1 10 round trip setting threshold 4 30 traps 4 93 LEDs 8 2 8 14 9126 faceplate and screen 7 5 9128 faceplate and screen 7 7 and control leads displaying 7 4 descriptions 7 8 limiting async terminal access 6 2 dial in access 6 4 FTP access 6 7 SNMP access 6 9 through IP addresses 6 11 Telnet access 6 6 Line Build Out LBO 4 35 4 47 Coding Format 4 34 4 43 Equalization 4 44 Framing Format 4 34 4 43 4 46 Loopback 8 27 Status 7 39 Line Loopback 8 31 8 33 Link Destination 4 69 4 70 frame relay statistics 7 60 maximum ISDN rate 4 50 Name 4 49 Operating Mode 7 40 Profile
257. ds C 1 keyboard keys 2 10 limiting access 6 14 uploading downloading router configuration 5 16 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index Clock Invert Transmit 4 39 setting system 4 5 Source 4 31 4 32 Transmit 4 39 ClrAllCodePoints 4 25 CNIS 6 5 Code Points 4 27 codes Ethernet type C 29 COM port 4 75 4 89 connector E 4 to PC or terminal printer cable E 5 to router cables E 7 Command Line Interface CLI commands C 1 commands ARP C 11 bridge C 9 CLI C 1 CLI access control C 3 CLI configuration C 4 DHCP relay agent C 18 server C 15 diagnostic C 23 filter access list C 19 interface C 5 IP routing C 8 NAT C 12 pager C 3 show C 25 Committed Burst Size Bc Bits 4 65 Committed Information Rate CIR 4 65 Communication Port user interface options 4 96 Community Name 4 83 assigning 6 10 ConcordsNetworkHealth compatibility 11 1 ConcordsNetworkHealth 1 1 Configuration Auto Active 7 20 CLI access and 1 3 CLI commands C 4 displaying and changing options 3 4 FTP transfer rate 1 7 menu 3 2 menu branch 2 4 NAPT example 5 8 NAT example 5 6 of router using terminal emulation 5 16 9128 A2 GB20 80 Configuration continued option areas 3 3 option tables 4 20 saving options 3 6 Scratchpad area 3 3 configuring added SLV units elements 11 4 Code Point definitions 4 27 DBM 4 45 interface to send traps 4 18 DLCI records manually 4 64 frame relay options 4 61 modem port 4 10
258. ds entered while in interface or sub interface configuration mode are applied to the specified interface or sub interface No sub interfaces are enabled by default Example interface serial 132 53 4 2 132 53 4 250 Use the no interface command to delete sub interfaces while in config mode The command does not delete interfaces When a sub interface that is currently in use is deleted all sub interface uses are automatically removed from the system configuration This includes all route entries destined for the sub interface ip addresses and subnets for the sub interface and all frame relay DLCls bridge group assignments and ip nat inside outside assignments configured on the sub interface intf type Serial interface is supported the frame relay serial interface intf num Interface index number for the Serial interface Valid range is from 0 up to the maximum number of serial interfaces minus one sub intf num Sub interfaces are only supported on the network interface Serial 0 Valid range for the sub interface is O 4 294 967 295 point to point Specifies a point to point sub interface By default all sub interfaces are point to point September 2002 C 5 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 6 Table C 4 Interface Commands 2 of 3 ip address ip addr subnet mask no ip address p addr subnet mask Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Ethernet con
259. e Solutions Cannot access the unit or the menu driven user interface Login or password is incorrect COM port is misconfigured or the unit is otherwise configured so it prevents access m Reset the unit see Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit on page 8 4 m Contact your service representative Failure xxxxxxxx appears at the top of the System and Test Status screen at Self Test Results The unit detects an internal software failure m Record the 8 digit code from the System and Test Status screen m Reset the unit and try again m Contact your service representative and provide the 8 digit failure code An LED appears dysfunctional LED is burned out Run the Lamp Test If the LED in question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative Not receiving data Network cable loose or broken m Reconnect or repair the cable m Call the network service provider Receiving data errors on a multiplexed DLCI but frame relay is okay Frame Relay Discovery is being used for automatic DLCI and PVC configuration The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant Change the DLCI Type for each network DLCI from Multiplexed to Standard turning off multiplexing September 2002 8 15 8 Troubleshooting Frame Relay PVC Problems Table 8 3 Frame Relay PVC Problems S
260. e Specifies the interface to be used to reach the destination m COM Communications port m PVCname Name of the management PVC e g PVCMgmt1001 m Internal The interface to be used for software loopbacks or internal device functions in order to reach the destination TTL The Time to Live that was set for the route in seconds 1 999 If 999 appears the route is a permanent one September 2002 7 49 7 Operation and Maintenance Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Physical and link layer statistics Layers 1 and 2 are collected on the port The following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected Performance Statistics Menu main status performance 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line DBM Call Ethernet Clear All Statistics Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit DBM Call Statistics only appear when the FrameSaver unit has the ISDN DBM feature and Ethernet only appears for the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II or 9128 Il 7 50 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Clearing Performance Statistics
261. e Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Yellow Alarm Signal When an ISDN BRI DBM is installed if the OK LED comes on then goes off during power recycling the ISDN BRI DBM may have failed 2 On the Display LEDs amp Control Leads screen for the Model 9128 II only FR Mode is On or Off When On highlighted the FrameSaver unit is in Frame Relay mode 7 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 1 General Status LEDs 2 of 2 Label Indiction Color What It Means ALM Operational Red ON FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an P Alarm Fail error or fault has been detected cont d Alarms appear on the System and Test Status screen See Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages for additional information OFF No failures have been detected TST Test Mode Yellow ON Loopback or test pattern is in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network OFF No tests are active BKP Backup Yellow ON FrameSaver unit is in Backup mode that is the backup link has been established and backup is in progress through the specified Alternate Destination Link OFF FrameSaver unit is not in Backup mode Blinking ON and OFF Alternate Destination Link is being established but no data has been passed FR Frame Relay Multi Yellow LMI is down on the FrameSaver Mode Mode colored SLV 9128 Il Model Green LMI is up on the FrameSaver
262. e 1 10 for more information about the additional SLM capability If the unit does not have the SLM feature set full SLM capability can be activated at any time by ordering a Feature Activation Certificate The OpenLane SLM system Release 5 3 or above is required to schedule activation of advanced SLM features in units and to manage activations September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 1 About the FrameSaver SLV To obtain a Feature Activation Certificate provide the model to be upgraded your OpenLane system license key number and the number of FrameSaver units to be upgraded to SLM capability You can order the certificate for a single unit or for many units Your Feature Activation Certificate will include an Activation Certificate Number the Feature Group Number for the additional SLM features your OpenLane license key number and the number of device activations ordered When the Feature Activation Certificate arrives add the Activation Certificate Number to your OpenLane SLM application s database Activations can occur at any time for as many units as desired until no activations remain for the certificate When ready to activate units simply select the units to be activated and schedule the activations The activations occur when scheduled and OpenLane updates the certificate information The OpenLane system also provides a Certificate Summary Report to assist you in the management of the certificate FrameSaver Diagnostic Feature Se
263. e CLI login session at a time and is configured at the factory without a default login ID and password To provide login security to the system configure a login ID and password When a local console connection is first established a login prompt appears If the Device Name field has been configured via the Control menu Control Menu System Information the login prompt displays the device name For example a device name of Largo is shown as Largo gt See Creating a Login on page 6 12 for security information for each Login ID Access Levels Command Modes There is one login ID and several levels of privileges for the router s CLI Your user account can be configured with one user name and different passwords for m Operator The Operator has read only access to display device information with no modification permission and limited access to diagnostic functions With a device name of Largo the prompt appears as Largo gt m Administrator The Administrator has several levels of access to the router s CLI The sign in the following prompts indicates Administrator access level Display Prompt with Device Name of Largo Administrator Access Levels Largo gt Standard same as Operator Largo config Configuration Largo config if Configuration Interface Largo config subif Configuration Sub Interface Largo config dhcp Configuration DHCP Pool Refer to Appendix C Router CLI Commands
264. e NMS Select IP Ping Test Procedure 2 on page 8 40 to ping the NMS at the central site To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site FrameSaver unit The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the ping Select IP Ping Test Procedure 2 on page 8 40 to ping SNMP trap managers Ping Screen Example main test ping 9128 II Device Name Node A 06 05 2001 06 02 IP PING Target IP Address 000 000 000 000 Destination Interface Use Internal Route DICI 16 EDLCI 0 Source IP Address i 135 90 25 1 Encapsulation Packet Size Iteration Count Inter ping Delay sec Response Timeout sec Status Transmit Receive Lost Loss Ratio Pings 000000 000000 000000 0000 Current Minimum Maximum Average Roundtrip Delay ms 0000 0000 0000 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 35 8 Troubleshooting 8 36 Table 8 5 Ping Options 1 of 3 Target IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 001 126 000 000 000 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address to which a ping will be sent 000 000 000 001 126 000 000 000 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Specifies the IP address Destination Interface Possible Settings Use Internal Route Port n Net1 FR1 Default Setting Use Internal Route Specifies the rout
265. e NOC Network Operations Center Main Menu Easy Install Easy Install Screen Example main easy install 9128 II Device Name Node A 08 23 2002 11 04 EASY INSTALL Service Type Frame Relay Node IP Address 000 000 000 000 Clear Node Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 Clear TS Access DLCI 980 Create a Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Management Options Screen Time Slot Assignment Screen Network 1 Line Framing Format Network 1 Line Build Out LBO Network 1 Line Coding Format Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save The Ethernet Management Options Screen applies to the 9126 II both CSU DSU and Router and 9128 II For the Model 9126 DSO Base Rate Kbps appears after the Network 1 Line Coding Format option To remotely access the FrameSaver unit in Frame Relay mode use the Dedicated Network Management Link that was created during installation using the Node IP Address that was entered for the unit See the FrameSaver SLV 9126 11 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions the FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions or the FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II Network Access Module NAM Installation Instructions for additional information and installation procedures 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 3 4 Configuration Options Using RIP with FrameSaver SLV CSU DSUs Using the system s standard Routing Information Protocol RIP feature routing info
266. e Registration Number Refer to the equipment s label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipments label for safety information Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Physical Dimensions NAM Height Depth I O Card Height Depth 8 inches 20 32 cm 11 58 inches 29 41 cm 10 15 inches 25 78 cm 2 9 inches 7 37 cm 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 F 1 F Technical Specifications Table F 1 NAM Technical Specifications 2 of 3 Specification Criteria Weight NAM 1 Ib 2 oz 51 kg I O Card 6 oz 17 kg Power Consumption and Dissipation 9 5 watts 0 080A at 120 VAC Result 32 Btu per hour COM Port Interface Communications Management Standard Data rates 8 position unkeyed modular jack EIA 232 ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 Kbps T1 Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit stuffing 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack Up to 1 536 Mbps Fractional T1 service frame relay service RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Se
267. e codes refer to Table C 15 ICMP Designations Valid ICMP message type range is 0 255 src operator Specifies how the source port is evaluated This argument may only be specified if the protocol specified is tcp or udp Valid values are eq Match only packets with a port number equal to the source port number input gt Match only packets with a port number greater than the source port number It Match only packets with a port number less than the source port number input neq Match only packets with a port number not equal to the source port number range Match only packets in the range of port numbers specified by src port and src end port If range is specified enter both a src port and a src end port Continued on next page September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 11 Filter Commands 3 of 4 For Extended IP Access Lists continued src port Specify a TCP or UDP port number to be filtered Valid if the protocol specified is tcp or udp Refer to Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid port number range is 0 65535 src end port Specifies last TCP or UDP port number in a range of port numbers to be filtered Valid if the protocol specified is tcp or udp and if src operator value is range Refer to Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid port number range is 0 65535
268. e interface s menu to display or change the Frame Relay options for an individual interface see Table 4 13 Interface Frame Relay Options Main Menu Configuration Network Data Ports Frame Relay See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface on page 4 61 for additional information Table 4 13 Interface Frame Relay Options 1 of 3 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize_From_Net1FR1 Initialize From Interface Auto On LMI Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting For a user data port link Initialize From Interface For a network link Auto On LMI Fail Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize From Net1FR1 The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame relay link Net1FR1 LMI Protocol is set to None internally but once a protocol has become active or is set on the primary Network link the protocol will be set to the same value on this link Standard Annex A or Annex D The protocol will not be updated based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially Display Conditions This option value only appears for a user data port Initialize From Interface The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE device Once a
269. e the ISDN link profile specified Link Name is disabled Main Menu 5 Configuration 5 ISDN 5 Link Profiles ISDN Link Profile Invalid ISDN Link Name No phone numbers have been specified in the ISDN link profile specified by ISDN Link Name ISDN Network Failed Active Idle An ISDN network failure was detected when m Active Backup call was in progress m Idle DBM was in Idle mode LatExceed P Address COSx DLCInnnn An IP SLV Latency Threshold has been exceeded for the specified COS of the path P Address is the IP address of the path endpoint COSx is the Class of Service ID associated with the path and nnmn is the DLCI which contains the path Link Down Administratively frame relay link The specified frame relay link has been disabled by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made because the specified link profile was disabled LLB Active Interface A network Line Loopback LLB is active on the specified interface LMI Discovery in Progress frame relay link Local Management Interface protocol discovery is in progress to determine which protocol will be used on the specified frame relay link LMI Down frame relay link The Local Management Interface s has been declared down for the specified frame relay link m For an individual ISDN
270. e the latest ping Minimum Roundtrip mO m No measurement exists Delay m 1 9999 m The least time in milliseconds that it took to complete a ping during this test Maximum Roundtrip mO m No measurement exists Delay m 1 9999 m The most time in milliseconds that it took to complete a ping during this test Average Roundtrip mO m No measurement exists Delay m 1 9999 m The average time in milliseconds that it took to complete a ping during this test September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test Procedure 1 gt Procedure To ping any far end FrameSaver unit 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu Test 5 IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address of the device the ping is being sent to then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized or the far end unit has just initialized it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP 3 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive should appear as the Status If any other message is displayed additional testing is required 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 39 8 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test Procedure 2 p gt Procedure To ping the NMS at the central site 1 Lamp Test Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate w
271. eceive or send rate of file transfer to the system via management PVCs This option allows new software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Using this option new software and configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based upon TGP flow control the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting 1 1536 Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum management speed September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring SNMP NMS Security Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to display add or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver unit to set up trap managers see Table 4 21 SNMP NMS Security Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication SNMP NMS Security A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP Table 4 21 SNMP NMS Security Options 1 of 2 NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when the sending manager s IP
272. eceive Data 3 From DTE 3 DTE Receive Data RXD RXD DCE Request to 4 To DTE 4 DTE Request to Send RTS Send RTS DCE Signal Ground 7 7 DTE Signal Ground SG SG DCE Carrier Detect 8 To DTE 8 DTE Carrier Detect CD CD DCE Data Terminal 20 To DTE 20 DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR Ready DTR September 2002 E 7 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments 3COM Router DB9 Socket Ready DTR COM Port Console Port Signal DB25 Pin Direction DB9 Pin Signal DCE Transmit Data 2 To DTE 3 DTE Transmit Data TXD TXD DCE Receive Data 3 From DTE 2 DTE Receive Data RXD RXD DCE Request to 4 To DTE 7 DTE Request to Send RTS Send RTS DCE Signal Ground 7 5 DTE Signal Ground SG SG DCE Carrier Detect 8 To DTE 1 DTE Carrier Detect CD CD DCE Data Terminal 20 To DTE 4 DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR The following tables provide the pin assignments for connecting the FrameSaver SLV 9128 II NAM s 8 position communication port to various router auxiliary AUX or console ports using standard cables Cisco 2500 Series Router RJ45 Jack Send RTS COM Port AUX Port Signal RJ45 Pin Direction RJ45 Pin Signal DCE Receive Data 2 From DTE 6 DTE Receive Data RXD RXD DCE Signal Ground 3 4 5 DTE Signal Ground SG SG DCE Transmit Data 4 To DTE 3 DTE Transm
273. eceived the DCLB is stopped Disable DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences are ignored V 54_ amp ANSI DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either V 54 or ANSI T1 403 Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initiation and termination of a DCLB for the network frame relay link The actuate and release sequences do not need to match for example a DCLB started with a V 54 actuate sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the network over the ESF facility data link every second Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 6 Network Physical Interface Options 4 of 4 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Display Conditions This option only appears
274. ect you options September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features Checking the Status of Scheduled Activations You can check the status of scheduled activations or cancel activations at any time prior to the activations taking place by selecting View Abort scheduled task status from the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu You can select all tasks or select tasks by model device name or IP address When you click on the prompt below the Select tasks table the table in the lower frame lists all the devices in the selected category scheduled for activation See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information Canceling Scheduled Activations To cancel scheduled activations select View Abort scheduled task status from the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu select the desired tasks and click on the prompt to display the FrameSaver devices scheduled for activation Click on the box in the Abort column to select the FrameSaver devices that will not be activated then click on the prompt under Abort verifications activations to verify your selections and Apply Activations for the selected devices will be cancelled See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information Accessing and Printing the Certificate Summary Report The Certificate Summary Report provides information about the Activation Certificate and the activated devices Select Gen
275. ed and you are returned to the Main Menu September 2002 C 3 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Configuration Commands Configuration control commands put the router in configuration mode and allows you to save configuration changes To show a configuration see Table C 13 Show Commands Table C 3 Configuration Commands configure terminal factory Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Causes the router to enter configuration mode The router stays in configuration mode until the exit command is entered or the session times out Example configure terminal NOTES When in configuration mode SNMP set commands or changes saved from the menu driven user interface for router configuration are prevented an in use message is generated Router sub interfaces and or DLCls cannot be added or deleted via the menu driven user interface s CreatePVC function key The number of configuration commands that can be entered without performing a save is limited a warning message is generated The only show command available is show configuration terminal Enter configuration mode and a copy of the currently running configuration is loaded into the edit buffer Any changes made in the buffer overwrite the copied current configuration when the save command is entered the configuration is saved to the currently running configuration terminal and an automatic reset
276. ed is set to Enable the effective access level is 3 for all user IDs Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects the user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect the user session 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 101 4 Configuration Options 4 102 Table 4 25 Modem Port Options 3 of 4 Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Determines the amount of lapsed time before disconnecting a user session in minutes Display Conditions This option only appears when m Port Use is set to Terminal m Inactivity Timeout is set to Enable 1 60 Sets the number of minutes allowed before the modem disconnects IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the system via the modem port This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the modem port which you can view
277. ee Table 4 15 PVC Connection Options Main Menu Configuration PVC Connections From this screen you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens Quick removal of unused DLCls and ISDN Link Profiles except for HQ_Site if the model has an ISDN DBM installed included in an existing PVC Connection is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt Table 4 15 PVC Connection Options 1 of 4 Source Link Possible Settings Port n ISDN Link Name Net1 FR1 Rtr SO Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCls defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the source link This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link Port n For CSU DSUs specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the connection Rtr S
278. eive data OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is disabled or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted 1 The FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only has one OK LED even though it has two user data ports If either port is enabled and active the LED is on If both ports are enabled and one of the ports is inactive the LED is off Table 7 4 Ethernet Port LED Routers Only Label Indication Color What It Means OK Operational Green ON The Ethernet port is transmitting and Status receiving OFF The port is idle September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Control Lead Descriptions See Table 7 2 Network DSX or PRI Interface LEDs for descriptions of these leads See Table 7 3 User Data Port LED CSU DSUs Only to interpret the user data port OK control lead The LED descriptions and control lead descriptions are the same In addition to these LEDs additional control leads can be monitored through the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen These indicators show the current state of each control lead and what they indicate when they are highlighted that is in the On state They are described in Table 7 5 Additional Control Leads Table 7 5 Additional Control Leads Label Indication What It Means Network Interface LMI OK LMI Operational Status LMI is operating successfully on the first frame relay link on the ne
279. ent and Communication Options Configuring Node IP Information a Configuring Management PVCs 0 Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Security 2245 Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring Ethernet Management Configuring the Communication Port 2 Configuring the Modem Port anaana aana Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router 9128 A2 GB20 80 FrameSaver SLV Router Overview 200000e ee IP ROUINO an Be bee eee a oa ee PAPAL tg O Address Resolution Protocol cece eens PrOXV ARP its hice haath aud e ta is iene An os sate aap Aa Interface Configuration 2 0 0 ee Network Address Translation a IP Options Processing cece ee eee Applications Supported by NAT 02a ee eee NAT Configuration Example 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee Network Address Port Translation 0 000000 000 eau NAPT Configuration Example 0000 e eee eee eee NAT and NAPT Configuration Example Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server DHCP Server with NAT Configuration Example DHCP Server at Remote Site Configuration Example DHC
280. enu Configuration 5 ISDN 5 Physical m The ISDN line is disconnected or an ISDN network alarm condition exists m The switch has rejected one of the configured SPIDs ISDN BRI DBM only m The phone number configured for a B channel is an invalid local number m The incoming call was rejected because the Caller ID or local phone number received from the switch did not match any configured Link Profiles If provided by the switch the rejected Caller ID is displayed after the status Otherwise Invalid Call IDis displayed m The incoming call was rejected because no Caller ID was received from the switch COM port s Port Use option is set to Caller ID m No local phone number was received from the far end device during the call validation process COM port s Port Use option is set to Proprietary m The incoming call was rejected because the enabled ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming Caller1 ID or local phone number was busy The ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming call is displayed Only appears for a constituent frame relay link 2 If Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle the Remote Call ID ISDN Channel and Negotiated Rate fields will not appear September 2002 Appears for frame relay links with only one constituent and for all constituent frame relay links 7 39 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 13 DBM Interface Status 2 of 3 Field Status What It Indic
281. eport Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCl s poor Health Index rating 11 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report Performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls This is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver SLV s unique monitoring capabilities using the unit s SLV enhanced network statistics Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Report WAN Element Largo RedBank dici 10 895 Bytes in bytes sec IK aK aw HK 1 Latency Maximum Average msec w es 40 20 o o ae se eo Pa a F s Pa g P 3 F Pa Pa Mg 4t 3 P es Pod Tine Time Naw Amer Bytes Out bytes sec Burst Out Distribution bytes sec 10 16x 10x iaeo 120 100 OK aK aK bana o Peng kero a a aaa p a a aaa a aaa a Frames In frames sec Frames Out frames sec 20 E Burst
282. eporting m Web based diagnostic tests end to end PVC loopbacks connectivity and physical interface tests m Basic device configuration including RMON alarm and threshold configuration when the unit has the advanced SLM feature set activated m Automatic device and PVC discovery for SLM devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled m Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network m Remote SLM feature activation for units with the diagnostic feature set Multiple maintenance schedules for scheduling more than one maintenance period with a report for each scheduled task Multiple Circuit IDs for multiple access levels so customers as well as network service providers have access to network management information m Device reset capability m HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web interface Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Instructions for installing the OpenLane SLM system are found in the Product Related Documents In addition to installation instructions the Administrator s Guide contains instructions for Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services Accessing the OpenLane application Adding a FrameSaver device Adding a Customer ID OpenLane SLM also has an extensive online Help system September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features Setting Up FrameSaver Support With
283. er Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Configuration Manager File Password w Agent v AgentGroup v Switch FrameRelay 4 Domain YR Balay y Pr IP Address Properties File fw42prop 4 Shared y Custom 135 67 5 135 90 153 3 Samples Interval Logging 135 90 153 4 itsa Domain Groups SH LH SH LH Stat Host Conv hart yn Threshold DLCI Name DTE DCE Grenada58 Rising Falling DLCI 300 1536K 1536K iA Edit DLCI 301 1536K 1536K LI areas DLCI 303 1536K 1536K DLCI 304 1536K 1536K DLCI 305 1536K 1536K DLCI 306 1536K 1536K DLCI 307 1536K 1536K DLCI 308 1536K 1536K ivi DLCI 302 1536K 1536K Download Verify that only FrameSaver SLV supported domains appear listed in the Domain column FrameSaver SLV supported domains include ATALK IPX RMON DECNET NETB SNA IP NET VINES IPV6 OSI NEWVINES Verify that S statistics collection appears for each domain listed in the Group column H hosts appears for the IP domain only Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns Dashes appear under all Logging columns Stat Host Conv If all these requirements are met no further action is required Close the Configuration Ma
284. er of Trap Managers configuration option AutoRoute Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager or the Default IP Destination when no route is available in the routing table see Table 4 17 Node IP Options Modem Uses the Modem port This selection only appears if the Modem Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link see Table 4 25 Modem Port Options COM Uses the COM port This selection is only available when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 24 Communication Port Options Ethernet For the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II or 9128 II uses the Ethernet port Only appears when the Ethernet port s Interface Status option is enabled see Table 4 23 Ethernet Management Options PVCname Uses the defined management linkname the name given the Management PVC This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s An authenticationFailure trap indicates that the unit is the addressee of an SNMP protocol message or an incoming ISDN call is not properly authenticated Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFai
285. erate certificate summary report from the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu The report lists all Activation Certificates in your OpenLane SLM system and all the FrameSaver devices activated using each certificate m Activation Certificate information includes the model feature the number of activations ordered the number of activations still covered by the certificate and the date the certificate was ordered m Device activation information includes the device s name IP address its location model serial number and the date the device was activated We recommend that you print and save this report However before printing change the orientation of the report to Landscape so no information is truncated See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 9 9 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features 9 10 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following Preparation on page 10 2 Configuring NetScout Manager Plus on page 10 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network Verifying Domains and Groups Correcting Domains and Groups Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Editing Alarms Adding SLV Alarms Manually Creating History Files Installing the User Def
286. ere configured Bridge filtering does not apply when the router is in router only mode When bridging is enabled separate ethertype filters are applied to the Ethernet and frame relay interfaces They are applied to traffic in either the transmit or receive direction on that interface with one filter access list per interface per direction There is a maximum of 16 rules per list Each rule in the access list allows the user to filter a single ethertype or range of ethertypes MAC frames can be filtered based on the m SNAP Ethernet field in the 802 2 and 802 3 header Protocol type field in the DIX Ethernet header For ethertype filters the rules are applied in the order in which they were configured September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router IP Filtering When NAT is enabled and the IP filters are active filtering is done on the Ethernet port upstream first then downstream m Upstream From the client to the server m Downstream From the server to the client Land Bug Prevention The router drops all packets received on a network PVC interface or the Ethernet interface when the Source IP address is the same as the Destination IP address Smurf Attack Prevention The router ignores requests to send an ICMP echo reply to the broadcast address and ICMP echo requests with a destination of the broadcast address Provisioning the Router Interface The FrameSaver SLV Router defaults to bridge
287. erface and apply it at the sub interface level bridge group Valid bridge group number 1 is applied to all interfaces by default Any sub interfaces created on interfaces where the bridge group is applied inherit the bridge group no bridge group bridge group finput type list in access list 200num output type list out access list 200num Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Allows a user to specify or remove an input or output Ethernet type code filter for an interface No bridge group filters are applied to interfaces by default Example bridge group 1 input type list 8069 NOTE The order in which access list filters are entered affects the order in which the filters are applied Each filter is applied in succession until all filters have been applied If no conditions match a frame is discarded bridge group Valid bridge group number 1 is applied to all interfaces by default Any sub interfaces created on interfaces where the bridge group is applied inherit the bridge group input type list Specify the filter applied to incoming Ethernet packets by type code Refer to Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex in access list 200num The input type access list valid range for protocol type code access lists 200 299 output type list Specify the filter applied to outgoing Ethernet packets by type code Refer to Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex Ethernet Type Codes Hex out access
288. erface specific file to a new file that contains the user history table number 3 Open the new file using a text editor The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs Object IDs The frame relay interface number 101015001 must replace IFN and the DLCI number to be monitored must replace DLCI Example frCircuitSentFrames Change 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 IFN DLCI to 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 101015001 301 The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver SLV 9126 9126 II 9126 II Router or 9128 I is 101015001 4 Edit the new file as needed Refer to Creating UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for OID information for an interface 10 14 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Installing the User Defined History Files Once the user defined history files have been created the files need to be installed History files are installed from the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus Should the FrameSaver unit be reset these files will need to be reinstalled The command used to install a new user history table is located in NSHOME bin CAUTION Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2 UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports Editing either of these files will destr
289. ersion hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh B 6 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information 2 of 2 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex RMON Logical Layer RMON Frame These values are IN RMON IN 17 48 Relay Logical calculated ifName of the interface Interfaces a For ihe OTE OUT RMON OUT iflndex 1 2 17 ifName of the interface m For the DCE DTE calculated value 1 RMON Virtual These values are ALL VIRTUAL PVC interface 65 512 Interfaces calculated based on number DLCI number ALL the probe s internal circuit index circuit index 65 RMON Virtual These values are IN VIRTUAL PVC interface 513 1023 Logical calculated number DLCI number DTE Interfaces m For the DTE OUT VIRTUAL PVC interface virtual interface number DLCI number DCE iflndex 65 2 513 m For the DCE DTE calculated value 1 September 2002 B 7 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps This section describes the FrameSaver unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the mean
290. etup m callActivePeerld RFC 2128 m callActivePeerlfIndex RFC 2128 m callActiveLogicallflndex RFC 2128 m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m callActivePeerAddress RFC 2128 m callActiveSubAddress RFC 2128 m callActivelnfoType RFC 2128 m callActiveCallOrigin RFC 2128 A peer to peer call has been sent or received String Call sequence on SifString using B Chnl channel initiated remotely locally The B channel in this example is only provided if it is known 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 17 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 9 dialControl Traps 2 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause Dial Control Extension MIB dialCtlPeerCall m callHistoryPeerld A peer to peer call was not Rejected RFC 2128 successful the call was rejected m callHistoryPeerlflndex Hy helar ena RFC 2128 m ISDN Call Profile has been m callHistoryLogicallflndex disebled RFC 2128 m This unit s phone number was in the f ice s ISDN m callHistoryPeerAddress A devices o RFC 2128 e String a rehire race Call on ifString using B Chnl nag ee neta channel rejected by remote RMON Alarm and Event Defaults B 18 The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log
291. event is sent Event Defaults Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type so only the following two events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType eventCommunity 65533 Default SLV Rising Event log and trap 4 0 65534 Default SLV Falling Event log and trap 4 0 The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit shows the alarm and event types the interval used when generating alarms and thresholds m Physical Interface Alarm Defaults m Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults m DLC Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area m DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps on page B 8 for information about how traps work and Traps RMON Specific on page B 16 for traps specific to remote monitoring September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end of the interval Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an
292. eyboard Keys aray c eee eee 2 10 September 2002 Contents 3 Configuration Procedures m Basic Configuration s asseris asea ee 3 1 Configuration Option Areas a se saasaa aaaea eee 3 3 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 3 4 Changing Configuration Options 000s 3 5 Saving Configuration Options a 3 6 4 Configuration Options m Using the Easy Install Feature eee 4 3 m Using RIP with FrameSaver SLV CSU DSUs 4 4 m Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock 4 5 m Setting Up the Modem 0 ee ee 4 6 Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out 4 6 Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature 4 7 m Setting Up Auto Configuration eee 4 8 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode 4 9 Automatically Removing a Circuit aa 4 11 m Setting Up Dial Backup 0 eee 4 12 Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface 4 12 Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration 4 13 Modifying ISDN Link Profiles a 4 16 Restricting Automatic Backup and Configuring Backup Timers 4 17 Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps 4 18 Assigning DLCls to a Backup Group 0 aa 4 18 PVC Backup Over the Network Interface 4 19 Setting Up Back to Back Operation a 4 19 Chang
293. eys to navigate within the screen area Press To Ctrl a Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Esc Return to the previous screen Right Arrow on same screen row or Tab on any screen row Move cursor to the next field Ctrl k Left Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the previous field Backspace Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Select the next valid value for the field Delete Del Delete character that the cursor is on Up Arrow or Ctrl u Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the right if in edit mode Left Arrow or Ctrl b Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode Ctrl l Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Enter Return Accept entry or when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data display valid options on the last row of the screen 2 6 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Function Keys 9128 A2 GB20 80 2 User Interface and Basic Operation All function keys located in the lower part of the screen see the example in Screen Work Areas on page 2 5 operate the same way t
294. f latency and availability statistics Initiator The far end FrameSaver initiates the SLV packet used for statistics collection Responder The far end FrameSaver returns the SLV packet sent by the Initiator Far End Name The system name configured for the far end FrameSaver device obtained using its IP address Unknown appears if the far end device is not a FrameSaver or if no response has been received since the last reset COS Type Mismatches The number of SLV packets received that indicate a mismatch between the Class of Service definitions in the near end and far end devices Far End Type The model type of the far end FrameSaver device obtained using its IP address Unknown appears if the far end device is not a FrameSaver or if no response has been received since the last reset COS Name The names for different Classes of Service defined using the Class of Service Definitions screen See Configuring Class of Service Definitions in Chapter 4 Configuration Options COS ID The ID numbers 1 7 of the Class of Service definitions Last RdTrip Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the DLCI connection Unknown appears if communication with the far end device is not successful Min RadTrip Minimum round trip latency measured over the last 15 samples between the FrameSaver unit and the device at t
295. f SLV Type is Standard the latency applies to a multiplexed DLCI If SLV Type is a Class of Service COS 1 COS 7 the latency applies to the COS on an IP Enabled path 50 10000 Sets the limit for these error events SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 2 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV latency measurements below the error threshold that must be received before the error status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Packet Size bytes Available Settings 64 2048 Default Setting 64 Sets the size of packets in bytes that will be used for SLV communications SLV packets are used to track latency and other SLV related variables When the packet size is changed a new round trip and average latency calculation must be performed so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred 64 2048 Sets the packet size for SLV communications September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring General System Options 9128 A2 GB20 80 Select General from the System menu to configure the general system configuration options see Table 4 5 General System Options Main Menu Configuration System General Table 4 5 General System Options 1 of 3 Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default
296. f up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location System s physical location can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the system person can be up to 255 characters Date Current date in the month day year format mm dd yyyy Time Current time in the hours minutes format hh mm NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter See Chapter 6 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 5 4 Configuration Options Setting Up the Modem The unit has an internal modem for dial in access to the menu driven user interface as well as dial out capability wnen an SNMP trap is generated When the modem will be used to dial out Modem Directory phone numbers need to be set up Otherwise simply configure or change dial in access to the unit The modem port is already configured for connection to an asynchronous terminal and dial in access with Port Use set to Terminal However additional changes may be needed see Table 4 25 Modem Port Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port For dial in access to the menu driven user interface via Telnet make sure Port Use is set to Net Link the IP address and subnet mask are entered if they are different from the node s and that the Link Protocol is correct For dial i
297. faces on page 4 34 Configuring the Network Interface Configuring a User Data Port CSU DSUs Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles m Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections on page 4 51 Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or DSX 1 Time Slots Clearing Assignments m Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface on page 4 61 m Manually Configuring DLCI Records on page 4 64 m Configuring PVC Connections on page 4 68 m Configuring the IP Path Liston page 4 72 m Setting Up Management and Communication Options on page 4 73 Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Security Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring Ethernet Management Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the Modem Port Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup on page 4 104 4 2 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Using the Easy Install Feature The Easy Install feature provides a straight forward installation menu that requires minimal configuration to get the FrameSaver unit up and running quickly and to set up remote configuration and management via Telnet access from th
298. fig subif Serial Assigns an IP address to the Ethernet interface or a Serial port sub interface No IP addresses are assigned to interfaces or sub interfaces by default Example ip address 132 53 4 2 255 255 255 255 Usetheno ip address command to remove an IP address assigned to an interface or sub interface and disable IP processing on the interface The following rules apply m Each sub interface must be assigned to a different subnet m A customer data IP address and subnet mask must be different from any IP address used for management m When an IP address and subnet mask are assigned to an interface or sub interface the device automatically creates a routing table entry with the same destination address and subnet mask saying that IP addresses within that range are directly reachable on the interface This is the interface route m f the maximum number of static routes have already been configured you cannot assign an IP address to the interface or sub interface m When an interface address and subnet mask are deleted any routing entries with a Next Hop Router address that fall within the interface s address range are deleted automatically ip address P address of the interface or sub interface subnet mask Subnet mask to be used when the IP address is being compared during route table lookups The subnet mask cannot be 0 0 0 0 and only contiguous left justified subnet masks are allowed encapsulation encap
299. figuration Edit Display menu to display or change configuration option settings The Configuration Edit Display menu shown below is for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II with the optional ISDN backup feature September 2002 3 1 3 Configuration Procedures Configuration Menu 9128 II 5 26 2000 23 32 main config Device Name Node A CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY System Network DSX 1 Data Ports ISDN Time Slot Assignment PVC Connections Management and Communication Auto Backup Criteria Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Changing an Auto Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information 3 2 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 3 Configuration Procedures Configuration Option Areas 9128 A2 GB20 80 The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default Configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the m FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9126 II Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II Quick Reference or FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 Router Quick Reference m Configuration Option Tables in Chapter 4 Configuration Options If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your applicati
300. for the CLI Table D 2 Access Control and System Level Commands Command Function Displays all valid commands for the current access level Used to enter comments Comments following the are ignored by the CLI configure terminal factory Enters configuration mode so configuration options can be edited disable Exits Administrator access level enable Enters enables the Administrator access level enable password password no enable password password Sets or disables the password level Default is None end Leaves configuration mode to return to standard operating mode exit Leaves the current configuration level or terminates the session It may be necessary to enter the exit command several times when leaving configuration mode help Displays a summary of help options no pager Enables Outputs up to 23 lines reload Resets the router and reloads its configuration save Saves changes to the router s configuration September 2002 D 3 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Command Summary D 4 Table D 3 CLI Commands lists of all of the system level commands for the CLI For the default settings see CLI Command Default Settings on page D 6 Table D 3 CLI Commands 1 of 2 Command access list access list num permit deny source ip src wildcara any host source host ip protocol source ip s
301. g information only about FrameSaver SLV and FLEX devices in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCls NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the FrameSaver unit for the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ct1 z WR See Using RIP with FrameSaver SLV CSU DSUs on page 4 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 18 Management PVC Options 5 of 6 Alternate Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port n SDN Link Name Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC as the alternate link The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLC with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Display Conditions This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is available and does not appear if Payload Managed is enabled Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the frame relay link Port n Specifies the frame relay link on the user data port as the alternate destination link for the connection ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM to be used in the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear
302. gement data with customer data transparently over a single PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit wnen FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit This feature also makes it possible to run nondisruptive PVC tests Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device and network problems including nondisruptive PVC loopbacks and end to end connectivity Tests can be commanded from the unit s menu driven user interface or the OpenLane system These tests include V 54 or FT1 ANSI data channel loopback support so the frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its own switch without having to contact the local service provider for loopback activation LMI Packet Capture Provides a way of uploading data that has been captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis or viewed via the menu driven user interface When viewed from the menu driven user interface the twelve most recent LMI messages are displayed via the LMI Trace Log September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 1 About the FrameSaver SLV Integral Modem Provides an internal 14 4 Kops modem to support dialing in to the unit for out of band management and automatic dialing out of SNMP traps Modem PassThru Provides access to another device s VT 100 compatible user interface over a dial connection When this feature is enabled a logical co
303. gible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 18 Management PVC Options 3 of 6 Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port n Rtr S0 ISDN Link Name Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Display Conditions The Port 1 setting does not appear if the PVC is IP Enabled or Payload Managed is enabled Net1 FR1 Specifies the network interface as the source link for the connection Port n Specifies the frame relay link on the user data port as the destination link for the connection Rtr SO For the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router specifies that the vertual router port be used in the connection ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link on the DBM to be
304. gnal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Possible reasons include m Network cable problem m No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit m T1 facility problem Monitor Pttn Active DLCI nnnn frame relay link ie The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active Interface A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified interface using a selected pattern This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link Network Initiated ISDN BRI Test Active ISDN BRI DBM only An ISDN test has been initiated by the ISDN BRI network and it is currently active OOF at DSX 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Possible reasons include m Incompatible framing format between the DTE and the FrameSaver unit m DSX 1 cabling problem nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface Se
305. gnments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the network interface 2 Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment 3 Repeat Step 2 until all desired time slots are assigned 4 Save the configuration DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning Page 2 The second page of the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen allows you to define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each time slot on the DSX 1 interface You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is being passed within a given DSO and the value of the signaling bits that will be transmitted for that DSO to the other cross connected T1 network interface if a Carrier Group Alarm CGA occurs on a T1 network interface DSX 1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example Page 2 main config tslot_assign dsx 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DSX 1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS Page 2 of 2 SIGNALING AND TRUNK CONDITIONING Network 1 Side DSX 1 Side Network 1 Side DSX 1 Side Net1 01 E amp M busy DSX 1 01 EgM busy Net1 02 EgM busy DSX 1 01 EgM busy Net1 03 E amp M busy DSX 1 03 EgM busy Net1 04 E amp M busy DSX 1 04 EgM busy Net1 09 None DSX 1 09 None Net1 10 None DSX 1 10 None Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Pg
306. h List Static from the Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change the list of static path IP addresses explicitly defined in the unit Main Menu Configuration IP Path List Static The IP Path List Static screen appears showing any existing static paths Paths discovered as SLV packets are received from other FrameSaver units are not shown To view the entire current IP Path List use the IP Path Connection Status screen See IP Path Connection Status in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance B gt Procedure To add a static path 1 Select New The following prompt appears Enter IP Address press ESC to abort F z FWD No 2 Enter the IP address of a static path and select a forwarding option of No or Yes using the spacebar 3 Press enter Select Save Table 4 16 IP Path List IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 001 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the address of a FrameSaver or other device at the other end of a path 000 000 000 001 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Specifies the address of a device FWD Possible Settings No Yes Default Setting No Determines whether this path list item is sent to all other addresses in the list that represent FrameSaver devices No The IP address associated with this path list item is not distributed Yes The IP address assoc
307. hat It Indicates Frame Relay HDLC Errors Rx Total Errors The number of receiver errors on the interface The following are included in this count m Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors m Rx Total Discards m Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Rx Total Discards The number of receiver discards on the interface The following are included in this count m Resource errors m Rx Overruns m Frames received when the link was down m Inactive and disconnected DLCls m Inactive destination DLCls m Unknown EDLCls Rx Overruns The number of receiver overruns too many bits on the interface Rx Non Octet Frames The number of non octet frames received on the interface Rx CRC Errors The number of received CRC cycle redundancy check errors Tx Total Errors The total number of transmit errors on the interface including transmits discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards The total number of transmit discards on the interface including underrun flushes Tx Underruns The number of transmitter underruns too few bits on the interface September 2002 7 63 7 Operation and Maintenance ESF Line Performance Statistics These statistics appear when ESF Line is selected from the Performance Statistics menu for the network interface Main Menu
308. hat are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI if the PVC is IP Enabled or if Payload Managed is enabled NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLC suppresses EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number inclusive Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting For multiplexed DLCIs Proprietary For nonmultiplexed DLCls Standard out Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment Display Conditions This option does not appear if the PVC is IP Enabled or Payload Managed is enabled None Does not use a routing protocol Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options Standard out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routin
309. he FrameSaver SLV Router Describes the router s interfaces and features and shows typical setups and configurations Chapter 6 Security and Logins Provides procedures for controlling access to the FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance Provides procedures to display unit identification information and perform file transfers as well as how to display and interpret status and statistical information Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Provides device problem resolution alarm and other information as well as troubleshooting and test procedures 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 xi About This Guide xii Section Description Chapter 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features Identifies where installation and setup information is located and how FrameSaver units are supported Chapter 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus application so it supports FrameSaver units and so you can change alarm and history file defaults Chapter 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of Concord s Network Health application so reports can be created for FrameSaver units and identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units Appendix A Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screen
310. he DLCI changes to Inactive status in an LMI response or when there is an LMI or physical link failure When a delay is configured the unit is more tolerant of network glitches or repeated short outages before going into backup minimizing bouncing between network and backup services 0 3600 Specifies the amount of time for the delay DLCI Down Backup Activation Transition Threshold Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies how many times a primary destination DLCI transitions up or down during the DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay period before the unit initiates backup provided the DLCI is active when the delay period ends 1 10 Specifies the number of transitions allowed between Active and Inactive status Backup Restoration Delay sec Possible Settings 0 3600 Default Setting 0 Specifies the number of seconds the unit will wait after all backup alarm conditions have cleared for a primary destination DLCI before the backup connection is terminated 0 3600 Specifies the amount of time for the delay 4 104 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 26 Auto Backup Criteria Options 2 of 2 When Auto Backup Allowed Possible Settings Always Restrict Default Setting Always Determines when backup for the access unit is allowed to occur Always No restrictions on backup Restrict Backup is restricted t
311. he following Network 1 DSX 1 Port n ISDN BRI or PRI 3 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 27 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 9 Test Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates Monitor Pttn Active Interface A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay Network Initiated ISDN BRI Test An ISDN test has been started by the ISDN BRI Active network and it is currently active Send Pttn Active DLCI nnnn A selected Send Pattern test is active on the frame relay link 3 specified DLCI for the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active DLCI nnnn A selected Monitor Pattern test is active on the frame relay link 3 specified DLCI for the specified frame relay link Test Call Active SDN Link Name _ A test call is active on the specified frame relay link the link being the ISDN Link Name assigned in the ISDN Link Profile This message would only appear for units with the ISDN DBM feature frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n for a 1 slot unit or SsPort n for a NAM in a multislot housing the frame relay link associated with the specified user data port in the specified slot ISDN Link Name on a non network
312. he other end of the DLCI connection appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 55 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 56 Table 7 17 SLV Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Avg RdTrip Average round trip latency between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 samples If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful Max RdTrip Same as average Avg RdTrip but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 samples appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful Dropped SLV Responses The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which no response from the far end device has been received September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 DLCI Performance Statistics 7 Operation and Maintenance These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics
313. he user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed CAUTION Before changing the session access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the COM port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and that at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again A reset is required if the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 4 5 General System Options Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 85 4 Configuration Options 4 86 Table 4 20 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 2 Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether
314. hrough the frame relay network Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 4 17 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the unit s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address Intf Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network through frame relay that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface Node Subnet Mask Uses the nterface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 4 17 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this units management PVC Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eli
315. hroughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Enter to Morm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the asynchronous terminal session Norn New Enter new data Ooro Modify Modify existing data Lorl Delete Delete data Sors Save Save information Rorr Refresh Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Variations include m CIrSLV8DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI statistics m ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics ClrDBMStats for clearing DBM call statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord PgDn Display the next page September 2002 2 7 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting from a Menu p gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Enter The selected menu or screen appears B gt Procedure To return to a previous screen press the Escape Esc key until you reach the desired screen Switching Between Screen Areas Use Ctrl
316. hysical and Frame Relay options if needed then allow Time Slot Discovery to autodetect and assign the appropriate time slots to frame relay If there are multiple Frame Relay data links on the network interface or if Time Slot Discovery is not currently active you can manually assign time slots on the network interface for frame relay traffic using the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen This screen is read only when Time Slot Discovery is set to Enable for the network interface Frame Relay Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example main config tslot_assign frame_relay 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 FRAME RELAY NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENT Time Slot Discovery Disable NO1 N02 N03 N04 N05 NO6 NO7 N08 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Available Available FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll DSXAssign Value Meaning Time Slot Specifies whether the time slots used for frame relay traffic should be Discovery discovered from the network interface upon detection of an LMI failure This option allows additional time slots to be added without manually reconfiguring the device Ntt This field represen
317. iated with this path list entry is distributed to devices in the list 4 72 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Setting Up Management and Communication Options 9128 A2 GB20 80 Management and Communications options are explained in the following sections Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Securitys Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring Ethernet Management Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the Modem Port Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup September 2002 4 73 4 Configuration Options Configuring Node IP Information 4 74 Select Node IP to display add or change the information necessary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 4 17 Node IP Options When deploying units to remote sites minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting TS Management Access Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the custome
318. ices Inband communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 10 3600 Sets the SLV Sample Interval secs in seconds SLV Synchronization Role Available Settings Tributary Controller None Default Setting Tributary Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data collection and storage between FrameSaver SLV and or FLEX devices Tributary Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and provides network based synchronization information to other devices in the network Controller Uses its own internal time of day clock and provides synchronization information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock NOTE Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV synchronization controller None Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable or when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments SLV Type Available Settings Standard COS 1 COS 7 Default Setting If SLV Feature is enabled Standard If SLV Feature is disabled COS 1 Determines the type of SLV measurements to which these other SLV options apply m SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold m SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold m SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold
319. if LMI is down on any of its constituent links No action required Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Another user with Level 1 security access is currently accessing the unit Be aware that actions of the other user may override your test commands and configuration changes Wait until no other Level 1 users are accessing the unit if testing or configuration will be performed Yellow at DSX 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX 1 interface DTE has detected a LOS or OOF condition m Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends m Check the status of the attached equipment Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface m Network cable problem m T1 facility problem m Check that your network cable is securely attached at both ends m Contact your network provider nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI 8 13 8 Troubleshooting Viewing the Trap Event Log The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the t
320. iguration Manager main window Edit any alarm values that need to be changed Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to load alarms for the unit This may take some time so please be patient See Editing Alarms on page 10 9 if any default settings need to be changed 10 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Editing Alarms p gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens Property Editor Custom File Help Domain RT Delay _ Proxy SNMP Properties File Grenada58 Type FrameRelay Logging Domain Stat Host Conv ART DLCI Add Edits Telete Rising Falling SR t 45000 45000 ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Edit button to the right of the list The Edit Trap window opens 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 10 9 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Domain Stats Type Tr
321. iguration options set by selecting a discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus No previously discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections will be removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled see Automatically Removing a Circuit on page 4 11 Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting Selecting or changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks NOTE When auto configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI but a standard DLCI is needed change the DLCI to standard from the network DLCI Records screen Configuration Network DLCI Records September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved the Saving will cause Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes y is entered the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes is entered all multiplexed DLCls and PVC Connections are deleted except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as TS Management Link If No is entered previously discovered and auto configured option settings will not be removed but configuration updates due to LMI response messages are perfor
322. igured nor can it transmit or receive data No PVC connections or frame relay DLCls will be deleted Disabling the ISDN interface results in the following m All currently connected ISDN calls are terminated m Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated or displayed Service Profile ID SPID 1 or 2 Possible Settings 3 20 digits Default Setting Clear Specifies the SPID number assigned by the ISDN service provider for Bearer channel 1 B1 and Bearer channel 2 B2 SPID numbers are used by the switch to identify which ISDN services the DBM can access All blanks is a valid setting 3 20 digits You can enter a SPID number or you can leave blanks If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen If fewer than three digits numerics are entered an Invalid SPID must be at least 3 digits message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the SPID field so it can be reentered Local Phone Number 1 or 2 Possible Settings 10 digits Default Setting Clear Provides the telephone number associated with Bearer channel 1 B1 and 2 B2 All blanks is a valid setting 10 digits Enter the telephone number up to 10 digits If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the phone number field so it can be reentered 9128 A2 GB20 80 Septem
323. ility this condition will initiate backup SLV Timeout DLC nnnn frame relay linkt 28 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote system have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI and link If the frame relay link is Net1 FR1 the timeout is on the network FrameRly1 timeslot assignment When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted as long as the condition exists m Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service provider m f a DBM is present and Auto Backup is enabled backup is initiated automatically nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 7 of 7 8 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Suboptimal Link Rate frame relay link The specified frame relay multilink has failed to achieve the configured Maximum Link Rate for the link This message appears for multilink aggregate frame relay links
324. imes of the day The following additional features can be configured m Delays can be configured to control how long the unit will wait before initiating backup when a DLCI is declared down and how long it will wait to restore service once the DLCI is declared operational again m A threshold can be set to determine how many times a primary destination DLCI can transition between Active and Inactive before the unit initiates backup B gt Procedure To set the criteria and backup timers for automatic backup 1 Enable Auto Backup Main Menu Configuration Auto Backup Criteria When a failure occurs the unit automatically enables the Alternate Link and traffic is rerouted over the backup alternate interface 2 Specify the amount of delay after a DLCI is declared down before backup is initiated DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay 3 Set the threshold for transitions of the DLCI s status before backup is initiated DLCI Down Backup Activation Transmission Threshold 4 Specify the amount of delay after a DLCI is declared operation before backup is ended Backup Restoration Delay 5 Specify When Auto Backup Allowed Always or Restrict If Restrict is selected specify the days and hours of the week during which automatic backup can take place 6 Save the configuration See Table 4 26 Auto Backup Criteria Options for configuration information 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 17 4 Configuration Options Config
325. in modular to DB25P 14 feet 4 3 meters 035 0314 1431 3100 F2 540 COM Port to PC Cable D Sub9 to DB25 for PC serial port 14 feet 4 3 meters 035 0313 1431 3100 F2 550 T1 Mass Termination Cable 50 pin plug to seven RJ48S plugs 5 feet 1 5 meters Connects carrier mounted units to a M66 block 035 0363 0531 9007 F1 500 Adapter 8 pin modular plug to DB15 jack Used for DSX 1 interface 035 0386 0031 9008 F 1 560 DSX 1 Adapter Cable RJ48C to DB15 1 foot 0 3048 meters For use by FrameSaver 9126 9126 II and carrier mounted 9128 035 0386 0031 9008 F 1 560 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index Numerics 1MPort mode auto configuration 4 9 1Port mode auto configuration 4 9 1PPort mode auto configuration 4 9 2MPorts mode auto configuration 4 9 55 hexadecimal test pattern 8 24 A aborting tests 8 21 Access CLI and configuration 1 3 control commands C 3 controlling CLI 6 14 Easy 4 3 Level Port 4 101 limiting router CLI 6 14 Name 4 83 to another devices interface 7 70 Type 4 88 Access Dial In 6 4 Access Level 6 11 6 12 assigning 6 10 changing 6 15 CLI command modes 6 14 Port 4 98 security 2 9 Session 4 85 Action on Network Yellow Alarm 4 42 activating Modem PassThru 7 70 Activation Certificate 9 5 checking status 9 7 entering number 9 7 viewing status 9 7 checking status 9 9 managing 9 6 scheduling 9 8
326. in name domain name September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Table D 3 CLI Commands 2 of 2 Command encapsulation encapsulation type encapsulation protocol no frame relay interface dici dici num interface intf type intf num sub intf num point to point no interface intf type intf num sub intf num point to point ip address ip addr subnet mask no ip address ip addr subnet mask no ip access group access list 1 199num in out no ip dhcp pool pool name ip dhcp relay max clients max dhcp clients no ip dhcp relay max clients max dhcp clients no ip dhep server ip address no ip multicast routing no ip nat inside outside no ip nat inside source List access list 1 99num pool pool name overload list access list 1 99num interface intf type intf num sub intf num overload static static ip addr1 static ip addr2 protocol static ip addr1 static port num static ip addr2 no ip nat pool pool name start ip addr end ip addr netmask netmask prefix length prefix length ip nat translation timeout time no ip nat translation timeout time ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num no ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num no ip routing no ip unnumbered null 0
327. in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit enabled Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 53 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 54 Table 7 16 SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI 3 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLC connection appears if communication with the far end device is not successful Avg RdTrip Latency Average round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options over the previous 15 samples If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average
328. ined History Files Monitoring a DLCI s History Data on page 10 16 Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus on page 10 18 Statistical Windows Supported on page 10 20 Release 5 5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides FrameSaver SLV specific support 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 10 1 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Preparation Before getting started you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory OpenLane provides these directories as a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files A template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available OpenLane paradyne directories include the following m Properties paradyne fsd file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory m Properties paradyne fst file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory Alarms slvtemplate fct file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory m User history pd udh files found in OpenLane netscout userHistory directory These files should be moved to NSHOME usr so they can be used See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template on page 10 8 and Creating History Files on page 10 13 for additional information 10 2 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Configuring NetScout Manager Plus
329. ines whether or not CIR Committed Information Rate and EIR Excess Information Rate will be enforced by the unit on frames being sent on network frame relay links Enable CIR and EIR are enforced m Frames that exceed CIR will be marked Discard Eligible DE These frames are counted in the Above CIR but within EIR category until this category is full Once full additional frames are counted as being in the Within CIR category m Frames in excess of EIR will be discarded m For CSU DSUs only DE frames received from the external router are credited as frames transmitted above CIR They are credited as frames transmitted between CIR and EIR until that count reaches its limit at which point they are counted as frames transmitted above EIR Disable CIR and EIR are not enforced LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use the system LMI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface System Use system LMI options see Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters Frame Relay DSOs Base Rate Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Selects the base rate for the DSOs allocated to frame relay on the network interface Display Conditions This option only appears on the network interface of the FrameSaver SLV 9128 not the 9128 II Nx64 The base
330. ing Enable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Write Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by
331. ing Operating Mode a 4 19 Configuration Option Tables 02 e ee eeaee 4 20 Configuring the Overall System a nus saanuna aaaea 4 21 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System CSU DSUs 4 21 Configuring Class of Service Definitions 4 25 Code Point Definitions 2 2 0 0 0 00 cee eee 4 27 Configuring Service Level Verification Options 4 28 Configuring General System Options 4 31 m Configuring Physical Interfaces a 4 34 Configuring the Network Interface 00 eee eee 4 34 Configuring a User Data Port CSU DSUs 4 38 Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Aa 4 43 Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface 044 4 45 Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles 0000000 4 49 ii September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or DSX 1 Time SOUS ve a dees aS Ae lees ra aid is Mees aaa a a Clearing Assignments 000 eee Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Manually Configuring DLCI Records e 0 ee eee Configuring PVC Connections eee eaee Configuring the IP Path List 0 0 0 0 e eee eee Setting Up Managem
332. ing a pattern the InjectERR function key appears Use InjectERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern 3 To send a pattern highlight the Send command to send a pattern and press Enter To monitor the test highlight the Start command and press Enter The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Result column An error count is also displayed When monitoring a pattern the ResetMon function key appears ResetMon resets the error count to zero 4 To stop the test press Enter to send the Stop command Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit router or NMS to which it has a route Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are m To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit in the network to verify that the path is operational Select IP Ping Test Procedure 1 on page 8 39 to ping any far end FrameSaver unit m To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver unit and the central site NMS During a remote site installation an IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central sit
333. ing decoding See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for additional information about this feature 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 5 8 Troubleshooting Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log Once the capture buffer or trace log is full the oldest packets are overwritten To view the most recently captured packets using the menu driven user interface LMI Packet Capture Utility Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Example main control 1mi capture display log 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 LMI TRACE LOG Page 1 of 3 Packets Transmitted to Net1 FR Packets Received from Net1 FR1 LMI Record 1 at Os Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 LMI Record 2 at Os Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rev Seq 177 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI messages The following information is provided m The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet 1 8000 and the amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured The maximum amount of time displayed is 4 294 967 seconds s which i
334. ing method or destination interface for the ping Use Internal Route When choosing which interface to send the ping the unit first consults its routing table If the address or subnet does not appear in the routing table the ping will be sent to the Default IP Destination if defined See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Port n Net1 FR1 The ping is sent out the specified destination regardless of the internal route configuration DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Lowest assigned DLCI on the selected interface Specifies the DLCI to be used for the ping If the DLCI is configured on a Virtual Channel Connection VCC the VCI and VPI are displayed next to the DLCI Display Conditions This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to Use Internal Route 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI EDLCI Possible Settings 0 Default Setting 0 Specifies the EDLCI to be used for the ping Display Conditions This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to Use Internal Route and then appears only if the specified DLCI is multiplexed 0 Specifies the EDLCI The field cannot be modified September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Table 8 5 Ping Options 2 of 3 Source IP Address Available Settings Automatic Special Default Setting Automatic Specifies the source IP add
335. ing network does not provide causes Invalid Call 81 Call reference used is not Contact your service Reference Value currently in use on the representative user network interface Invalid Info Element 100 Device sending this cause Contact your service Contents has received and representative implemented an information element but one or more fields in the element cannot be processed Invalid Message 95 No other cause in the Contact your service Unspecified invalid message class representative applies for this invalid message event Invalid Number 28 Call cannot be completed Check your ISDN link Format Incomplete Address because the phone number is incorrect or incomplete profile and correct the number September 2002 7 43 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 14 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 3 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Invalid Transit 91 Incorrect format of transit Contact your service Network Selection network identification representative Mandatory 96 Required data is missing Contact your service Information Element from a mandatory representative Missing information element Message Not 101 Device sending this cause Contact your service Compatible with Call has received a message representative State that is not permissible while in the call state Msg Nonexistent 98 An unexpected message Re
336. ing of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing ifString have the following format DLCI diciNumber circuitld of ifName frame relay link SlinkName dlciNumber is the DLCI number DLCI diciNumber circuitld only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap Scircuitld is the name given to the circuit It can be an empty string or a 1 64 byte string within quotes e g Chicago to New York and only appears when a DLCI with circuitID is associated with the trap SlinkName is the name given to the link Frame relay SlinkName only appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with the trap SifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Examples DLCI 100 Chicago to New York of Network T1 frame relay link In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap Typically the circuitld is a coded string encoded by the network service provider The following shows an example DLCI 100 cc0402 dec0704 RG21 of Network T1 frame relay link The unit supports the following Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Traps linkUp and linkDown Traps enterprise Specific Traps RMON Specific Trap dialControl These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Trap warmStart B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults
337. interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed state Physical Interface Alarm Defaults This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit s network interface Table B 10 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Tag dsx1TotalUASs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 5 1 Rising Falling Sample Threshold Threshold Item Type 1 MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Event Type Default Default Unavailable D MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 900 secs Rising 1 1 Seconds 15 mins 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 19 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit s frame relay link interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Table B 11 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Invalid Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxliFrames 15 MinS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Short Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 19mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Long Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 sec
338. ion Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Ctrl a to access these functions Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections and statistics You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information Test Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration options Auto Configuration Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a selected application You can also automatically populate network and for CSU DSUs data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings Control Control the asynchronous user interface for call directories device naming login administration and selecting software releases You can also initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit Easy Install Configure minimal options for a quick installation See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit s menus and screens 2 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Screen Work Areas There are two user work areas m Screen area Where you input information into fields m Function keys area Where you perform specific screen functions Below is a sample configuration screen Model Number Date and Time Menu Path main config system slv 9128 IISLV Device Name Node A 08 23
339. ion and Maintenance When an ISDN DBM is installed these statistics are available for ISDN calls and call attempts You can clear these statistics by selecting the ClrDBMStats function key or you can clear all performance statistics for the system Main Menu s Status Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics Clearing these statistics will not affect performance statistics stored in user history for the system The statistics are only cleared locally Table 7 22 DBM Call Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Total Call Attempts Number of call attempts made by the DBM Total Calls Originated Number of successful calls made by the DBM Total Calls Answered Number of successful calls answered by the DBM Total Calls Rejected Security Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to security Total Calls Rejected Other Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to reasons other than security like incoming voice call requests Average Call Duration mins Average amount of time in minutes that successful calls take Longest Call Duration mins Amount of time spent in minutes during the longest successful call Total Call Duration mins Sum of all successful calls in minutes September 2002 7 67 7 Operation and Maintenance Ethernet Performance Statistics The following statistics appear when Ethernet is selected from the Performance
340. ion on page 8 3 for other methods of resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt and type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Port usage m Port Use is set to Terminal so the asynchronous terminal can be used m Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults m Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults m All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration m Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a self test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 8 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Management Link Feature A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additiona
341. ions First DLCI records must have been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside See Manually Configuring DLC Records on page 4 64 for additional information Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs m When you select New the configuration option field is blank m When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID number that you specified These options do not apply when the Management PVC is designated as a TS Management Link see Configuring Node IP Information on page 4 74 for additional information From this screen you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens Select the Delete function key a Management PVC ID and respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt for quick removal of unused DLCls If the Management PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination a Default IP Destination or a TS Access Management Link an Are You Sure prompt is displayed to warn you A payload management circuit is identified by PM in the EDLCI field of the Management PVCs Options screen If a payload management management circuit is deleted the associated PVC remains standard even if was a multiplexed PVC automatically converted to standard when it
342. iption Model Feature Number FrameSaver SLV Units continued FrameSaver SLV 9128 II T1 central site carrier NAM with m Diagnostic Feature Set m Integral modem Support for up to 120 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9128 B2 211 FrameSaver SLV 9128 II T1 central site carrier NAM with m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem Support for up to 120 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9128 B2 212 FrameSaver SLM Feature Set Upgrade FrameSaver SLM Feature Set Activation Certificate for 9126 9126 C1 220 FrameSaver SLM Feature Set Activation Certificate for 9128 9128 C1 220 User Manual FrameSaver SLV Models 9126 9126 II and 9128 II CSU DSU and 9126 I Router User s Guide Paper Manual 9128 A2 GB20 NMS Products OpenLane Enterprise 7805 D 1 001 OpenLane Workgroup 7805 D1 003 Optional Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F1 891 Shelf Mounting Kit for Up to Two 1 Slot Housings 9001 F1 894 ISDN BRI DBM 9098 F 1 870 ISDN PRI DBM 9098 F 1 875 Power Supplies 100 240 VAC for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F1 040 120 VAC for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F1 020 AC Power Supply for Access Carrier 9007 F1 040 DC Power Supply for Access Carrier 9005 F 1 050 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80
343. ired to generate the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about setting FTP configuration options 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 6 7 6 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Link p gt Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Access Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Disable Telnet Session and or FTP Session as appropriate 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable access via the TS Access Management Link TS Access Management Link to None Assign an access level to the TS Access Management Link TS Access Management Link s Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and
344. is argument aging time Specifies the length of time that an unused dynamic entry is maintained in the bridge table The no bridge command resets the aging time to the default value aging time Valid range is 10 1 000 000 seconds The default is 300 protocol Specify a spanning tree protocol span tree protocol Valid spanning tree protocol for IEEE 802 1 protocol is ieee priority Specify the priority ranking for this bridge The higher the number the less likely this bridge will be selected as the spanning tree root span tree priority Valid priority values when spanning tree protocol is IEEE 802 1 are 0 65535 The default is 32768 route Specify a protocol to be routed in this bridge group when concurrent routing and bridging are enabled route protocol Valid routing protocol is IP September 2002 C 9 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 10 Table C 6 Bridge Commands 2 of 2 no bridge group bridge group Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if config subif Allows a user to apply or remove a set of bridge group parameters to from an interface or sub interface When a set of bridge group parameters is applied or removed at the interface level the command also applies to all sub interfaces on the interface Example no bridge group NOTE If the bridge group is only required on specific sub interfaces remove the bridge group from an int
345. it Data TXD TXD DCE Data Terminal 5 To DTE 2 DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR Ready DTR DCE Request to 7 To DTE 1 DTE Request to Send RTS E 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Cisco 7000 Series Router DB25 Plug COM Port AUX Port Signal RJ45 Pin Direction DB25 Pin Signal DCE Receive Data 2 From DTE 3 DTE Receive Data RXD RXD DCE Signal Ground 3 7 DTE Signal Ground SG SG DCE Transmit Data 4 To DTE 2 DTE Transmit Data TXD TXD DCE Data Terminal 5 To DTE 20 DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR Ready DTR DCE Carrier Detect 6 To DTE 8 DTE Carrier Detect CD CD DCE Request to 7 To DTE 4 DTE Request to Send RTS Send RTS 3COM Router DB9 Socket COM Port AUX Port Signal RJ45 Pin Direction DB25 Pin Signal DCE Receive Data 2 From DTE 2 DTE Receive Data RXD RXD DCE Signal Ground 3 5 DTE Signal Ground SG SG DCE Transmit Data 4 To DTE 3 DTE Transmit Data TXD TXD DCE Data Terminal 5 To DTE 4 DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR Ready DTR DCE Carrier Detect 6 To DTE 1 DTE Carrier Detect CD CD DCE Request to 7 To DTE 7 DTE Request to Send RTS Send RTS September 2002 E 9 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Gender Adapter Changer When connecting the COM port to a router or Frame Relay
346. it in one of four ways m Reset it from the Control menu m Cycle the power m Reset the configuration options for the COM port or reload the factory default settings m Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS see your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power on self test of the unit p gt Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu 1 From the Main Menu screen select Control 2 Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears 3 Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 3 8 Troubleshooting Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit Configuring the unit improperly could render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal gt Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 Kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communicat
347. ith the appropriate status highlighted September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance FrameSaver SLV 9126 LEDs and Control Leads 9128 A2 GB20 80 The FrameSaver SLV 9126 A1 unit s faceplate includes LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the FrameSaver unit its network interface DSX 1 interface and DTE interface 9126 FG Se KF SSS FrameSaver SLV CAKE O0000000 N RK ETWO 00 16182 01 The FrameSaver SLV 9126 A2 201 s faceplate includes LEDs that provide status on the FrameSaver unit its network interface DSX 1 interface and DTE interface 9126 FPS CHF SKK MSE FrameSaver SLV GEE OO0O00000 NETWORK DSX PORT 02 17142a The FrameSaver SLV 9126 II s and FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router s faceplates include LEDs that provide status on the FrameSaver unit its backup mode its network interface DSX 1 interface and DTE interface The PORT LED refers to the user data port on the CSU DSU and the Ethernet port on the router 9126 tS A FrameSaver SLV CEE O 02 17142 September 2002 7 5 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 6 To access the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs and Control Leads Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9126 main status leds 9126 Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS amp Control Leads TI FR NAM NETWORK 1 DSX 1 Sig Sig OOF OOF Alm Alm L
348. ith the FrameSaver unit Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if the router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP gt Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used as when using the Auto Configuration feature Select the IP Ping test Main Menu Test 5 IP Ping Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive should appear as the Status If any other message is displayed additional testing is required The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restored to their normal condition
349. itted for the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that either Telnet Session Access Level or the Modem Port s Port Access Level is set top Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10
350. k Profiles PVC Connections and Management PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface except for the Management PVC designated as the TS Access Management Link NOTE When DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs for the first ISDN Link Profile have been configured manually it is recommended that specific discovered DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs be deleted manually via the Configuration menus Otherwise the manual configurations will be deleted along with the automatically configured ones To specify when automatic backup is allowed or can occur see Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup on page 4 104 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 15 4 Configuration Options Modifying ISDN Link Profiles Once an ISDN Link Profile is configured using the Automatic Backup Configuration feature phone numbers and Calling IDs need to be entered FrameSaver units with ISDN backup capability can originate or answer calls as needed so both phone numbers and Calling IDs are needed p gt Procedure 1 Select Link Profiles then Modify Main Menu Configuration ISDN Link Profiles 2 Add a name and phone number to the ISDN Link Profile s created by Automatic Backup Configuration Name for the destination entered e g Tampa The default setting is HQ_Site for the first ISDN Link Profile Phone numbers entered For Originating a Backup Call For Answering a Backup Call Outbound and Alter
351. k are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests TS Management SNMP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether validation of community strings and IP addresses is performed for this management link Display Conditions This option only appears when m Service Type on the Easy Install screen is set to Frame Relay m TS Access Management Link is set to a PVC name Enable Validation of community strings and IP addresses is performed on SNMP traffic Disable No validation of community strings and IP addresses is performed September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring Management PVCs Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or changing Management PVCs see Table 4 18 Management PVC Opt
352. k interface m All DSO assignments on the DSX 1 interface Then you can a assign synchronous data port to m Network interface time slots m DSX 1 interface time slots Synchronous Data Port Assignment Screen Example main config tslot assign sync data net 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 SYNC DATA PORT ASSIGNMENT Assign To Net1 N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port 2 Port 1 Assigned N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port 2 Port 1 Available N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save ClearAll DSXAssign FrAssign Value Meaning Assign To Specifies either Net1 network or DSX1 1 DSX 1 time slots Ntt This field represents time slot tt of the network interface Dtt This field represents time slot tt of the DSX 1 interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to a network or DSX 1 time slot Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned Port 2 For a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II synchronous data Port 2 is assigned to the time slot September 2002 4 59 4 Configuration Options For easy movement between screens select the FrAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Ne
353. k recovers the call is automatically disconnected Disable The frame relay link is out of service No data will be transmitted or received on the interface If there is are any active calls when disabled the calls are ended and no calls will be answered or originated using this profile September 2002 4 49 4 Configuration Options 4 50 Table 4 11 ISDN Link Profile Options 2 of 3 Outbound Phone Number Possible Settings 0 9 space or Default Setting none Specifies the primary phone number to call the ISDN Called Party Identifier for the Link Profile Up to 18 valid characters can be entered Each Outbound Phone Number must be unique If not the Outbound Phone Number is Not Unique message appears and you must enter another phone number NOTE For every originating outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed Inbound Calling ID 1 or 2 Possible Settings 0 9 Default Setting none Specifies the local phone number of a remote device from which that the unit will accept calls the ISDN Calling Party Identifier Up to 18 digits can be entered Each Inbound Calling ID must be unique If not the Inbound Calling ID n is Not Unique message appears and you must enter another phone number For remote devices with a PRI DBM only one Inbo
354. k that the phone number is correct ISDN Network Failed Active Idle An ISDN network failure was detected when a backup call was in progress or the DBM was in Idle mode Contact your network provider if the problem persists LatExceed IP_Address COSx DLCInnnn An IP SLV Latency Threshold has been exceeded for the specified Class Of Service of the path Contact your service provider nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 7 8 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made because the specified link profile was disabled Change the ISDN Link Profile s Link Status to Auto Main Menu Configuration 5 ISDN Link Profiles link LMI Down frame relay The Local Management Interface is down for the specified frame relay link For the network interface m f LMI was never up verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used m f LMI was never up Verify that
355. ks are discarded 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 29 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 30 Table 7 10 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 through 1007 Identifies the Local Management Interface reported DLCI numbers assigned to the selected interface the identifying number assigned to the path between two frame relay FrameSaver units ports DLCI statuses are listed in ascending order i e lowest number first Status Active Inactive Deleted New LMI reported status of the DLCI m Whether the DLCI is active capable of carrying data in the frame relay network m Whether it is inactive in the frame relay network m Whether it has been deleted by the frame relay network or m Whether it has been created by the frame relay network CIR bps 0 1536000 Displays the committed information rate reported by the Stratacom switch CIR information only appears in this column when LMI Protocol is set to Standard If blank the switch does not support this feature Appears for 10 seconds only before the network changes Deleted to Inactive and New to Active September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance IP Path Connection Status IP Path Connection Status is selected from the Status menu Main Menu s Status IP Path Connection Status The IP Path Connection Status screen displays the IP Path List a li
356. ks is a valid setting 10 digits Where you enter the telephone number up to 10 digits If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the phone number field so it can be reentered Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the ISDN interface D4 Uses D4 framing format NOTE This setting is not recommended by network carriers False yellow alarms may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle or when there is light traffic when other settings are selected ESF format does not create this problem ESF Uses Extended Superframe framing format 4 46 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 10 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options 2 of 3 Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the ISDN 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the ISDN Enable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Act
357. l Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events September 2002 4 89 4 Configuration Options 4 90 Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 3 of 6 Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interfaces configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network DSX 1 T1s Ports DBM All Defau
358. l be the sum of the negotiated rates on all connected constituent links ISDN Channel BRI DBM The ISDN B channel being used for B1 B2 the call on this link PRI DBM B1 B2 B23 Remote Call ID 3 None Backup has never been active on the link Remote device s ID Remote call origination Last Calling ID of the remote backup device received for the B channel If the remote device initiated the call this is the Inbound Call ID If this device originated the call this is the Outbound Phone Number Only appears for a constituent frame relay link 2 If Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle the Remote Call ID ISDN Channel and Negotiated Rate fields will not appear relay links September 2002 Appears for frame relay links with only one constituent and for all constituent frame 7 41 7 Operation and Maintenance Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages The following Cause Value Messages are presented in alphabetical order The Cause Number is also provided if you need to convert the message to its corresponding ITU number for your service provider Table 7 14 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 1 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Bearer Capability 57 User has requested a Arrange for the desired Not Authorized bearer capability that the capability user is not authorized to use Bearer Capability 65 Device se
359. l being transmitted to the network Display Conditions This option only appears for Port 2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data None No action taken when a yellow alarm is received Halt Halts the transmission of data received on the synchronous data port and all ones are sent on circuit BB ITU 104 Receive Data RD and circuit CB ITU 106 Clear to Send CTS is deasserted to the port when a yellow alarm is received Network Initiated Data Channel Loopback Possible Settings Disable V 54 ANSI FT1 V 54_ amp ANSI Default Setting Disable Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback V 54 Loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant sequences from the network or far end unit When this configuration is enabled V 54 FT1 or Both receiving a DCLB actuate sequence ona particular port causes the unit to initiate a DCLB on that port provided that a DCLB can be performed based on the current state of the port and unit Receiving a DCLB release sequence terminates the DCLB Display Conditions This option only appears for Port 2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Disable Ignores the DCLB actuate and DCLB release for the port V 54 DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with the V 54 standard for inter DCE signaling for p
360. l circuit String testString test started on SifString e g DTE Loopback test started on Sync Data Port S01P1 All tests have been halted on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test stopped on SifString e g Disruptive PVC Loopback test stopped on DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay September 2002 B 15 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps RMON Specific B 16 Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON See RMON Alarm and Event Defaults on page B 18 for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Table B 8 RMON Specific Traps and Variable Bindings Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause risingAlarm m alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has risen A above the set threshold m alarmVariable RFC 1757 String aala Sampa Change in SvariableName REC 1787 yp typeString threshold of alarmRisingThreshold by m alarmValue RFC 1757 S alarmValue pr AlarmRisingThreshold e g m alarmRisingThreshold Octets received on Network T1 RFC 1757 frame relay rose to threshold of m devLastTrapString 1 devHealthAndStatus mib fallingAlarm m alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has fallen below the set threshold m alarmVariable RFC 1757 String ace leT Change in variableName mal en ype typeString threshold of REG 1757 alarmFallingThreshold by m alarmV
361. l information about this feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link on the user data port or network interface can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information See Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface on page 8 6 for additional information on this feature p gt Procedure To use this utility 1 Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility Select an enabled frame relay link Main Menu Control LMI Packet Capture Utility 2 Select an enabled frame relay link or Capture Interface either Net1 FR1 Port 1 Port 2 or an ISDN Link Name if a DBM is present 3 Start packet capture While capturing data the status is Active Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held When the buffer is full the oldest packets will be overwritten 4 To stop the utility press Enter The field toggles back to Start 5 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for debugg
362. lares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 10 1078 1075 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1078 1077 1076 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period Circuit Identifier Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmission vendor s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting ASCII Text Entry Assigns a name to identify the circuit maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles 9128 A2 GB20 80 For models with ISDN backup capability select ISDN Link Profiles from the ISDN menu to set up the ISDN Link Profiles see Table 4 11 ISDN Link Profile Options Main Menu Configuration ISDN 5 ISDN Link Profiles Table 4 11 ISDN Link Profile Options 1 of 3 Link Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry HQ_Site Default Setting HQ_Site for first link blank for all others Assigns the name to the ISDN link profile It is generally the backup destination for a frame relay link Each profile must have a unique link name If the link name field is blank
363. le a session is automatically ended and the screen goes blank when the unit times out Press Enter to reactivate the interface gt Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter 2 Type your Password and press Enter Valid characters All printable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each character entered September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 2 User Interface and Basic Operation If your login was Then the Valid Main Menu appears Begin your session NOTE If your login is valid but access is denied there are two currently active sessions Invalid Message Invalid Password appears on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts m A Telnet session is closed m The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal m The internal modem connection is disconnected m An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination FrameSaver units support two sessions simultaneously If two sessions are currently active wait and try again m lf two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet
364. le Settings 0 9 space or Default Setting none Specifies an alternate phone number to call the ISDN Called Party Identifier when a call using the primary Outbound Phone Number was unsuccessful Up to 18 valid characters can be entered Each Outbound Phone Number must be unique If not the Alt Outbound Phone Number is Not Unique message appears and you must enter another phone number NOTE For every originating alternate outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections The Time Slot Assignment Cross Connect feature provides an easy method of assigning time slots for frame relay data and creating cross connections to the synchronous data interface The system allows you to assign DSOs on the T1 network interface and between the user data port and network interface in order to share the T1 network You can also clear cross connection assignments for the system or for a selected slot or interface NOTE Although it is not required it is suggested that you progress through each screen in order from top to bottom 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 51 4 Configuration Options Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Before assigning network time slots for use by frame relay traffic configure the Network p
365. lectable AT amp T TR 62411 DSX 1 Interface Framing format Coding format DTE line equalization 8 position modular connector with 8 position modular to DB15 adapter D Sub 15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 196 5 meters Send AIS Selectable Data Port 34 position V 35 connector Standard V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Data rates Variations for T1 rates automatically set to the network rate Modem MDM Interface Data rates Link Protocol 6 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ11C jack Up to 14 4 Kops PPP SLIP September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table F 1 F Technical Specifications NAM Technical Specifications 3 of 3 Specification Criteria ISDN PRI DBM Interface Service supported Data rates Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack PRI NI 1 or NI 2 1 536 Kbps D4 ESF B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable Ethernet Port 8 position modular unkeyed jack Standard ANSI IEEE Standard 802 3 Ethernet Version 2 Data rates 10 100 BaseT auto sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet rates Table F 2 1 Slot CSU DSUs and Router Technical Specifications 1 of 3 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 Class A digital device FCC Part 68 Refer to the equipment s label for the Registration Industry Canada Safety Number Refer to the equipme
366. led or disabled September 2002 B 11 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 12 Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer continued BRI m iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown One or more alarm a ifAdminStatus laan are active on the Supported through RFC 1573 Stri i ifIndex RFC 1573 anga ja ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifString down No alarms m devLastTrapString exist on the link devHealthAndStatus ifString administratively mib shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp No alarms on the interface String ifString up Logical Link Sublayer T1 Network m iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown LMI is down forthe BRI I LMI Protocol configured or PRI x oo BEG Frame Relay link is disabled Synchronous Data Strings Port m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifString down No alarms devLastTrapString exist on the link due to LMI Service Side of the devHealthAndStatus ifString LMI down No alarms Frame Relay UNI mib exist on the link e g Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay Supported by the link Port 1 LMI down media specific Frame aan nG f Relay Services MIB ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String ifString up T1 Network m iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown
367. link the message appears when LMI has been declared down on the link m Fora multilink aggregate link the message appears when LMI has been declared down on all constituent links of the frame relay multilink LOS at DSX 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Possible reasons include m DSX 1 cable problem m No signal being transmitted from the DTE nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 8 7 Operation and Maintenance Health and Status Messages 4 of 7 Message What It Indicates LOS at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the ISDN PRI interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 m Active Backup call was in progress m dle DBM was in Idle mode Only appears when a dial backup module DBM is installed Possible reasons include m DBM cable problem m T1 facility problem LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Si
368. lt values Default Factory Configuration settings have been reloaded returning RMON related options to their original settings String RMON database reset to defaults September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 3 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseSecondary m devLastTrapString Operating software has detected ClockFail 4 devHealthAndStatus that the secondary clock source mib has failed String Secondary clock failed enterpriseSecondary Operating software has detected ClockFailClear 104 that the secondary clock source is operational again String Secondary clock restored enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected String Self test failed s s is the contents of devSelfTestResult enterprise Test Start 5 enterprise Test Stop 105 For physical interfaces and frame relay links m iflndex RFC 1573 m 0 0 placeholder m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib For virtual circuits DLCls m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib At least one test has been started on an interface or virtua
369. lt Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM port or Modem port Network Generates these trap messages on the network interface only DSX 1 For applicable T1 FrameSaver units generates these trap messages on the DSX 1 interface only T1s For applicable T1 FrameSaver units generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces Ports Generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on a user data port only DBM For units with an ISDN DBM installed generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the DBM only All Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all interfaces except for the COM port or modem port that are applicable to the FrameSaver model September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 4 of 6 DLCI Traps on Interfaces Interface Selection Field Possible Settings Network Ports DBM All None Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates these trap messages on DLCls for the network inte
370. ltiplexed DLCI 1 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Circuit Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier at the other end of the connection If the far end circuit is a DLCI the DLCI number 16 1007 appears If a VPI VCI the number is displayed as xx yyy xx being the VPI number 0 15 and yyy being the VCI number 32 2047 None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Dropped SLV The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a Responses response from the far end device has not been received Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 16 SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI 2 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Inbound Dropped Frames Above CIR Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR Total number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 282 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ra
371. ly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be faulty Summary Reports Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Network Summary Report Provides an overall view of the network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems Leaders Summary Report Identifies DLCls having the highest volume and errors High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health Index rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include a normally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list a new DLCI appears on the list check Element Summaries a DLCI has a high Health Index rating but low volume significant differences between a DLCl s average and peak Health Index rating September 2002 11 7 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Elements Summary Report Compares DLCI traffic with volume and the baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison to identify DLCls with above or below average volume so they can be investigated when there are any significant changes
372. matically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs To run a connectivity test on a link Main Menu Test 5 Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC ARndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column Test Call Test Call tests the device s ability to place a call It allows an alternate means of controlling the activation or deactivation of an ISDN link This test only appears for a FrameSaver device with a DBM that is configured to originate backup calls typically the remote site and has its ISDN Link Status option set to Auto To place a test call Main Menu Test ISDN Call PVC Tests When a test call is started Active appears in the Status column While the call is Active the status of the call connection and the link appears in the Results column m AFrame Relay Link Up message indicates that the required calls have been made and the link is successfully passing LMI data m AFrame Relay Link Suboptimal message indicates that at least one call has been made on the link the link is successfully
373. mation is added to current PVC connections and management PVCs m No No previously configured PVC connections are changed and newly discovered DLCls will be configured according to the new discovery mode and automatic backup setting September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options When the The following prompt appears If you select Response to the Remove Alternate Destinations from PVCs and delete unused DLCI Records prompt was Yes and Automatic Backup Configuration was disabled m No No previously configured DLCls ISDN Link Profiles or PVC Connections are removed or changed but updates due to LMI responses will be performed using the new setting m Yes All Alternate Destination information will be removed from PVC Connections and Management PVCs and all DLCls and ISDN Link Profiles except for the first one used exclusively as Alternate Destinations are deleted Response to the Remove Alternate Destinations from PVCs and delete unused DLCI Records prompt was Yes and Automatic Backup Configuration was set to Single_Site_Backup or Multi_Site_Backup Add Alternate Destinations to Current PVC Connections m No No previously configured PVC Connections are removed or changed but updates due to LMI responses will be performed using the new setting m Yes Alternate Destination information is configured for current DLCls ISDN Lin
374. mber Identification Services February 1989 and Supplement June 1990 Power Consumption 8 mA at 120 VAC Average power 1 watt 3 4 Btu per hour Weight 0 15 Ibs 2 4 oz 0 07 kg 68 grams Switch Compatibility National ISDN 2 NI 2 ATT 4ESS or ATT 5ESS Service Supported PRI NI 2 ATT 4ESS custom or ATT 5ESS custom supporting up to 23 B channels with Circuit Switched Data capability Framing Format D4 ESF Coding Format B8ZS Line Build Out LBO 0 0 dB 7 5 AB 15 dB 22 5 dB ANSI PRM Selectable September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Equipment List Equipment 9128 A2 GB20 80 See Cables on page G 6 for cables you can order Description Model Feature Number FrameSaver SLV Units FrameSaver SLV 9126 T1 remote site unit with m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem m Support for up to 16 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Housing Universal 100 240 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A1 201 FrameSaver SLV 9126 T1 remote site unit with m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem ISDN BRI DBM m Support for up to 16 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Housing Universal 100 240 VAC Power Supply Network Cable RJ49C BRI ISDN U Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A1 202 FrameSaver SLV 9126 II T1 remote site unit with m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem Support for up to 64 PVC
375. mbers 1 7 of the Class of Service definitions The following IP statistics are shown for m The seven Classes of Service Unknown COS IP packets whose Type of Service values do not match those defined for any Class of Service Non IP Packets that were not IP Version 4 m Total The total for all packets Tx Packets The number of packets transmitted Tx Octets The number of octets in the packets transmitted Rx Packets The number of packets received Rx Octets The number of octets in the packets received Rx Errors The number of packets received in error September 2002 7 59 7 Operation and Maintenance Frame Relay Performance Statistics The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status 5 Performance Statistics Frame Relay All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear when multiple frame relay links have been configured For FrameSaver units with an ISDN DBM All enabled multilink aggregate links are available for selection from the Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen The multilink aggregate link must be enabled if statistics are to be collected for this frame relay link When the frame relay link is the multilink aggregate link statistics for its related constituent links can be viewed To
376. med according to the just saved mode setting If No n is entered or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt no Auto Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Automatically Removing a Circuit 9128 A2 GB20 80 Using the automatic circuit removal feature which comes enabled network DLCls and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit s configuration when the network service provider no longer supports them Automatic deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active frame relay link When this feature is set to Enable The following will be automatically removed from the unit s configuration Unsupported network DLCls and PVC connections that include multiplexed network DLCls Standard network DLCls that are Payload Managed or IP Enabled Unsupported standard network DLCls that are not configured as the primary destination in a management PVC Non management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCls are included DLCls not included in three consecutive LMI full status response messages LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and they revert to their default settings A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is dow
377. message to be filtered Table C 15 ICMP Designations 1 of 2 Type Code ICMP Message Description 0 0 echo reply Echo ping reply All 3n Destination unreachable 3 0 net unreachable Network unreachable 3 1 host unreachable Host unreachable 3 2 protocol unreachable Protocol unreachable 3 3 port unreachable Port unreachable 3 4 packet too big Fragmentation needed and do not fragment DF bit set 3 5 source route failed Source route failed 3 6 network unknown Destination network unknown 3 7 host unknown Destination host unknown 3 8 host isolated Source host isolated 3 9 dod net prohibited Destination network admin prohibited 3 10 dod host prohibited Destination host admin prohibited 3 11 net tos unreachable Network unreachable for TOS Type of Service 3 12 host tos unreachable Host unreachable for TOS 3 13 Administratively prohibited Communication admin prohibited by filtering 3 14 host precedence unreachable Host precedence violation 3 15 precedence unreachable Precedence cutoff in effect 4 0 source quench Source quench flow control 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 C 31 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 32 Table C 15 ICMP Designations 2 of 2 Type Code ICMP Message Description All 5n All redirects 5 0 net redirect Redirect f
378. mp Sutherland 0804 Chaosnet 8060 Little Machines 0805 X 25 Level 3 8062 Counterpoint Computers 0806 ARP 8065 8066 University of Mass at Amherst 0807 XNS Compatibility 8067 Veeco Integrated Auto 081C Symbolics Private 8068 General Dynamics 0888 088A Xyplex 8069 AT amp T 0900 Ungermann Bass net debugger 806A Autophon 0A00 Xerox IEEE802 3 PUP 806C ComDesign 0A01 PUP Adar Trans 806D Computgraphic Corp OBAD Banyan Systems 80E E8077 Landmark Graphics Corp 1000 Berkeley Trailer nego 807A Matra 1001 100F Berkeley Trailer encap IP 807B Dansk Data Elektronik 1600 Valid Systems 807C Merit Internodal 4242 PCS Basic Block Protocol 807D 807F Vitalink Communications 5208 BBN Simnet 8080 Vitalink TransLAN III 6000 DEC Unassigned Exp 8081 8083 Counterpoint Computers 6001 DEC MOP Dump Load 809B Appletalk 6002 DEC MOP Remote Console 809C 809E Datability 6003 DEC DECNET Phase IV Route 809F Spider Systems Ltd 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 C 29 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex 2 of 2 Type Code Description Type Code Description 6004 DEC LAT 80A3 Nixdorf Computers 6005 DEC Diagnostic Protocol 80A4 80B3 Siemens Gammasonics Inc Xerox 6006 DEC Customer Protocol 80C0 80C3 DCA Data Exchange Cluster Xerox 6007 DEC LAVC SCA 80C6 Pacer Software 6008 6009 DEC Unassigned 80C7
379. ms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB Frames Sent SLVFramesSnt Rx DLCI Utilization SLVrxDLCIUtil Tx CIR Utilization SLVTxCIRUtil Frames Sent Above CIR SLVFramesTxAbvCIR Tx DLCI Utilization SLVTxDLCIUtil Average Latency AverageLatency Frames Received SLVFramesRec Current Latency CurrentLatency These alarms and current values can be found in NSHOME usr slvtemplate fct which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms This file can be copied and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values The copied fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all DLCls on the unit using the eztrap utility All fct files must be in NSHOME usr To configure alarms manually see Adding SLV Alarms Manually on page 10 11 NOTE Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure below If you have an NT system please install Perl before proceeding gt Procedure Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr Type eztrap i filename fct o agentname fct agentname and press Enter to run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCls for the copied fct file The message eztrap done appears when the fct file is transferred From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Conf
380. n or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link Disable Unused network DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs must be manually removed If the model has ISDN backup capability ISDN Link Profiles associated with the deleted records and alternate destinations will be deleted as well September 2002 4 11 4 Configuration Options Setting Up Dial Backup When configuring units with ISDN backup capability the following guidelines apply Central site configuration guidelines Setup the ISDN DBM physical interface If a BRI DBM change the Automatic Backup Configuration to Multi_Site_Backup A PRI DBM is already configured for multisite backup Modify the Link Profile s that Automatic Backup Configuration created to add a phone number m Remote site configuration guidelines Setup the ISDN DBM physical interface Ifa PRI DBM change the Automatic Backup Configuration to Single_Site_Backup A BRI DBM is already configured for single site backup Modify the HQ_Site Link Profile that Automatic Backup Configuration created to add a phone number Set the criteria by which automatic backup will take place Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface p gt Procedure 1 Configure the DBM interface Main Menu Configuration ISDN Physical 2 Enable the interface and enter the Service Profile IDs SPIDs and local phone numbers 3 Save the configuration See Table 4 9 ISDN BR
381. n access to the router connected to the unit s COM port make sure the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Modem PassThru See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out on page 4 6 when trap dial out is desired See Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature on page 4 7 if this feature is desired See Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port in Chapter 6 Security and Logins for additional information Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out B gt Procedure 1 Set up directory phone numbers Main Menu Control Modem Call Directories 2 Select Directory Number A for Alarm 3 Enter the phone number s Valid characters include For ASCII text Entering the phone number Space Readability characters underscore _ and dash Comma Readability character for a 2 second pause B Blind dialing P Pulse dialing unless B is specified T Tone dialing unless B is specified W Wait for dial tone 4 Save the phone number s September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature 9128 A2 GB20 80 Dial in access to the router is possible via the Modem PassThru feature also known as the Router Assist feature The FrameSaver units COM port must be connected to the router s auxiliary AUX or console port and the COM port must be configured for this use When this feature is set up and active a logi
382. n be limited by m Requiring a login m Assigning an access level to the port or interface An asynchronous terminal can be connected to the units COM communications port or its modem port 6 2 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 gt Procedure 6 Security and Logins To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface 1 Select the appropriate port options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login on page 6 12 Limit the effective access level to Level 3 or Level 2 Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes If connecting an asynchr
383. n does not match what was entered in the Password field m Try again m Contact your system administrator to verify your password Permission Denied Seen atan FTP terminal A file transfer was attempted but the m User did not have Level 1 security m Wrong file was specified when the put command was entered m User attempted to upload a program file from the unit m See your system administrator to get your security level changed m Try again entering the correct file with the put command m Enter the put command instead of a get command you can only transfer files to the unit not from it See Upgrading System Software on page 7 77 September 2002 7 15 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 16 Table 7 6 Device Messages 5 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Please Wait Command takes longer than 5 seconds Wait until message clears Port Inactive FrameSaver SLV 9128 11 only The port is disabled or it supports synchronous data when a DTE Loopback was started No action is needed Resetting Device Please Wait Yes or y was entered in the Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu No action needed Save Cancelled FrameSaver SLV 9128 11 only Changes were made on the Easy Install screen but when it came to saving the changes the Esc key was pressed or No was entered in response to the Save
384. n the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management gt SNMP Management Enable See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP management configuration options gt Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses 1 Select the SNMP NMS Security options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication SNMP NMS Security 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Enable Specify the number between 1 and 10 of Number of Managers to the desired SNMP management systems that are number authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Specify the IP address es that identifies the NMS n IP Address to the appropriate SNMP manager s authorized to send IP address SNMP messages to the unit Specify the access allowed for an authorized Access Level to Read or Read Write NMS when IP address validates is performed 3 Save your changes See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 6 11
385. n unlimited number of protocols and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are desired September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 User Interface and Basic Operation This chapter contains information about how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface and the Router s Command Line Interface CLI It includes the following 9128 A2 GB20 80 Logging On on page 2 2 Main Menu on page 2 4 Screen Work Areas on page 2 5 Navigating the Screens on page 2 6 Keyboard Keys Function Keys Selecting from a Menu Switching Between Screen Areas Selecting a Field Entering Information Screen Contents Navigating the Router s CLI on page 2 10 CLI Keyboard Keys September 2002 2 1 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Logging On Start a session using one of the following methods m Telnet session via An in band management channel through the frame relay network Alocal in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver unit and the router m Dial in connection using the internal modem m Direct terminal connection over the COM port When logging on the User Interface Idle screen appears m If no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen appears see Main Menu on page 2 4 You can begin your session m f security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password When the user interface has been id
386. nager window If all these requirements are not met a FrameSaver SLV supported domain needs to be added or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted the Properties File must be edited September 2002 10 5 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Correcting Domains and Groups Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne provided file and when m An unsupported domain needs to be deleted m A missing domain needs to be added m Groups Samples Interval and Logging are not configured as specified in Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups pp Procedure 1 Select the Property button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window The Property Editor window opens Property Editor Shared Type FrameRelay Samples Interval Logging Domain Groups SH LH SH LH Stat Host Conv o Add Edit Delete 5 x EE Joo Noo O kmag aaa Na 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2800000000 2oo2000000 o202020000 Trap Threshold Variable Rising Falling Add Edit Delete 2 To delete an unsupported domain click on the domain from the Domains list then select the Delete button The Are you sure prompt appears Select Yes The unsupported domain disappears from the list 10 6 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 3 To add a FrameSaver SLV supported domain or correct property
387. nagers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive 4 88 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 2 of 6 NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Initial Route Destination Possible Settings AutoRoute Modem COM Ethernet PVCname Default Setting AutoRoute Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager When proprietary RIP is active only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as the initial destination All other units can use the default setting Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Numb
388. nate Outbound phone numbers Valid characters can include m Numbers 0 9 m Special characters and m Spaces m Parentheses Inbound Calling ID1 and ID2 These are the phone numbers of units from which calls will be accepted Valid characters can include m Numbers 0 9 NOTES Remember to include local dial out numbers i e 9 then the number For every originating outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Maximum Link Rate Kbps set to the appropriate speed if necessary Caller Identification Method set to Proprietary if call validation is not required The setting must be the same at both ends of the circuit An Alternate Outbound Phone Number should a call using the primary Outbound Phone Number be unsuccessful if desired 3 Save the configuration See Table 4 11 ISDN Link Profile Options for configuration information 4 16 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Restricting Automatic Backup and Configuring Backup Timers You can specify when auto backup is allowed to occur If backup is restricted anda backup is active when the allowed time for backups is over then the backup is terminated and the data is returned to the primary data path regardless of the primary path s condition You can restrict auto backup to occur only m On certain days of the week m At certain t
389. nd a PRI dial backup module DBM is installed m Active Backup call was in progress m Idle DBM was in Idle mode This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes EER at Network 1 The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes Ethernet Link Down FrameSaver SLV 9126 I or 9128 11 The Ethernet port is enabled but communication between the management system and the unit is not currently possible on the port Internal Modem Failed The unit s internal modem failed to pass the self test ISDN Active An ISDN call is active 1 2 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI September 2002 7 21 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 22 Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages 3 of 7 Message What It Indicates ISDN Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made becaus
390. nder Add certificate Enter the Activation Certificate number from the certificate Click on the prompt below it The frame at the bottom of the screen is refreshed to display information about the new certificate See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information Checking Activation Certificate Status 9128 A2 GB20 80 You can view the status of certificates and activations at any time by selecting View Add activation certificates from the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu and clicking on the prompt below Display certificates See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information September 2002 9 7 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features Scheduling Activations You can activate one many or all FrameSaver devices at any time until all the activations ordered for the certificate have been completed NOTE Once SLM capability is activated in a FrameSaver device the unit cannot be returned to the diagnostic feature set pp Procedure To schedule device activations 1 9 8 Open the OpenLane SLM application and provide your access level which must be Admin and select Firmware Feature Maintenance from the OpenLane Administration screen In the Feature Activations area select Schedule feature verifications activations Follow the steps included on this screen Select the FrameSaver devices to be activated at this time by
391. nding this cause Arrange for the desired not Implemented does not support the bearer capability capability i e channel type requested Bearer Capability 58 Bearer capability requested Arrange for the desired Presently Not is supported by the device capability Available generating the cause but it is not available at this time Call Awarded and 7 An incoming call is being No action is needed Being Delivered in connected to an already Est Chnl 7 established channel that is used for similar calls Call Rejected 21 Equipment sending the No action is needed cause does not want to receive the call at this time Call Terminated by 130 Remote DBM rejected or 1 Retry the call Remote End terminated the call 2 Verify that the remote DBM s link profile is correct Call With Requested 86 Network has received a call No action is needed Call ID Has Been resume request but the call Cleared had been cleared after it was suspended Channel Type Not 66 Device sending this cause Arrange for the desired Implemented does not support the capability requested channel type Channel 6 Channel identified for the Arrange for the desired Unacceptable call is not acceptable to the capability receiving device Destination Out of 27 Destination interface Verify that the remote Order specified is not functioning DBM s link profile is correct correctly so the signalling message could not be delivered e g physical or data
392. nds or until an acknowledgement is received from the remote end The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Results column 5 To stop the test send the Down code to take the remote device out of loopback September 2002 8 33 8 Troubleshooting Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 8 34 The pattern tests enable a FrameSaver unit to either send or monitor a known bit pattern These tests generate industry standard bit patterns that can be used to determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit The following test patterns are available QRSS 511 All zeros 2047 All ones 2E15 1 2 1 1 in 8 2E20 1 279 1 3 in 24 User defined 2 byte test pattern a0a0 63 A Send Pattern test cannot be started when the following tests are running m Any Loopback on the same interface m Send Pattern Test on any port assigned to this network interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface p gt Procedure To send and monitor a Pattern Test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 5 Network Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests 2 Select the desired pattern in the Send or Monitor field If sending monitoring a user defined pattern enter the the desired 2 byte hexadecimal value in the field next to Send or Monitor When send
393. net mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 RIP Possible Settings None Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Standard out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM port configured as the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ct1 z WR To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM port IP Information has been set up see Configuring Node IP Information on page 4 74 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 99 4 Configuration Options Table 4 24 Communication Port Options 5 of 5 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used Only in
394. network interface report the problem to your T1 service provider CTS down to Port 1 Device The CTS control lead on the device s interface is off Check DTR and RTS from Port 1 m Verify that the port is enabled m Check DTR from the user data port DBM BRI Card Failed The ISDN BRI DBM failed to pass the self test Reset the FrameSaver unit Main Menu Control Reset Device If the DBM fails again contact your service representative DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network provider or your ISDN service provider if an ISDN Link Name is the link DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead on the device connected to Port n is disasserted The DTR control lead on the device connected to the specified port is off This message applies to data ports that act as DCEs Examine the attached DTE and cable connected to the system s port m Check that the port cable is securely attached at both ends m Check the status of the attached equipment nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 9128 A2 GB20 80 Sep
395. ng Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network interface D4 Uses D4 framing format NOTE This setting is not recommended by network carriers False yellow alarms may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle or when there is light traffic when other settings are selected ESF format does not create this problem ESF Uses Extended Superframe framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the network interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format 4 34 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 6 Network Physical Interface Options 2 of 4 Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB Bit Stuffing Possible Settings 62411 Disable Default Setting 62411 Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data transmitted to the network Display Conditions This option does not appear when Line Coding Format is set to B8ZS 62411 Inserts a one in the data after 15 co
396. ng Software Turning Off the System Alarm Relay on page 7 81 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Displaying System Information 7 Operation and Maintenance Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver unit This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Main Menu Status Identity View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node up to 255 ASCII characters System Contact Contact person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM NAM Type Type of unit installed referred to as a network access module or NAM i e T1 FR NAM This card type is supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character Current Software Revision Software version currently being used by the unit Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but has not yet been implemented Format is the same as for the Current Software Revision m In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded m Invalid indicates that no download h
397. ng the network cable or editing discovered option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver unit will start discovering DLCls as soon as it powers up If this occurs you can recover by deleting the discovered DLCls If only a local management PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit has been configured simply select the desired Frame Relay Discovery Mode and Save the change The default discovery mode depending on model is 1MPort or 1PPort When 1MPort mode is active the unit creates for each DLCI discovered on the network a multiplexed network interface DLCI which contains two EDLCls one for Port 1 data and the other for management a standard Port 1 DLCI with the same number as the network interface DLCI and a Management PVC then cross connects them When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status information with provisioned DLCI numbers is next received from the network the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration area When 1PPort mode is active the unit uses the Network DLCI values obtained from the Network LMI status response message to automatically configure for each DLCI a corresponding DLCI for Port 1 having the same numeric value as the Network DLCI and automatically cross connects them The DLCls created on the network side are IP Enabled not standard or multiplexed DLCls In addition payload management is configured for the network DLCI and assigned the Node IP Address Conf
398. nk DLCI 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 5 of 7 8 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface m Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit m Network cabling problem m T1 facility problem m Check that the framing format for the network interface is correct m Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends m Contact your network provider Path P Address Down DLCInnnn A path on the network interface is unavailable Determine why the path went down Power Supply Fan Alarm The power supply output voltage has dropped below the specified tolerance level required for the system Or one or both fan trays are not operating properly Check the LEDs on the power supply and fan trays to determine which may have failed then replace the failed component Primary Clock Failed A failure of the configured primary clock source for the unit was detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored Primary amp Secondary Clocks Failed A failure of both clock sources configured for the unit was detected This condition only applies to T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces It clears when the configured primary clock
399. nnection between the unit s modem and COM ports is created allowing access to a collocated device s serial port via the FrameSaver units internal modem This feature is sometimes referred to as the Router Assist feature Configurable FTP Transfer Rate Allows you to control the transmit rate when downloading firmware into the FrameSaver unit and uploading user history statistics to an NMS Network Management System via the COM port connection or a management PVC so the data can be transferred as a background task using the standard File Transfer Protocol FTP over extended periods of time using low bandwidth RMON User History Performance Statistics via SNMP Polling Provides access to the physical interface and basic frame relay performance statistics by polling the FrameSaver unit using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol These statistics are available real time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an RMON2 User History object Frame Relay Traffic Policing Ensures proper alignment and correlation of CIR Committed Information Rate values between the FrameSaver unit and the network switch When this feature is enabled the unit can enforce CIR and EIR Excess Information Rate marking frames that exceed CIR as DE Discard Eligible using the same method used by the switch Service Provider Support Provides information and tools useful to network service providers which includes the following IP Routing Table Shows
400. ns 2 of 4 DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed IP Enabled Default Setting For user data port DLCls Standard For network interface DLCls Multiplexed Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is Standard Display Conditions This option does not appear for a user data port or a virtual router port and it cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Access Management Link Standard Supports standard DLC ls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection IP Enabled Enables connection to one or more endpoints through a Layer 3 network A Payload Management PVC is created as well as the IP Enabled DLCI CIR bps Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 0 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where x
401. ns or run tests September 2002 3 5 3 Configuration Procedures Saving Configuration Options When changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save your changes to either the Current Customer or Scratchpad configuration areas NOTE When changing settings you must Save for changes to take effect pp Procedure To save the configuration option changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen 2 Type s or S to select the Save function and press Enter The Save Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response If you select No the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes are not saved If you select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes normally the Current Configuration and press Enter When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations like SNMP and Auto Configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the same time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost
402. nsecutive zeros are received or the density of ones falls below 12 5 This setting complies with AT amp T TR 62411 but is not recommended for frame relay data because it inserts errors in the data traffic Disable Disables bit stuffing Ones density is not enforced on data sent to the network Transmit Timing Possible Settings System Interface Default Setting System Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from the currently selected interface System Transmit timing is derived from the current system clock source see Table 4 5 General System Options Interface Transmit timing is derived from this interface NOTE When Interface is configured the clock must be synchronized to the system clock source Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the network Enable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a line loopback provided an LLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit s current state Receiving an LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the system is not in compliance with AN
403. nt s label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipments label for safety information Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Physical Dimensions FrameSaver SLV 9126 II and 9126 1 Router FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il Height 2 9 inches 7 4 cm Width 8 5 inches 21 6 cm Depth 12 5 inches 31 8 cm Weight FrameSaver SLV 9126 2 10 Ibs 0 95 kg 2 65 Ibs 1 2 kg 2 59 Ibs 1 18 kg 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 F 3 F Technical Specifications F 4 Table F 2 1 Slot CSU DSUs and Router Technical Specifications 2 of 3 Specification Criteria Power Consumption and Dissipation Built in power cord 100 240 VAC power supply FrameSaver SLV 9126 120 VAC power supply FrameSaver SLV 9126 Il and 9126 1 Router FrameSaver SLV 9128 II NEMA 5 15P plug 9 1 watts 60 Hz 43 0 151 A at 120 VAC 12 Result 31 05 BTU per hour 7 3 watts 60 Hz 43 0 131 A at 120 VAC 12 Result 24 9 BTU per hour 10 3 watts 60 Hz 3 0 125 A at 120 VAC 12 Result 35 14 BTU per hour COM Port Interface Communications Management Standard Data rates 25 position DB25 connector 9126 9128 II 9 position DB9 connector 9126 1 and 9126 11 Router EIA 232 I
404. ntant reports Installation and Setup of Network Health Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform Once Network Health is installed you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure you license the Poller application so you can poll SLV units and collect data To use this application 1 Discover network elements units and interfaces in the network 2 Configure the Network Health applications then save them 3 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes 4 Set up and run reports Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Discovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and discover
405. o devFrExt mib CIR bps m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseConfig m devLastTrapString Configuration has been changed Change 6 devHealthAndStatus via the menu driven user mib interface an SNMP Manager or auto configuration after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change String Device configuration change enterpriseDLCI m devFrExtDicilflndex The DLCI has been deleted The delete 17 devFrExt mib network no longer supports the devFrExtDiciDici DLCI and it was removed devFrExt mib Strings m devLastTrapString oe deleted AMO Dre devHealthAndStatus enterpriseDLCI mib DLCI Status is set to Inactive the Down 11 DLCI is down 9128 A2 GB20 80 enterpriseDLCIUp 12 Strings ifString down Due to LMI or physical failure ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again String ifString up enterpriseLatency Exceeded 21 m iflndex RFC 1573 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib An IP SLV latency threshold has been exceeded for a particular Class of Service for a path String Latency exceeded XXX XXX XXX XXX COS nn DLCI nnnn September 2002 B 13 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cau
406. o the day and time selected in the following configuration options Use this selection when the importance of the data that you are backing up is day time dependent Backup Allowed Day From nn nn Possible Settings 00 00 23 00 None Default Setting 00 00 Specifies the time that Auto Backup can begin for a selected day of the week in increments of 1 hour Day is Monday through Sunday 00 00 23 00 Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will start for this particular day None Auto Backup cannot occur on this day Backup Allowed Day To nn nn Possible Settings 00 00 24 00 Default Setting 24 00 Specifies the time that Auto Backup must end occurring for the selected day of the week in increments of 1 hour Display Conditions This option only appears if a start time was specified 00 00 24 00 Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will stop for this particular day September 2002 4 105 4 Configuration Options 4 106 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router This chapter includes the following m FrameSaver SLV Router Overview on page 5 2 m P Routing on page 5 3 m Address Resolution Protocol on page 5 3 m Proxy ARP on page 5 3 m Interface Configuration on page 5 4 IP Options Processing Applications Supported by NAT NAT Configuration Example m Network Address Port Translation on page 5 8 NAPT Configuration Example
407. of ASCII strings that have the effect of setting all configurable parameters to the current values either saved in memory or entered during a current configuration session Passwords are write only and not output The text file can be used with a terminal emulation program Refer to Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation in Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router The general format of the show config command is the same as the previous command show configuration in Standard mode saved Displays the command sequence for saving parameters currently saved in memory unsaved Displays the command sequence for saving parameters entered during the current configuration session show frame relay map Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the status of all frame relay DLCls seen on the router s frame relay interface The general format of the show frame relay map command is interface interface status dlci dici number dlci status Where the interface or sub interface shall be displayed in the standard format shown in the Interface Commands The interface status is up or down The dlci number is in the range 16 1007 Frame relay map statements are only displayed for DLCls configured on both the router and on the devices user interface The dici status is active or inactive show interface intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Stan
408. oint to point circuits are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB V 54 Loop 2 for the port ANSI FT1 DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either the ANSI 403 Annex B standard for in band signaling for fractional T1 FT1 channel loopbacks are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for the port V 54_ amp ANSI DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either the ANSI or V 54 standard are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for the port 4 42 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Select DSX 1 to display or change the physical configuration options when a DSX 1 interface is installed see Table 4 8 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options Main Menu Configuration DSX 1 Table 4 8 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the DSX 1 interface selected is available for use Enable The interface is available Disable The interface is not available for use If there are time slots assigned to the DSX 1 interface when you attempt to disable it the message This action will clear all DSX 1 Cross Connections Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Yes The following occurs m All existing DSX 1
409. ommunicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded This is the recommended setting Modem Specifies that the default destination is connected to the modem port Only appears when the modem port Use option is set to Net Link COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 24 Communication Port Options Ethernet For the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II or 9128 II specifies that the default destination is connected to the Ethernet port Only appears when the Ethernet port s Interface Status option is enabled When selected the Default Gateway Address must also be configured see Table 4 23 Ethernet Management Options PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in the London office London can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in London London would appear as one of the available selections TS Access Management Link Available Settings None PVCname Default Setting None Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service provide
410. on Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options Customer Configuration An alternate set of configuration options that you can set up and store for future use Scratchpad Configuration An alternate configuration area for temporary use The Scratchpad configuration is reset to the factory default settings when the unit is powered off and on Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but you can save changes only to the Current Customer or Scratchpad configuration option areas September 2002 3 3 3 Configuration Procedures Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options To access and display configuration options load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area pp Procedure To load a set of configuration options for editing 1 From the Main Menu press the down arrow key so the cursor is on Configuration 2 Press Enter to display the Configuration menu The Load Configuration From menu appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer or Scratchpad configuration option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded 3 Select the configuration opti
411. on IP address is compared during route table lookups The dest mask cannot be 0 0 0 0 unless a dest ip address of 0 0 0 0 has been specified and only contiguous left justified masks are allowed next hop ip IP address of the next hop router used to reach the destination intf type Two interface types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface intf num Valid interface index number for both the Ethernet and Serial interfaces is 0 sub intf num Sub interfaces are only supported on the network interface Serial 0 If a serial interface is specified a sub interface must also be specified Valid range for a sub interface is 0 4 294 967 295 no ip routing Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Enables or disables IP routing in the device The IP routing default is Enable NOTE When IP routing is disabled all static route entries are deleted However adding new route entries while IP routing is disabled is not prevented no ip multicast routing Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Enables or disables the forwarding of IP multicast packets The default is Disable September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Bridge Commands 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Bridge commands are used to enable or disable simultaneous bridging and routing configuration of bridge groups and their att
412. on Rtr SO goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Rtr SO comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Rtr SO That is the network interface s LMI follows Rtr S0 s LMI Port 1 Follows Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads When LMI on the network interface comes back up Port 1 is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted The LMI state on Port 1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface That is Port 1 s LMI follows the network interface s LMI This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 2 Follows Net1 FR1 Reacts like the Port 1 Follows Net1 FR1 selection but for Port 2 instead Rtr S0 Follows Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Rtr SO when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling Rtr SO When LMI on the network interface comes back up Rtr SO is reenabled The LMI state on Rtr SO has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface That is Rtr SO s LMI follows the network interface s LMI All Ports Follow Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on all user data ports when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling all ports and deasserting their control leads Allows LMI to come back up and reenables the ports when LM
413. on area from which you want to load configuration options and press Enter Current Configuration Customer Configuration Scratchpad Configuration or Default Factory Configuration The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display menu appears This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration 3 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 3 Configuration Procedures Changing Configuration Options 9128 A2 GB20 80 p gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display menu select a set of configuration options and press Enter For example Configuration 5 PVC Connections 2 Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s See Chapter 2 User Interface and Basic Operation for additional information When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete NOTES Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration optio
414. one of the following to request an Activation Certificate m f you are an end user and managing your own network contact your sales representative or distributor m f your network service provider NSP manages the network contact the service provider m f you are a network service provider or distributor contact Paradyne at 1 800 727 2396 www paradyne com via a purchase order or your Electronic Data Interchange EDI If submitting a purchase order by fax send it to 1 727 532 5270 An Activation Certificate can also be ordered through the Paradyne store at www paradyne com store Provide the following information m Model 9126 or 9128 m Number of units to be activated m Your OpenLane SLM system license key number To Find Your License Key Number Your license key number was entered into your system when your OpenLane SLM system was installed and is available from the OpenLane Administration screen However to access the screen with your license key number you must log in as a user with Administrative system access pp Procedure To find your OpenLane license key number 1 Open the OpenLane SLM application and log in as a user with Administrative access e g ADMIN 2 A bottom of the OpenLane Administration screen select About OpenLane SLM The license key is shown mid screen below the copyright and build information September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Ac
415. onfiguration Configuration setting was changed and Save was selected Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure updates are performed and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting m Yes The Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears Response to the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt was No and Automatic Backup Configuration was disabled Delete All Alternate Destinations from PVC Connections m No No previously configured DLCls or PVC connections are removed or changed and newly discovered DLCls will be configured according to the new discovery mode and automatic backup setting m Yes All multiplexed DLCls ISDN Link Profiles except for the first one and PVC connections are deleted except for management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and management PVCs designated as the TS Management Link If an alternate destination has been configured on a retained Management PVC the alternate destination will be deleted but the primary destination will be retained Response to the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt was No and Automatic Backup Configuration was set to Single Site Backup or Multi Site Backup Add Alternate Destinations to Current PVC Connections m Yes DLCI records are configured on the ISDN link s and Alternate Destination infor
416. onfiguration Options Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup For units with an ISDN DBM follow this menu selection sequence to specify whether and when automatic backup is allowed and to configure timers that will control and terminate backup or set delays see Table 4 26 Auto Backup Criteria Options Main Menu Configuration Auto Backup Criteria Table 4 26 Auto Backup Criteria Options 1 of 2 Auto Backup Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether backup for the access unit is automatically performed when the primary physical link or LMI or a DLCI on a PVC connection fails or when latency is exceeded When enabled the access unit automatically enables the Alternate Link configuration option and establishes an alternate DLCI and EDLCI rerouting traffic over the backup interface See Table 4 18 Management PVC Options to configure the alternate DLCI and alternate EDLCI NOTE Auto Backup cannot be enabled unless LMI Behavior is set to Independent see Table 4 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Enable Reroutes traffic over the backup alternate interface Disable Does not reroute traffic over the backup interface DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay sec Possible Settings 0 3600 Default Setting 0 Specifies the number of seconds the unit will wait once a DLCI is declared down before it initiates backup A DLCI is declared down when t
417. onger exists The relay stays on until all alarm conditions have been corrected m The System Alarm Relay option can be disabled Main Menu Configuration System General m System Alarm Relay Cut Off can be selected Main Menu Control System Alarm Relay Cut Off See Alarm Relay Connector in the 9000 Series Access Carrier Installation Instructions for information about connecting the alarm relay September 2002 7 81 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 82 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Troubleshooting 9128 A2 GB20 80 This chapter includes the following Problem Indicators on page 8 2 Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication on page 8 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit Troubleshooting Management Link Feature on page 8 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature on page 8 5 Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface Alarms on page 8 7 Viewing the Trap Event Log on page 8 14 Troubleshooting Tables on page 8 14 Device Problems Frame Relay PVC Problems ISDN DBM Problems Tests Available on page 8 18 Test Timeout Feature DBM Tests Starting and Stopping a Test on page 8 20 Aborting All Tests PVC Tests on page 8 22 PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity Test Call September 2002 8 1 8 Troubleshooting
418. onous terminal to the unit s COM port See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about the communication COM port m Modem port See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out and Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 6 3 6 Security and Logins Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port The modem port is already configured for dial in and asynchronous terminal access these are the default settings To limit dial in access via the modem port disable the Dial In Access configuration option Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port See Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about modem port options 6 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 6 Security and Logins Controlling ISDN Access ISDN Call Security FrameSaver units with the built in DBM limit access through the following methods m ISDN Call Security m Disabling ISDN Access The FrameSaver unit uses the Caller Identification Method to screen calls and avoid accidental or intentional disruption of network traffic The answering DBM only accepts calls with valid calling number identifiers or phone numbers When the ISDN DBM interface is enabled and Caller Identification Method is set to Caller ID the DBM takes advantage of ISDN service
419. ons Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Shows the active Network Address Translation NAT translations The general format of the show ip nat translations command is Pro Inside global Inside local 8 Outside local Outside global udp x x x xport x Xx x x port X X X Xx port X X X X port The first column Pro displays the Protocol of the port identifying the address The second column displays the Inside global IP address for one or more inside local IP addresses to the outside world The third column displays the Inside local IP address assigned to a host on the inside network The fourth column displays the Outside local IP address of an outside host as it appears to the inside network The fifth column displays the Outside global IP address assigned to a host on the outside network by its owner Whenever one of the IP addresses or the Protocol designation does not apply to a NAT table entry is displayed A protocol port is appended to IP addresses when NAPT is specified for that NAT entry show ip route ip address Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard This command shows the IP route table entry for the specified IP address If no IP address is specified the entire table is shown When the Next Hop IP Address is 0 0 0 0 the host is directly reachable on the interface The general format of the show ip route command will be as follows Dest IP Address Dest Subne
420. ons 4 70 Table 4 15 PVC Connection Options 3 of 4 Primary Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCl fora frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number For a DLCI that is IP Enabled IP appears in this field Payload Managed but not IP Enabled PM appears in this field 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number Alternate Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 ISDN Link Name Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the alternate destination link the to end of a from to link that is used for backup when the primary destination link or DLCI is out of service The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLC or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if ISDN Link Name has no DLCls defined the ISDN link name would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link ISDN Link Name Specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the destination of the connection This can be any non null link name configured on
421. ooting Send Pattern This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To send a pattern test on a link Main Menu Test 5 Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests If the selected DLCI is configured as Then And the default Rate Kbps setting is Standard Disruptive appears after Test 100 of CIR Multiplexed Non Disruptive appears after Test 1096 of CIR If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps Monitor Pattern This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To monitor a pattern test on a link Main Menu Test 5 Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Sync message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in these fields 8 24 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Connectivity Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops auto
422. or 000 cee es E 17 ISDN Modular Cable 0c eee eee E 17 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 ix Contents F Technical Specifications G Equipment List E to WTO PA atten Bee rae a AA G 1 E Cables naene eg Aaa ces fal aakay in Roatan he daha G 6 Index x September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience This document contains information needed to properly set up configure and verify operation of the FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier 9126 9126 II and 9128 I CSU DSU and 9126 II Router running firmware release 2 0 3 or above It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks Document Organization Section Description SLV Chapter 1 About the FrameSaver Identifies how the FrameSaver SLV 9126 9126 II and 9128 II CSU DSU and 9126 II Router fit into Paradyne s Service Level Management SLM solution and describes their features Basic Operation Chapter 2 User Interface and Shows how to navigate the menu driven user interface Chapter 3 Configuration Procedures Shows how to access and save configuration options Chapter 4 Configuration Options Provides configuration information for the FrameSaver SLV 9126 9126 1l and 9128 II CSU DSU and 9126 II Router Chapter 5 Configuring t
423. or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the modem port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the IP Address is all zeros the modem port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the system This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the modem port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 25 Modem Port Options
424. or multilink aggregate frame relay links if LMI is down on any of its constituent links nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI 7 25 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages 7 of 7 Message What It Indicates Timeslot Discovery in Progress Network 1 Time slot discovery is currently taking place to determine the time slots that will be used for frame relay traffic on the network interface This message only appears when the Time Slot Discovery option is enabled Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments and an LMI failure is detected on the network interface s frame relay link Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Two Level 1 users are already using the menu driven user interface only two sessions can be active at one time Test Call Active ISDN Link Name A test call is active on the specified frame relay link the link being the ISDN Link Name assigned in the ISDN Link Profile This message would only appear for models with the built in DBM Yellow at DSX 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX 1
425. or network 5 1 host redirect Redirect for host 5 2 net tos redirect Redirect for Type of Service TOS amp network 5 3 host tos redirect Redirect for Type of Service TOS amp host 8 0 echo Echo request ping 9 0 router advertisement Router discovery advertisements 10 0 router solicitation Router discovery solicitations 11 0 ttl exceeded TTL Time to Live 0 amp exceeded during transit Traceroute 11 1 reassembly timeout TTL Time to Live 0 amp exceeded during reassembly 12 0 general parameter problem IP header bad 12 1 option missing Parameter required but not present 12 2 no room for option Parameter required but no room 13 0 timestamp request Timestamp request 14 0 timestamp reply Timestamp reply 15 0 information request Information request 16 0 information reply Information reply 17 0 mask request Address mask request 18 0 mask reply Address mask reply September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations TCP Port Designations 9128 A2 GB20 80 Use the Transmission Control Protocol TCP port designations in Table C 16 TCP Port Designations when specifying a specific TCP port to be filtered Table C 16 TCP Port Designations TCP Port TCP Port Table Description 7 echo Echo 9 discard Discard 13 daytime Daytime 19 chargen Character generator 20 ftp
426. or reduced latency where groups of bytes are transmitted as soon as they are received rather than waiting for the entire frame to be collected before sending LMI Protocol Support Automatically detects and initializes the Local Management Interface LMI protocol type on the user data port Router Specific Features The following features only apply to the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II router Device Migration The FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 Router can be converted to a FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 CSU DSU with a firmware download In Band Router Management Permits the router to be managed via customer data PVCs and EDLCls by assigning an IP address for router management that is different from the IP address generally used for the network interface Inverse ARP for User Data Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support for user data as well as management data The router responds to Inverse ARP requests and can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver device at the far end of a customer PVC ARP information is retained for both customer data and management data September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 1 About the FrameSaver SLV CLI Access and Configuration Provides a router Command Line Interface CLI along with the menu driven user interface for configuring and managing the router It is accessed from the Main Menu via a direct COM port connection or Telnet The following features are configurable using the CLI
427. ort DLCls 1Port m Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 m No management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port 1 user data m A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls 1PPort m Auto Configuration is enabled on Port 1 m A Port 1 DLCI is created for each network DLCI and automatically cross connected to it m Payload management is configured for the network DLCI and assigned the Node IP Address 2MPorts m Auto configuration is enabled on both Port 1 and Port 2 only applies to models with m A multiplexed network DLCI containing three EDLCls is multiple data ports configured for Port 1 customer data Port 2 customer data and management data m PVC connections are configured between the network and port DLCls m A management PVC is configured on the network interface 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 9 4 Configuration Options 4 10 Discovery Mode Configuration Description NetOnly m Auto configuration of a network DLCI only no Port 1 or PVC connections are configured m No Port 1 PVC connection or management DLCI is configured Disable m No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration takes place The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually NOTE If the default setting 1MPort or 1PPort is not the setting required for your application change the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecti
428. oubleshooting TS management link Limiting Telnet Access Telnet access can be limited by Disabling Telnet access completely Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Access Management Link Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions Disabling TS Access Management Link access To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Link on page 6 8 B gt Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Access Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login on page 6 12 Assign an access level Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the Telnet session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3
429. ource wildcard any host source host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any host dest host ip icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port type code range end type code no access list access list num permit deny src ip src wildcara any host src host ip protocol src ip src wildcard any host src host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any host dest host ip icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port type code range end type code arp ip address mac address arp type no arp ip address mac address arp type arp timeout time no arp timeout time bridge crb bridge group acquire aging time aging time protocol span tree protocol priority span tree priority route route protocol no bridge crb bridge group acquire aging time aging time priority span tree priority route route protocol no bridge group bridge group no bridge group bridge group input type list in access list 200num output type list out access list 200num clear arp cache clear counters intf type intf num sub intf num clear ip nat translations default router ip address no default router ip address dns server ip address no dns server ip address domain name domain name no doma
430. owed for each SNMP community name Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the community name must be supplied gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access types 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Assign SNMP community Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a names community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read or allowed for the SNMP Read Write community names 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 6 10 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 6 Security and Logins Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses An additional level of security is provided by m Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit m Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit m Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed o
431. ox so that its DLC Is appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 Highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on the Custom History icon The NetScout Custom History window opens Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 10 16 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 5 Select History List from the View menu The History List window opens The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list History List 6 Highlight the desired set of user history variables and select the OK button Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables This may take some time so please be patient 7 Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu if desired 3D Bar is shown t Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 02 16 11 07 16 11 12 17 11 17 17 11 22 17 11 27 17 Wed Oct 21 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 E 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 uL 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 30
432. oy SLV reporting capability p gt Procedure 1 Type dvuhist f agentname user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined history files for the frame relay link Example dvuhist f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallas5ik udh The interval must be entered in seconds 2 Type dvuhist f agentname DLCI number user history table number config number of buckets interval download file udh to load user defined history files for a specific DLCI Example dvuhist f Dallas51 301 3 config 30 60 Dallas301 udh The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI For these examples user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3 on the History List See Step 5 on page 10 17 in Monitoring a DLCI s History Data to verify that the user defined history files have been loaded Refer to Installing UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 10 15 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Once the monitoring variables have been defined a problem DLCI can monitored pp Procedure To monitor user history data 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay radio button still selected select the Traffic radio button The appropriate icons appear 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list b
433. p Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure P gt Procedure To start and stop a loopback or a send pattern test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test Select an interface and test e g Network Data Port or ISDN PVC Tests and press Enter The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column Select the Port number and press Enter Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available test and is highlighted To start the test highlight Start under Command for the test you want to run and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Result column To stop the test press Enter to send the Stop command Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting Aborting All Tests Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting and Stopping a Test on page 8 20 p gt Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select Abo
434. pair installation documentation training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods m Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty m Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver Hotwire MVL NextEDGE OpenLane and Performance Wizard are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation GranDSLAM GrandVIEW ReachDSL and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other patents are pending A September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Contents About This G
435. peration rate of 10 Mb or 100 Mb conforming to ANSI IEEE 802 3 Additional FrameSaver SLV 9128 II Features The following features are unique to FrameSaver SLV 9128 II units 9128 A2 GB20 80 Multiple Data Ports Provides two data ports instead of one which have standard connectors so no special order cables are required Carrier Mounted Models For customers with high density requirements FrameSaver SLV 9128s and 9128 Ils can be ordered as multislot units called Network Access Modules NAMs for insertion in the 14 slot 9000 Series Access Carrier September 2002 1 9 1 About the FrameSaver SLV FrameSaver SLM Feature Set 1 10 A FrameSaver SLV unit with the advanced SLM feature set provides the following features in addition to those provided with the basic set TruePut Technology Using Frame Delivery Ratios FDR and Data Delivery Ratios DDR throughput within and above CIR as well as between CIR and EIR and above EIR can be measured precisely eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging Intelligent Service Level Verification Provides accurate throughput latency and availability measurements to determine network performance and whether service level agreements SLAs are being met along with SLA reporting RMON Alarms and Configurable Alarm Thresholds Provides the ability to change SLA parameter and RMON alarm thresholds via the OpenLane system to correct them in real time before the SLA is violated M
436. protocol has become active the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The protocol will not be updated after being initially discovered Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Auto On LMI Fail The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs This option is available for frame relay links on the Port and network interfaces Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from LMI status polls by attached DTE devices Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Standard Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D September 2002 4 61 4 Configuration Options 4 62 Table 4 13 Interface Frame Relay Options 2 of 3 Traffic Policing Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determ
437. ptember 2002 Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI 7 23 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 24 Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages 5 of 7 Message What It Indicates OOF at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the ISDN PRI interface An OOF is declared when two out of four frame synchronization bits are in error m Active Backup call was in progress m dle DBM was in Idle mode Possible reasons include m Incompatible framing format between the ISDN network and the FrameSaver unit m ISDN network cabling problem m ISDN network problem OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface Possible reasons include m Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit m Network cabling problem m T1 facility problem Path P Address Down DLCInnnn A path on the network interface is unavailable IP Address is the IP address of the path endpoint and nnnn is the DLCI which contains the path PLB Active Interface A Payload Loopback PLB is active on the specified interface Power Supply Fan Alarm 9000 Series Access Carrier only The power supply output voltage has dropped below the specified tolerance level required for the system Or the fan tray is not operating properly Primary Clock Failed A failure of the primary clock source configured for
438. ption to the Login ID and Password the CLI is not case sensitive Refer to Navigating the Router s CLI in Chapter 2 User Interface and Basic Operation for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 C 1 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations This appendix contains the following tables for commands m Table C 1 Pager Command m Table C 2 Access Control Commands m Table C 3 Configuration Commands m Table C 4 Interface Commands m Table C 5 IP Routing Commands m Table C 6 Bridge Commands m Table C 7 ARP Commands m Table C 8 NAT Commands m Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands m Table C 10 DHCP Relay Agent Commands m Table C 11 Filter Commands m Table C 12 Diagnostic Commands m Table C 13 Show Commands In addition the following tables are used in the commands above m Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex m Protocol and Port Designations Table C 15 ICMP Designations Table C 16 TCP Port Designations Table C 17 UDP Port Designations September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Pager Command C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations The pager command allows you to enable or disable screen paging for a CLI session and enter comments at the command line which is useful when adding comments within scripts Table C 1 Pager Command no pager Minimum Access Level modes Operator Command Mode All modes Allows you to control the flow of uninterrupted output
439. ptions Table 4 20 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 2 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password referred to as the login are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used is the same login used for an menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the session or t
440. put cannot be supported Recovery of Timer 102 Error handling procedure Retry the call Expired has been initiated as a result of the expiration of a timer 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 45 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 14 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 5 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Requested Channel 44 Circuit or channel Allow the DBM to Not Available requested cannot be provided by the other side of the interface automatically call using the alternate link if Auto Backup is enabled or manually select an alternate path for the call Requested Facility 69 Supplemental service No action is needed Not Implemented requested is not supported by this device Requested Facility 50 The supplementary service Arrange for the desired Not Subscribed requested cannot be capability provided by the network until user completes arrangement with its supporting networks Resource 47 No other cause in the No action is needed Unavailable resource unavailable class Unspecified applies for this resource unavailable event Response to 30 Status enquiry message No action is needed STATus ENQuiry received generating this message Service Option Not 79 No other cause in the No action is needed Implemented service or option not available class applies for this not implemented event Service Option 63 No other
441. r TS_Access_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models but the link can be enabled at any time Any valid network Management PVC created ona standard DLCI can be used When enabled a troubleshooting link can be accessed any time the service provider requests access An assigned security level can also control access When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link the link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen with the Note This PVC has been designated as the TS Access Management Link message NOTE The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already set up e g 980 Table 4 17 Node IP Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be Viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000
442. r N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 B 27 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 2 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 5 4 8 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFreeRunUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 4 H T N IP Top Listeners 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNDstIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 6 H T N IP Top Talkers 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNSrcIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 3 1 D DLCI CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciFrCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 69 41 1 71 D Tx DEs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciTxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 8 1 D Tx BECNs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrCircuitTxBECN 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 1 D Rx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Network Frame
443. r for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il Nx64 The base rate for the port is 64 Kbps Nx56 The base rate for the port is 56 Kbps Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Auto The port checks the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port If necessary the port automatically phase inverts the clock with respect to the transmitted data Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted dat
444. rame relay traffic Frame relay links DLCis and PVC connections can be configured on this port Synchronous Data The port is configured for standard TDM data and can be cross connected to a time slot on a T1 interface m No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated m The LED for the port will be held in an Off state m Existing cross connect assignments associated with the port are cleared 4 38 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 5 Max Port Rate Kbps Possible Settings 1536 2048 Default Setting 1536 Specifies the maximum clock rate for a user data port The data rate for this port is limited to the rate specified by this option so that the maximum rate supported by an attached DTE is not exceeded Display Conditions This option only appears when the Port Use is set to Frame Relay and if the unit has multiple data ports the selected port is Port 2 1536 The maximum port rate for the port is 1536 Kbps 2048 The maximum port rate for the port is 2048 Kbps Port Base Rate Kbps Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Specifies the base rate for the data port which is a multiple from 1 to 24 of the base rate specified by this option N is a number from 1 to 24 Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data This option does not appea
445. re NOTE In the pin assignment tables of this appendix if the pin number is not shown it is not being used The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver SLV 9126 without Ethernet 00000000 000000000 eh RE ME 000000000000 o00000000 PORT 1 DSX NET MOM DBM 98 16154 The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II with Ethernet and the 9126 II Router 000000000 00000000 Q 99000000 O o o00000000 ENET DSX NET MOM 02 17141a September 2002 E 1 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E 2 The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver SLV 9126 II with Ethernet and DBM PORT 1 ENET DSX NET MDM DBM 02 17141 The following illustration shows the rear panel of a 1 slot FrameSaver SLV 9128 lII TEA MODEM DBM NET ENET CR e 00 16840 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The following illustration shows the rear panel of the carrier mounted single T1 dual port FrameSaver SLV 9128 II O SINGLE 4 F T T T 5 gt 4mzm xwo0 S05 200 Amz 00000000 O00000000 00000000 4000 Q
446. reen of the Control branch or Unknown if the device is not a FrameSaver IP Address 000 000 000 001 The IP address of the unit at the far end 255 255 255 255 of the path Status The status of the path Active m The path is operational Inactive m The path is not operational Discovery Source The source of the path definition m Static m The path was entered using the IP m 000 000 000 001 255 255 255 255 Path List Static screen m This is the IP address of the FrameSaver unit that provided the path September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu s Status PVC Connection Status The PVC Connection Status screen shows all PVC connections and management links configured for the unit The source and primary destination are shown along with an alternate destination for backup When a primary destination DLCI was assigned to a Backup Group the Backup Group designation appears next to the DLCI number In the example below DLCls 502 and 504 had been assigned to Backup Group A PVC Connection Status Screen Example main status connections 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 13 2001 23 32 Page 1 of 2 PVC CONNECTION STATUS Source Primary Destination Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCTI Link DLCI EDLCI Status Link DLCI EDLCI Status Port 1 201 Net1 FR1 300 PM Active Port 2 202 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Por
447. ress to be identified with the ping Display Conditions This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to Use Internal Route Automatic The source IP address is The interface IP address if one exists else The node IP address if one exists else The first available address in the address table Special The entered IP address is shown as the source When Special is specified and additional field is displayed that allows you to enter an IP address 000 000 000 001 126 255 255 255 or 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Encapsulation Available Settings Routed Default Setting Routed Specifies the IP encapsulation used by the data stream This read only field specifies that the IP encapsulation used is RFC 1490 RFC 2427 routed Network Level Protocol IDentifier NLPID encapsulation and not SubNetwork Attachment Point SNAP encapsulation Display Conditions This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to Use Internal Route Routed The encapsulation is routed NLPID Packet Size Available Settings 36 4096 Default Setting 100 Specifies the size of the ping packet including the IP header 20 bytes and the ICMP header 8 bytes 1 4096 Packet size Iteration Count Available Settings 1 999999 Default Setting 5 Specifies the number of pings to send 1 999999 Number of pings Inter Ping Delay Available Settings 1 900 Default
448. retrieving Then SLV statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file E File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful E File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session t LMI packet capture data Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu Control LMI Packet Capture Utility LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active 2 Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following will display for the file File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture Utility was not readable Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 5 Close the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting 7 80 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Turning Off the System Alarm Relay 9128 A2 GB20 80 For carrier mounted FrameSaver units an alarm system relay is provided by the 9000 Series Access Carrier This relay activates a light or buzzer when an alarm condition is detected in one of the FrameSaver units Once the alarm relay is connected enabling the System Alarm Relay option activates this feature see Table 4 5 General System Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Once activated the relay is turned off in one of the following ways m The alarm condition that activated the relay no l
449. rface only Ports Generates these trap messages for DLCls on a user data port only DBM For units with an ISDN DBM installed generates trap messages on DLCls for the DBM only All Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces None No DLCI trap messages are generated DLCI Traps on Interfaces Filter Selection Field Possible Settings Normal Filter Default Setting Normal Controls whether the traps on the interfaces specified in the DLCI Traps on Interfaces configuration option are sent regardless of their cause Normal Generates trap messages specified by DLCI Traps on Interfaces regardless of cause Filter Prevents traps from being generated for the interfaces specified by DLCI Traps on Interfaces if their cause is the loss of the interface connection or LMI RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups of RMON1 when a selected variable s configured threshold is exceeded Enable Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded ISDN Dial Control Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether dialCtlPeerCallSetup and dialCtIPeerCalllnformation even
450. ributes and apply or remove bridge groups from an interface or sub interface To show the bridge database or spanning tree topology see Table C 13 Show Commands Table C 6 Bridge Commands 1 of 2 bridge crb bridge group acquire aging time aging time protocol span tree protocol priority span tree priority route route protoco no bridge crb bridge group acquire aging time aging time priority span tree priority route route protocol yy Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config A user can enable or disable simultaneous bridging and routing and configure attributes associated with a bridging group Bridge group 1 is created by default with a priority of 32768 and configured as a learning bridge utilizing the IEEE 802 1 spanning tree protocol Simultaneous routing and bridging is disabled by default Once concurrent routing bridging is enabled you must configure an explicit bridge route for any protocol to be routed on interfaces in a bridge group Example bridge crb 1 route ip crb Enable or disable concurrent routing and bridging on the device bridge group Bridge group 1 is created by default If a bridge group is specified one of the following attributes must be specified acquire Configure a learning bridge that is capable of dynamically learning new stations This argument is configured by default on all bridge groups The no bridge command is not accepted for th
451. rimary clock source returns Send Pattern Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 2 A Send Pattern test is currently active on the specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link Send Pttn Active Interface A Send Pattern test is active on the specified interface using a selected test pattern This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay SLV Latency Exceeded DLCI nnnn frame relay link1 2 3 The measured latency of SLV communication responses from the remote unit on this DLCI is excessive so the DLCI has been declared unsuitable for normal multiplexed PVC operation DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn frame relay linkt 33 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is not suitable for user data When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted while this condition exists When an ISDN DBM is present this message only appears for individual and aggregate multilink frame relay links not constituent links of a frame relay multilink Suboptimal Link Rate frame relay link ISDN DBM only The specified frame relay multilink has failed to achieve the configured Maximum Link Rate for the link This message appears f
452. rmation is passed to the router over the management PVC so the router can learn routes to FrameSaver SLV and FLEX devices Node IP information should be set up see Configuring Node IP Information on page 4 74 B gt Procedure To set up your router and FrameSaver SLV CSU DSU so that the router can learn routes to FrameSaver devices 1 Configure the router to receive RIP For example if using a Cisco router you would use the commands config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 then ct1 z WR 2 Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 3 Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs 4 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out and Save the configuration Refer to Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options and Table 4 18 Management PVC Options for configuration information 4 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the unit its location and a contact for the unit as well as to set the system clock Main Menu Control System Information The following information is available for viewing Save any entries or changes If the selection is Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification o
453. rol lead 7 11 S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval 4 28 saving configuration options 3 6 scheduled activations 9 8 9 9 Scratchpad Configuration 3 3 screen area 2 5 function keys area 2 5 how to navigate 2 6 scrolling through valid selections 2 9 Secondary Clock Failed 7 24 7 25 8 12 Source 4 32 security 1 5 2 2 2 9 3 5 6 1 router 5 14 SNMP NMS options 4 87 selecting afield 2 9 from amenu 2 8 Self Test Results messages 7 19 Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure 4 44 and monitor test pattern 8 34 Pattern 8 24 serial number NAM 7 3 server DHCP 5 11 Service A Profile ID SPID 4 45 F 7 service level management 1 11 management SLM 1 1 reports 11 6 verification configuring 4 28 statistics 7 52 verifier SLV 1 1 IN 12 Session Access Level 4 85 6 6 6 8 ending 2 3 starting 2 2 Set DE 4 78 setting Date amp Time system clock 4 5 setting up auto configuration 4 8 DBM 4 12 in band management 5 15 ISDN link profiles 4 49 modem 4 6 SNMP trap managers 4 87 show CLI commands C 25 configuration command 5 16 SIG LED 7 10 SLA 1 10 1 11 SLIP 4 100 4 102 SLM xi 1 11 service level management 1 1 OpenLane 9 2 SLV service level verifier 1 1 configuring 4 28 Delivery Ratio 4 29 DLCI Down on Timeout 4 29 Packet Size 4 30 performance statistics 7 52 Round Trip Latency Clearing Event Threshold 4 30 Error Threshold 4 30 Sample Interval secs 4 28 Synch
454. ronization Role 4 28 Timeout Error Event Threshold 4 29 type 4 28 smurf attack prevention 5 15 SNMP assigning community names access levels 6 10 limiting access 6 9 6 11 Management 4 83 6 9 NMS security options 4 87 Number of Managers 4 87 setting up Trap Managers 4 87 trap event log 7 69 8 14 Traps 4 88 downloading B 2 setting up DBM to send 4 18 standards B 8 supported 8 2 validation 4 76 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index software changing 7 79 ISDN BRI DBM 7 78 downloading 7 75 revision DBM 7 4 NAM 7 3 Source DLCI 4 68 EDLCI 4 69 Link 4 68 Spacebar 2 6 specifications technical F 1 SPID 4 45 F 7 Standard_out RIP 1 5 standards compliance for SNMP Traps B 8 starting asession 2 2 atest 8 20 statistics 1 10 7 50 DBM call 7 67 elements 11 3 selecting performance intervals for display 7 64 uploading to an NMS 7 80 Status Activation Certificates 9 7 Call 7 40 checking scheduled activations 9 9 DBM interface 7 38 DLCI 7 29 Enquiry LMI 4 23 4 63 Health and 7 20 information 7 18 LED 7 8 Line 7 39 menu branch 2 4 ping 8 38 PVC connection 7 33 7 35 test messages 7 27 timeslot assignment 7 36 Stop Bits 4 97 stopping atest 8 20 Subnet Mask 4 78 4 94 4 99 4 102 4 103 Node 4 74 suggestions user documentation A summary Activation Certificate report 9 9 network report 11 7 Switch Type 4 46 9128 A2 GB20 80 switching between screen areas
455. ror Event 4 23 4 62 N3 LMI Clearing Event 4 23 4 63 NAM 1 9 Name 4 77 1 or 2 Access 6 10 Access 4 83 4 84 Community 4 83 NAPT 5 8 configuration example 5 8 and NAT 5 10 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index NAT 5 5 applications supported 5 5 CLI commands C 12 configuration example 5 6 and NAPT 5 10 with DHCP server 5 12 navigating the screens 2 6 navigation keys 2 10 Net Link Port Use 4 96 4 100 NetOnly mode 4 10 NetScout Manager Plus NMS support 1 12 NMS support 1 1 Network access module 1 9 Address Port Translation NAPT 5 8 Address Translation NAT 5 4 assigning data port to time slots 4 59 cable pin assignments E 15 Com Link Down 7 23 8 10 configuring the interface 4 34 DLCI records options 4 64 Health Concord reports 11 1 Health installation and setup 11 2 Initiated Data Channel Loopback 4 42 Initiated DCLB 4 36 Initiated LLB 4 35 4 47 Initiated PLB 4 36 4 47 interface control leads 7 11 router 5 2 interface LEDS 7 10 interface options 4 34 latency 1 10 reference time 1 10 timeslot assignments 7 36 NMS IP Address 4 87 4 89 6 11 IP Validation 4 87 6 11 OpenLane management system 1 11 SNMP security options 4 87 Node IP configuration option tables 4 74 IP Address 4 74 Subnet Mask 4 74 NSP 4 21 Number of Managers 4 87 6 11 Trap Managers 4 88 September 2002 IN 9 Index O odd parity 4 97 OID object identification user history file 10
456. rs If the setting is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select m No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None m Yes The link designation is removed and the option is set to None and the link and its DLCI will be deleted None Disables or does not specify a TS Access Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC Display Conditions This selection only appears when a dedicated management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to Standard September 2002 4 75 4 Configuration Options 4 76 Table 4 17 Node IP Options 3 of 3 TS Management Link Access Level Available Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP session when the service provider is using the TS Access Management Link Display Conditions This option only appears when m Service Type on the Easy Install screen is set to Frame Relay m TS Access Management Link is set to a PVC name NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 4 20 Telnet and FTP Session Options Telnet and FTP sessions on this lin
457. rt All Tests and press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 8 21 8 Troubleshooting PVC Tests PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m lf the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Also the Connectivity test would not appear Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with ISDN backup capability with the multiplexed DLCI 550 selected If a standard DLCI was selected Disruptive rather than Non Disruptive would be displayed after Test Also the Connectivity test would not appear PVC Tests Screen Example main test network_pvc 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 NETWORK PVC TESTS DLCI Number 550 Test Non Disruptive Command Status Result PVC Loopback Start Inactive 0 00 00 Send Pattern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Monitor P
458. rt if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 23 Ethernet Management Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options p gt Procedure To download software 1 2 3 9128 A2 GB20 80 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd system to change to the system directory Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful The file is loaded into system memory nam ocd File Transfer Failed The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit Invalid fil A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this time See Changing Software on page 7 79 to activate the newly downloaded software September 2002 7 77 7 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software 7 78 A separate download to update PRI DBM functionality is not necessa
459. rt to network or DSX 1 4 59 time slots 4 51 Timeout Inactivity 4 86 4 98 4 101 Test 8 19 timers setting backup 4 17 timeslot assignments DSX 1 7 37 network 7 36 status 7 36 Trace Log LMI 8 6 trademarks A Traffic Policing 1 7 4 62 Training A transferring data 7 80 Transmit Clock Invert 4 39 Source 4 39 Transmit Timing 4 35 Trap Dial Out 4 92 Disconnect 4 92 Event Log 1 7 7 69 8 14 Managers Number of 4 88 IN 14 September 2002 Traps authentificationFailure B 9 dialControl B 17 dialCtlPeerCall B 17 DLCI 4 91 Enterprise Specific 4 90 B 13 General 4 89 IP SLV Availability 4 93 latency 4 93 Link 4 90 Link Interfaces 4 90 linkUp and linkDown B 10 RMON 4 91 RMON Specific B 16 SNMP and dial out options 4 6 4 88 standards B 8 supported 8 2 warmStart B 9 Trend reports 11 7 troubleshooting 8 1 creating a management link 4 74 device problems 8 14 frame relay PVC problems 8 16 ISDN BRI DBM problems 8 17 management link 8 5 PVC 1 7 tables 8 14 TruePut technology 1 10 TS Access Management Link 4 74 4 75 Access Level 4 76 6 8 limiting Telnet access 6 6 6 8 TS Management SNMP Validation 4 76 TST LED 7 9 TTL 7 49 turning off system alarm relay 7 81 TXD control lead 7 11 Type Access 4 88 U UDP port designations C 34 UNI 4 23 4 62 4 63 upgrade ISDN BRI DBM 7 78 upgrading system software 7 77 uploading current router configuration 5 16 uploading
460. ry a PRI upgrade is incorporated in the unit s program code However if the FrameSaver unit has a BRI DBM the program code must be upgraded separately To upgrade a FrameSaver unit s BRI DBM program code you must transfer the dbmprog ocd file in the Dial Backup Module directory using the put command pp Procedure To perform a BRI DBM upgrade 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading 2 Type bin to enter binary transfer mode 3 Type cd dbm to change to the Dial Backup Module directory NOTE If the FrameSaver unit is not equipped with a DBM or the DBM does not contain any downloadable software the message dbm no such file or directory appears 4 Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the domprog ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then DBM Download Required Errors were detected during the DBM download The dbmprog ocd file will need to be downloaded again dbmprog ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful dbmprog ocd File Transfer Failed The download was not successful Possible cause A bad or invalid file or the wrong checksum A different domprog ocd file will need to be downloaded for the DBM to become operational Repeat the step or end the FTP session 5 Close the FTP session 6 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the DBM Software Revision
461. ry OID cross reference and Table B 16 Alarm OID Cross Reference for an RMON alarm OID cross reference B 26 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 1 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 1 Link Speed MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 All DLCI LMI Rx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 1 All DLCI LMI Tx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Rx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 2 P Protocol Octets for 11 protocols MIB RMON II RFC 2021 Tag protocolDistStatsOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI numbe
462. s Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong Ta ming OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscaras 15 MnS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Tx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscaras 15 MPS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Rx Total D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Se Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs HSS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link B 20 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table B 11 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Tag devFrExtLinkTotal LMIErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Tx Total Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs lo mba OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Rx Overruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns lg mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Tx Underruns D MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1
463. s m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A2 201 September 2002 G 1 G Equipment List G 2 Description Model Feature Number FrameSaver SLV Units continued FrameSaver SLV 9126 II T1 remote site unit with m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem m ISDN BRI DBM m Support for up to 64 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable RJ49C BRI ISDN V Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A2 202 FrameSaver SLV 9126 11 T1 remote site unit with m Diagnostic Feature Set m Integral modem Support for up to 64 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A2 211 FrameSaver SLV 9126 II T1 Router with m Diagnostic Feature Set m Integral modem Support for up to 8 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A2 214 FrameSaver SLV 9126 II T1 Router with m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem m Support for up to 8 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A2 224 Sep
464. s reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded m The type of message either Status or Status Enquiry from the captured packet and the number of bytes in the packet m The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured packet and the DLCI number for the packet m The type of information contained in the captured packet either Sequence Number Exchange or Full Status Report m The send and receive rcv sequence numbers from the captured packet 0 255 m On the Packets Received side of the screen PVC status for up to ten DLCls can be shown It shows the DLCI number its active bit status and if Standard LMI is running the DLCI s CIR value 8 6 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Alarms 8 Troubleshooting The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu Status 5 System and Test Status Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do AIS at DSX 1 For the DSX 1 interface the attached DTE is transmitting an AIS For the DSX 1 interface check the DTE attached to the interface AIS at Network 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is being received by the interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal For the
465. s Lost MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 22 1 D Rx DEs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 37 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRmtOffFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 39 1 D Network Frames Offered In CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRmtOffFrInCir 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask B 28 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 3 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 41 1 D Network Frames Dropped In CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciDropOffFrInCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 43 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRmtOffFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 45 1 D Network Frames Lost Above CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRmtDropFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 55 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciDropFrCirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 57 1
466. s are organized Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be downloaded describes the unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features and describes the RMON specific user history groups and alarm and event defaults Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Describes the configuration options available for the router and the minimum access level for each command Appendix D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Provides a summary of router CLI commands showing syntax and defaults Appendix E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Shows the rear panel tells what cables are needed and provides pin assignments for interfaces and cables Appendix F Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Appendix G Equipment List Equipment List Index Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals Technical Glossary September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Product Related Documents 9128 A2 GB20 80 About This Guide Document Number Document Title Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation 9000 A2 GN19 FrameSaver SLV ISDN Installation Instructions 9000 A2 GN1D
467. s being set up but all the logins were assigned either Level 2 or Level 3 access Set up at least one login with Access Level 1 so the unit can be configured Command Complete Configuration has been saved or all tests have been aborted No action needed Connection Refused Seen atan FTP terminal Two menu driven user interface sessions are already in use when a Telnet session was attempted Wait and try again Destination Not Unique Destination entered is already being used Enter another destination indicator DLCI in connection Delete connection first User tried to delete a DLCI that was part of a connection m No action needed or m Delete the connection then delete the DLCI DLCI Number Already Exists The DLCI number entered on the DLCI Record Entry screen has already been created so is not unique Enter another DLCI number DLCI Number Reserved User tried to designate a special troubleshooting DLCI No action is needed September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 Table 7 6 Device Messages 2 of 6 7 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do Duplicate DLCI Number DLCI number entered is not unique for the frame relay link No action needed previous contents of the DLCI number field is restored File Transfer Complete Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was
468. s can be copied to a host to provide a backup To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver node program files fo a FrameSaver node and User History data from a FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer m You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands and to access the LMI packet capture data However you can retrieve the data file for the user history reports regardless of access level m You cannot put a configuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring Collected Data on page 7 80 m A data file uhbcfull
469. s for network backup and Calling Number Identification Service CNIS to provide backup security ISDN assures the integrity of calling party identifiers The DBM uses the calling party identifier to identify the calling unit and switches PVC connections as specified by the user No additional security is required When the ISDN DBM interface is enabled and Caller Identification Method is set to Proprietary the DBM queries the originating unit for its Local Phone Number to identify the calling unit If the returned number is in one of the unit s Inbound Calling IDs the call is accepted If not or if the queried unit does not respond within five seconds the unit drops the call See Caller Identification Method in Table 4 11 ISDN Link Profile Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information Disabling ISDN Access B gt Procedure 9128 A2 GB20 80 To disable ISDN access 1 Select the ISDN Physical options Main Menu Configuration ISDN Physical 2 Set Interface Status to Disable 3 Save your change See Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about ISDN BRI or PRI DBM configuration options September 2002 6 5 6 Security and Logins Controlling Telnet or FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on a service provider s tr
470. se enterpriseMissedSLV m devFrExtDlcilflndex Received SLV communications Down 16 devFrExt mib have been missed SLV Timeout devErExtDIciDIci Sa Threshold has been devFrExt mib i RAE String ae ela SLV down on ifString due to s devFrExt mib excessive SLV packet loss Total devLastTrapString SLV packets lost is numLost 7 devHealthAndStatus 5 enterpriseMissedSLV mib SLV Timeout Error Event has Up 116 been cleared String SLV up on SifString because SLV communication was reestablished Total SLV packets lost is ShumLost enterprisePath iflndex RFC 1573 A path on the network interface Down 19 devLastTrapString has become unavailable devHealthAndStatus String mib Path xxx xxx xxx xxx Down DLCI nnnn enterprisePathUp 20 iflndex RFC 1573 A path on the network interface devLastTrapString has become available devHealthAndStatus String mib Path xxx xxx xxx xxx Up DLCI nnnr enterprisePrimary devLastTrapString Operating software has detected ClockFail 1 devHealthAndStatus that the primary clock source has mib failed enterprisePrimary ClockFailClear 101 String Primary clock failed Operating software has detected that the primary clock source is operational again String Primary clock restored enterpriseRMON ResetToDefault 13 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib All RMON related option changes have been reset to their defau
471. selected Network field 4 Repeat Step 3 until all desired time slots are assigned 5 Save the configuration Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface DSX 1 time slots are assigned by channel allocation where you specify individual time slots The DSX 1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX 1 time slots to the network interface see Table 4 8 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options Value Meaning Nit It represents time slot tt of the selected network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than a DSX 1 time slot so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned DSX 1 tt Slot tt of the DSX 1 interface is assigned to the network interface time slot identified right above it Nit 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 53 4 Configuration Options DSX 1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example Page 1 main config tslot_assign dsx 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 DSX 1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS Page 1 of 2 N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 DSX 1 01 DSX 1 02 DSX 1 03 DSX 1 04 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 DSX 1 09 DSX 1 01 Available Available Available Available Available Available N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Ctrl a
472. ser Defined DLCI DLCI number for trap being assigned Stats Type PARADYNE Trap Variable Trap variable to be configured Key1 The iflndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1 Key2 DLCI number same as DLCI above Type Absolute or Delta radio button Rising Falling or Both radio button Threshold Value that will trigger a trap Latency MIB variables should be Absolute all others should be Delta Generally Rising is selected 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add this alarm 6 Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCls Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Creating History Files 9128 A2 GB20 80 Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for each interface An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored Additional user history tables are created using the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs Object IDs to be monitored into the unit OpenLane provides several useful examples including three files containing a complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored one for a DLCI one for a fr
473. sions The number of delayed first transmissions due to the line being busy 7 68 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Trap Event Log The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log The following log example describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and for the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the Health and Status Messages on page 7 20 Main Menu Status gt Trap Event Log Trap Event Log Screen Example main status event_log 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 TRAP EVENT LOG Total Trap Events 535 Time Elapsed Since Event Event Od 23 59 59 Change in Frames Discarded due to Inbound Resource Errors on Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 105 Change in Total LMI Errors on Network T1 frame relay link Net1 FR1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 59 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 up DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 down Primary clock failed Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 LMI down Network T1 frame relay link Net1 FR1 LMI down Network T1 down Unit reset ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Up to 12 trap events can be displayed on a screen the most current first Page down PgDn to view less current trap events
474. smitted to the DTE Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead 4 40 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options 4 of 5 Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings When Port 1 or Port Use is set to Frame Relay Disable Local When Port 2 or Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Disable DTPLB DCLB Both Default Setting Disable Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable When Port 1 or Port Use is set to Frame Relay Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the data terminal equipment attached to the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 as specified by V 54 Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback When Port 2 or Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Allows local Data Terminal Loopbacks DTPLBs and remote Data Channel Loopbacks DCLBs to be controlled by the DTE connected to this port Display Conditions This option does not appear when Port Type is set to X 21 Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control Local Data Terminal Loopbacks DTPLBs and remote Data Channel Loopbacks DCLBs DTPLB The DTE attached to the port controls DTPLBs via circuit LL CCITT 1
475. st box below the Name and IP Address headings If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar to the far right of the screen Applicable configuration and administration icons appear in the box below the application bar Help w Application 4 Admin Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Select the Add button down the center of the screen Minimally enter the following Agent name IP address Enter 1 for the frame relay logical interface to be monitored Properties File Select paradyne Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent discover its DLCls and return to the Configuration Manager main window The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box with its DLCls in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen Select the Test button fourth button down center of the screen to make sure you can communicate with the agent Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 10 4 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Verifying Domains and Groups 9128 A2 GB20 80 gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manag
476. st of devices that can be reached by their IP addresses for Service Level Management purposes The list is displayed in IP address order and includes both static addresses entered using the IP Path List Static configuration screen see Configuring the IP Path List in Chapter 4 Configuration Options and paths discovered as packets are received from other FrameSaver units This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay IP Path Connection Status Screen Example main status path 9128 II Device Name Node A 03 12 2002 05 00 Net1 FR1 IP PATH CONNECTION STATUS Page 1 of 2 DLCI 201 Device Name IP Address Status Discovery Source Poughkeepsie 135 026 002 Active 135 026 002 005 New York 135 026 002 InActive 135 026 002 005 Boston 135 026 002 Active 135 026 002 005 Los Angeles 135 026 002 Active 135 026 002 005 Chicago 135 026 002 Active 135 026 002 005 San Francisco 135 026 002 Active 135 026 002 005 Milwaukee 135 026 002 Active 135 026 002 005 Unknown 137 010 010 Active Static Miami 137 010 010 Active Static Orlando 137 010 010 Active Static ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit NextDLCI PrevDLCI 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 31 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 32 Table 7 11 IP Path Connection Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 through 1007 The IP Enabled DLCI Device Name Up to 20 ASCII The name of the device configured using characters the System Information sc
477. successful make sure both ends of the modem cable are properly seated and secured Then verify that the modem was configured correctly see Setting Up the Modem in Chapter 4 Configuration Options 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 71 7 Operation and Maintenance ISDN DBM Operation The following sections only apply to units with an ISDN DBM Forcing Backup Disruptive Placing a Test Call Nondisruptive Verifying ISDN Lines Verifying That Backup Can Take Place Forcing Backup Disruptive 7 72 Use this procedure to force backup when network maintenance is planned when equipment problems are reported or when testing the backup path whenever data needs to be forced from the primary destination interface to the alternate destination typically from the T1 network to the ISDN gt Procedure 1 Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles are set up correctly Auto Backup is enabled and the ISDN interface is enabled see Setting Up Dial Backup in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Have someone at the far end disconnect the network cable to initiate backup Verify that backup is taking place See Verifying That Backup Can Take Place on page 7 74 NOTE When an alarm requiring backup is received backup can be manually controlled by enabling or disabling the Auto Backup option see Step 2 Have the far end network cable reconnected to return to standard operation September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation an
478. sulation type encapsulation protocol Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Serial Specifies the type of encapsulation on an interface Example encapsulation frame relay ietf encapsulation type Specifies Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface The default is frame relay encapsulation protocol Specifies RFC 1490 encapsulation protocol on the serial interface The default is ietf September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 4 Interface Commands 3 of 3 no ip unnumbered null 0 Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config subif Enables or disables IP processing on a serial sub interface without assigning an explicit address The no ip unnumbered command removes any IP address assigned to the interface and disables IP processing on the interface The default is that IP processing is disabled Example ip unnumbered When an interface IP address and subnet mask are deleted via the no ip unnumbered command any routing entries with a Next Hop Router address that fall within the interface s address range are deleted automatically no frame relay interface dlci dlci num Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config subif Specifies or removes a DLCI on a sub interface configured for frame relay encapsulation Only one DLCI may be configured per sub interface E
479. t 9128 A2 GB20 80 A FrameSaver SLV unit with the basic diagnostic feature set provides the following m Easy Installation Provides a straightforward installation menu that requires minimal configuration to get the unit up and running quickly and to set up remote configuration and management via Telnet access from the NOC Network Operations Center m Frame Relay Aware Management Supports diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network The unit s frame relay capability also supports Inband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive diagnostics CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network PVC Router Independence Unique diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity is not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters m Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support so the frame relay router at one end of a management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC Standard RIP Routing Information Protocol allows the router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to that FrameSaver unit m Security Provides m
480. t 1 100 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 2 204 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Mgmt PVC Tampa Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 2 206 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 207 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 208 Net1 FR1 502A Active Colorado 400 Inactive Port 1 209 Net1 FR1 504A Inactive Colorado 302 Active Port 1 210 Net1 FR1 505 Inactive Tampa 304 Active Net1 FR1 ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp For units with ISDN backup capability the DBM provides backup support through the unit s ISDN DBM interface For units without ISDN backup capability an alternate network DLCI can be used to backup user data For additional information about the Alternate Destination fields see Configuring PVC Connections in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Ifthe No PVC Connections message appears instead of a list of PVC connections no PVC connections have been configured yet 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 33 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 34 Table 7 12 PVC Connection Status 1 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates Link Identifies the cross connection of DLCls configured for the unit Net1 FR1 m Source destination is frame relay link 1 on Network 1 Port 1 or Port 2 m User data port Port 1 or Port 2 if a FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II Mgmt PVC Name m Virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit where Name is the link name DLCI 16 to 1007 For standard DLCls Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a
481. t Definitions 9128 A2 GB20 80 Select Class of Service Definitions from the System menu then PgDn or PgUp to display or change the Code Point definitions for a Class of Service ID See Configuring Class of Service Definitions on page 4 25 for instructions Table 4 3 Code Point Definitions Code Pnt Possible Settings 000000 111111 Default Setting None This read only field shows the possible Code Points Code Points are described in RFC 2474 ID Possible Settings 1 7 Default Setting 1 This read only field shows the ID associated with the Name field If you change a name in a Name field on this screen and select Save the ID changes to match the name Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Default Setting Default The Name field specifies the Class of Service to which you want to assign the Code Point ASCII Text Specifies one of the Class of Service Names entered on the Class of Service Definitions screen September 2002 4 27 4 Configuration Options Configuring Service Level Verification Options SLV options are selected from the System menu see Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options Main Menu Configuration System Service Level Verification Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options 1 of 3 SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 10 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV dev
482. t Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer etc resulting from an attempt to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number Up to 5 alternate call directories can be set up but only one at a time can be used When Call Retry is enabled the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed after one additional try then the specified alternate directory s telephone number is called None Does not dial out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory Directory Number A in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories inclusive Latency Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Latency Threshold Alarm causes the generation of a Latency Threshold Exceeded Trap Enable Sends trap messages for Latency Threshold Alarm events Disable Does not send trap messages for Latency Threshold Alarm events IP SLV Availability Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Path Unavailability condition causes the generation of an IP SLV Availability Trap Enable Sends trap messages for Path Unavailability events
483. t Mask Next Hop IP Addr Interface X X X X X X X X X X X X interface X X X X X X X X X X X X interface ip address Specific IP address for route information display September 2002 C 27 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 13 Show Commands 4 of 4 show ip traffic Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the IP statistics for the device show spanning tree Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the devices spanning tree topology C 28 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Ethernet Type Codes C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Use Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex when specifying the filter applied to incoming Ethernet packets by Type Code Many of the Type Codes listed below are distributed by Xerox Corporation Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex 1 of 2 Type Code Description Type Code Description 0000 05DC IEEE802 3 Length Field 803E DEC Unassigned 010101FF Experimental 803F DEC LAN Traffic Monitor 0200 Xerox PUP see 0A00 8040 8042 DEC Unassigned 0201 PUP Addr Trans see 0A01 8044 Planning Research Corp 0600 Xerox NS IDP 8046 8047 AT amp T 0800 DOD IP 8049 ExperData 0801 X 75 Internet 805B Stanford V Kernel exp 0802 NBS Internet 805C Stanford V Kernel prod 0803 ECMA Internet 805D Evans a
484. t supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported m MIBII RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 m DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 m Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 m Enterprise MIB m Dial Control MIB using SMIv2 RFC 2128 m RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 m RMON Version 2 MIB RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide Web site p gt Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com 2 Select Technical Support 3 Select Management Information Base MIBs The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS application software Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional download information B 2 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults System Group mib 2 This section provides the system object identifier and system description for the System Group for the FrameSaver unit which is an SNMPv1 MIB FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 The following is the system description sysDescr system 1 for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver unit PARADYNE T1 FrameSaver SLV Model 9126 9126 11 9126 IIR 9128 II S W Release MM mm
485. t1 Net1 The secondary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX 1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is enabled Internal The secondary clock is the internal clock DBM The secondary clock is derived from the DBM This selection only appears if the DBM is installed and enabled September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Table 4 5 General System Options 3 of 3 System Alarm Relay Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether an alarm condition for the unit will activate the system alarm relay The alarm relay is deactivated when the condition causing the alarm is corrected If more than one alarm condition is present the alarm relay remains active until all alarm conditions are cleared You can also deactivate an alarm via the System Alarm Relay Cut Off selection from the Control menu however the alarm itself is not cleared When another alarm condition is detected the alarm is reactivated again requiring another manual deactivation of the alarm relay Display Conditions This option only appears for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II installed in the 9000 Series Access Carrier Alarm conditions are m Alarm Indication Signal AIS received at the Network DSX 1 or PRI interface Continuous Loss of Signal LOS condition at the Network DSX 1 or PRI interface
486. ta Back to Back Operation Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected via a leased line network or simulation so a point to point configuration can be implemented m Enhanced Ping Operation FrameSaver devices can check connectivity and roundtrip response time to any remote device in either direction via the FrameSaver internal management network or the data path m Payload Management Any standard non management DLCI can be designated as payload managed providing management directly from a user data PVC and support for Telnet ping SNMP and FTP Optional ISDN Backup FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9126 II CSU DSUs can be equipped with a BRI DBM which supports up to two channels The channels may have different destinations The DBM may be field installed in the FrameSaver SLV 9126 CSU DSU and must be factory installed in the 9126 I CSU DSU FrameSaver SLV 9128 II 1 slot units can be equipped with a PRI DBM which supports up to 23 B channels or a BRI DBM Carrier mounted FrameSaver SLV 9128 II NAMs support a PRI DBM only When an ISDN BRI or PRI DBM Basic Rate Interface or Primary Rate Interface Dial Backup Module is installed the following ISDN backup features are provided Provides automatic dial backup through the ISDN for data when primary frame relay network or access line failures occur then automatically restores data to the primary route when service returns to normal Backup is supported regardless of whether
487. tal number 1 6 Loopback 8 23 Management 4 77 total number dedicated 1 6 name 4 75 4 89 tests 8 22 troubleshooting problems 8 16 Q quality of service 4 66 9128 A2 GB20 80 Index R ratios FDR and DDR 1 10 remote loopbacks 8 31 8 33 Repeater Loopback 8 29 reports certificate summary 9 9 Network Health 11 7 reset last time 7 19 resetting statistics 7 51 the unit 8 3 unit default configuration options 8 4 restoring current router configuration 5 16 restoring communication with improperly configured unit 8 4 retrieving statistics 7 80 Return Enter key 2 6 revision software and hardware 7 3 7 4 RFC 1213 and 1573 B 2 RFC 1315 B 2 RFC 1406 B 2 RFC 1604 B 2 RFC 1659 B 2 RFC 1757 B 2 RFC 2021 B 2 RFC 2128 B 2 RFC 2474 4 27 RfcCodePoints 4 25 right arrow key 2 6 RIP 1 5 4 99 7 49 RJ11 modem connector E 17 RJ48C network cable E 15 RLB 8 29 RMON alarm and event defaults B 18 Specific Traps B 16 Traps 4 91 user history collection 1 7 1 10 router assist feature 1 7 4 7 7 70 configuration using terminal emulation 5 16 configuring using terminal emulation 5 16 controlling CLI access 6 14 filtering 5 14 independence 1 5 4 21 interfaces 5 2 overview 5 2 security 5 14 terminal emulation 5 16 September 2002 IN 11 Index Routing Information Protocol RIP 4 99 IP 5 3 table 7 48 table 1 7 5 3 RTS control lead 7 11 running reports 11 6 RXD cont
488. ted DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set m The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNSs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator m The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion notifications The network sends FECNSs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator Only appears for the network interface September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI 9128 A2 GB20 80 If the selected DLCI is IP Enabled the DLCI Performance Statistics screen has a second page listing statistics by Class of Service On the first DLCI Performance Statistics page for an IP Enabled DLCI PgUp and PgDn are shown as available commands in the function keys area of the screen Select PgUp or PgDn to display the second page Table 7 19 Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI Statistic What It Indicates Class of Svc Name The names for different Classes of Service defined using the Class of Service Definitions screen See Configuring Class of Service Definitions in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Class of Svc ID The ID nu
489. tember 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 G Equipment List Model Feature Description Number FrameSaver SLV Units continued FrameSaver SLV 9128 II T1 central site 1 slot unit with 9128 A2 202 m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem m ISDN PRI DBM m Support for up to 120 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable RJ48C PRI ISDN Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV 9128 II T1 central site 1 slot unit with 9128 A2 204 m SLM Feature Set m Integral modem Support for up to 120 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV 9128 II T1 central site 1 slot unit with 9128 A2 204 with m SLM Feature Set oe as m Integral modem m Support for up to 120 PVCs m ISDN BRI DBM m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable ISDN BRI DBM RJ49C BRI ISDN Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV 9128 II T1 central site 1 slot unit with 9128 A2 211 m Diagnostic Feature Set m Integral modem Support for up to 120 PVCs m Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 G 3 G Equipment List G 4 Descr
490. tember 2002 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI 8 7 8 Troubleshooting 8 8 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do EER at Network 1 The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes m Verify that the network cable is securely attached at the network interface m Contact your network provider Ethernet Link Down The communication link for the Ethernet port is down and the Interface Status for the port is enabled Check the LAN connected to the Ethernet port Internal Modem Failed The unit s internal modem failed to pass the self test Reset the FrameSaver unit Main Menu Control Reset Device If the modem fails again contact your service representative ISDN Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made because the ISDN link profile specified Link Name is disabled Main Menu Configuration gt ISDN Link Profiles Enable the ISDN link profile if you want to make a call ISDN Link Profile Invalid ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made because the ISDN link profile specified ISDN Link Name is invalid Chec
491. tember 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 1 About the FrameSaver SLV When the SLV Sample Interval is set to 10 seconds provides advance detection of network problems before a DLCI Down indication is received to minimize data loss Provides customer premises equipment CPE with a Backward Explicit Congestion Notification BECN when backup bandwidth is not sufficient for the traffic allowing the CPE time to slow traffic to the ISDN before the network starts discarding data Supports Frame Relay Forum Multilink Frame Relay Implementation Agreement FRF 15 so backup bandwidth can be increased by aggregating multiple B channels over the ISDN link Supports collection of call and call attempt statistical information that can be viewed from the menu driven user interface or via SNMP and supports alarm generation and call security as well Provides test call capability on ISDN backup links so ISDN and DBM function can be verified before there is an actual primary link failure and switched over to the backup link Periodic tests are recommended which can be performed from the menu driven user interface or through SNMP commands Multiple Last Cause Values are also provided to assist in troubleshooting ISDN problems Additional FrameSaver SLV 9126 II and 9128 II Features Ethernet Interface FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Routers and 9126 Il and 9128 II CSU DSUs units have a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet LAN interface for management with automatic sensing of the o
492. tement for everything Access lists are terminated by an implicit deny access list num The access list number Valid ranges for access lists are 1 99 Standard IP access lists 100 199 Extended IP access lists 200 299 Protocol type code access lists permit Specifies to permit access and forward packets matching the criteria deny Specifies to deny access and discard packets matching the criteria For Standard IP Access Lists Example access list 1 permit 10 1 1 1 source ip The source IP Address to match source wildcard Specifies a 32 bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the source IP address to ignore during matches This argument must be supplied when a source ip address is specified any Specifies to match any source host A source ip of 0 0 0 0 and a source wildcard of 255 255 255 255 are specified host Specify a single host source address to match source host ip The source host IP address to match Continued on next page September 2002 C 19 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 20 Table C 11 Filter Commands 2 of 4 Continued from previous page For Extended IP Access Lists Example access list 100 permit tcp 10 1 1 1 0 0 0 255 20 1 1 1 0 0 0 255 protocol The IP protocol to which the filter will be applied The following protocols are supported ip Filter applies to all IP packets including but not limited to ICMP TCP and UDP
493. ten with a leading Ox that specifies either an Ethernet type code or the first Ethernet type code in a range of Ethernet type codes to filter If a user attempts to a type code that is not a 16 bit hexadecimal number written with a leading Ox it will be treated as a syntax error Many of the Ethernet Type codes distributed by the Xerox Corporation are listed in Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex This option only applies to protocol type code access lists range Specifies a range of ether type codes This option only applies to protocol type code access lists end type code The last ethernet type code included in the filter range A 16 bit hexadecimal number written with a leading Ox used to specify one of the Ethernet type codes This option only applies for protocol type code access lists 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 C 21 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 11 Filter Commands 4 of 4 no ip access group access list 1 199num in out Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Allows you to control access to an interface by allowing you to designate or delete a set of access rules to be applied to either incoming or outgoing packets By default no access lists are applied to interfaces Example ip access group 17 in NOTE A user may specify that an access list is applied to either inbound packets outbound packets or both inbound and outbound
494. th NAT Configuration Example NAT with DHCP Server Network FrameSaver SLV Router Private IP Address Ethernet Private Public Public IP oe Addresses 02 17300 In this DHCP Server with NAT example The clients are using dynamic IP address assignment and use the Ethernet interface of the router as the next hop router default gateway The DHCP server assigns private IP addresses which are converted to public IP addresses by NAT The network interface must be numbered The router is configured as the DHCP server giving the private IP addresses to the clients The Ethernet interface is in private address space NAT is used for one to one mapping of addresses Public IP Addresses for NAT Private IP Addresses 192 128 22 1 10 1 3 2 192 128 22 2 10 1 3 3 192 128 22 nnn 10 1 3 nnn The command line syntax for this example where x is the number configured for the sub interface is 5 12 ip nat pool public 192 128 22 1 netmask 255 255 255 0 access list 1 permit 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 ip nat inside source list 1 pool public interface ethernet 0 ip nat inside interface serial 0 x ip nat outside September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router DHCP Server at Remote Site Configuration Example DHCP Server at Remote Site Customer Premises Remote Site DHCP Server L DHCP D Clients S gt FrameSaver SLV Router 02 17301
495. than 16 or greater than 1007 Enter a valid number 16 1007 September 2002 7 17 7 Operation and Maintenance Status Information Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit The following illustration shows the Status menu for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II with the ISDN DBM feature installed Status Menu Example main status 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 STATUS System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCIs PVC Connection Status Timeslot Assignment Status DBM Interface Status IP Routing Table Performance Statistics Trap Event Log Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit DBM Interface Status will not appear on the menu if the unit does not have the optional ISDN DBM feature NOTE Status messages contained in the following sections are in alphabetical order 7 18 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance System and Test Status Messages System and test status information is selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status 5 System and Test Status The following information is included on this screen m Self Test Results Messages Table 7 7 m Last System Reset Date and Time m Health and Status Messages Table 7 8 m Test Status Messages Table 7 9 Self Test Results Messages One of these self test result messages appears in the Self Test Results field at
496. the top of the System and Test Status screen Table 7 7 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure xxxxxxxx An internal failure occurred xxxxxxxXx represents an 8 digit hexadecimal failure code used by service personnel Record the failure code before resetting the unit otherwise the error information will be lost i Record the failure code 2 Reset the unit 3 Contact your service representative Passed No problems were found during power on or reset No action needed Last System Reset Date and Time This field indicates the last time the FrameSaver unit was reset It appears after the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen m Date is in mm dd yyyy format month day year m Time is in mm ss format minutes seconds 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 19 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 20 Health and Status Messages The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the FrameSaver unit Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages 1 of 7 Message What It Indicates AIS at DSX 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the DSX 1 interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal AIS at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the ISDN PRI interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal Only appears
497. the DLCls supplied by the service provider Unknown DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to unknown DLCls The DLCI may not have been configured or it has been configured to be Inactive Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly Unknown Error The number of frames received over the interface that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 61 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 62 Table 7 20 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 3 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay LMI LMI Protocol The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Status Msg Received The number of LMI status messages received over the interface Normal condition Total LMI Errors The number of LMI errors Reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and sequence errors are included in this total Network problems Number of Inactives The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link Inactive Network problems September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 20 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 4 of 4 Statistic W
498. the Ethernet interface are forwarded When no server address is assigned the DHCP Relay agent is effectively disabled NOTE The DHCP Relay agent cannot be enabled if either the DHCP server or NAT are enabled ip address P address of the DHCP server C 18 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Filter access list Commands 9128 A2 GB20 80 Filter commands are used to create or delete Access Lists Table C 11 Filter Commands 1 of 4 access list access list num permit deny source ip source wildcard any host source host ip protocol source ip source wildcard any host source host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any host dest host ip icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port type code range end type code no access list access list num permit deny source ip source wildcard any host source host ip protocol source ip source wildcard any host source host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any host dest host ip L icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port type code range end type code Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows a user to create or delete a rule for an access list Access lists default to an implicit deny sta
499. the IP routing table for the FrameSaver unit with network as well as host routes the number of hops to the destination the method by which the route was added to the table the interface used to get to the destination and how long the route has been in existence Trap Event Log Displays the SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol trap event log for the FrameSaver unit from the menu driven user interface with the most recent events first keeping a running total for all trap events stored the amount of time since the event was logged plus a description of the trap Troubleshooting PVC Provides a dedicated troubleshooting management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network ATM VPI VCI and DLCI Correlation For networks with both ATM and frame relay access endpoints allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating Virtual Path and Channel Identifier VPI VCI in the far end ATM access endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for OpenLane SLV reports Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and running Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user s discretion September 2002 1 7 1 About the FrameSaver SLV DSX 1 Drop Insert Port Allows DTEs PBXs that support the DS1 signal format to share the T1 network with other high speed equipment so that voice traffic can share the same local access circuit as the frame relay da
500. the network interface If an ISDN DBM is not installed Automatic Backup Configuration does not appear see Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration on page 4 13 for additional information 4 8 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message It configures a network DLCI and a user data port DLCI and automatically connects them to create a PVC Main Menu Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically configured network DLCls are multiplexed and each automatically configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network DLCI These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network NOTE A local Management PVC e g the PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit s user data port must be configured manually The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected Discovery Mode Configuration Description 1MPort m Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 m A management DLCI is configured m A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded DLCls EDLCls is configured for Port 1 user data and management data m A PVC connection is configured between the network and p
501. the pin assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position DTE Modular Plug DB25 Plug Not Used 1 Rx Data 2 Rx Data Signal Ground 3 Signal Ground Tx Data 4 Tx Data DTR 5 DTR CD 6 CD RTS 7 CTS Not Used 8 DSR RTS E 6 September 2002 98 16167 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 COM Port to Router Cables E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The following tables provide the pin assignments for connecting the 1 slot FrameSaver unit s 25 position communication port to various router auxiliary AUX or console ports using standard cables Cisco 2500 Series Router RJ45 Jack COM Port AUX Port Signal DB25 Pin Direction RJ45 Pin Signal DCE Transmit Data 2 To DTE 3 DTE Transmit Data TXD TXD DCE Receive Data 3 From DTE 6 DTE Receive Data RXD RXD DCE Request to 4 To DTE 1 DTE Request to Send RTS Send RTS DCE Clear to Send 5 From DTE 8 DCE Clear to Send CTS CTS DCE Data Set 6 From DTE 7 DCE Data Set Ready DSR Ready DSR DCE Signal Ground 7 4 5 DTE Signal Ground SG SG DCE Data Terminal 20 To DTE 2 DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR Ready DTR Cisco 7000 Series Router DB25 Plug COM Port AUX Port Signal DB25 Pin Direction DB25 Pin Signal DCE Transmit Data 2 To DTE 2 DTE Transmit Data TXD TXD DCE R
502. the proper time slots have been configured Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used m Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being transmitted If all of the above have been verified and the physical link is not in Alarm contact your network provider For user data port m Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends m Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured m Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI 8 9 8 Troubleshooting 8 10 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 4 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LOS at DSX 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 m DSX 1 cable problem
503. tio option see Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit Inbound Dropped Characters Above CIR Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR Total number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 282 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 4 4 Service Level Verification Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear NA appears instead of a statistical count if FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio information is not being received from the far end device m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped
504. tivating SLM Features The Activation Certificate 9128 A2 GB20 80 An Activation Certificate will be sent to you via Federal Express NOTE If you ordered an Activation Certificate via e mail Activation Certificate information will be e mailed to you so you can start activating units immediately The actual certificate will arrive the next day When the certificate arrives it will include the following information Activation Certificate number m Your OpenLane License Key number m Model Prefix 9126 or 9128 m Feature Group SLM m Number of device activations ordered included on this certificate m Sales order number m Customer purchase order number m Customer or company name m Contact sent to the attention of m Shipping address m Phone number m E mail address m Date the certificate was generated September 2002 9 5 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features Administering and Managing SLM Activations 9 6 The OpenLane SLM system provides the following features that allow you to administer and manage your Activation Certificates and SLM activations From the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu you can Add or view the status of activations and see how many activations remain on each certificate Schedule when activations are to take place and verify that the activations occurred as scheduled View activations that are scheduled cancel activations or change the Frame
505. to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll FrAssign Page 2 of 2 is for defining signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each DSX 1 interface time slot See DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning Page 2 on page 4 55 for an example of this screen For easy movement between screens select the FrAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen Time Slot Assignment Rules m Valid Network time slots are either Available or contain a DSX 1 time slot assignment m Valid DSX 1 time slots are those that are unassigned including the currently assigned time slot m Order of display is as follows Available is the first selection Then from the lowest DSX 1 interface to the highest DSX 1 interface Then the lowest available time slot number to the highest available time slot number For example if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under assigned time slot Ntt pressing the Spacebar causes this field s values to cycle through all valid DSX 1 time slots starting with Ds p yy assuming it is unassigned If Ds p ttis already assigned the next valid time slot in the order described above is displayed 4 54 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options p gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Time Slot Assignment DSX to Network Assignments The DSX 1 to Network Assi
506. to the screen Information added after the at the command line is ignored pager Enables display paging When enabled and there are more than 23 lines to display more displays on line 24 This is the default each time a session is started Press the Spacebar to view the next screen Press the Enter key to display the next line Press the q key Ctrl c or any other key to return to the command line no pager Disables paging and the entire output is sent to the screen without interruption Access Control Commands 9128 A2 GB20 80 Access control commands allow you to end a session For password and changing access commands see Chapter 6 Security and Logins Table C 2 Access Control Commands end Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode All config modes Allows you to exit any configuration mode and return to standard operating mode exit Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode All modes Allows you to exit the current mode or end the session If configuration changes have been made when exit is entered the There are unsaved configuration changes Are you sure you want to exit no yes prompt appears If yes is entered the router leaves configuration mode and any configuration changes are lost If no is entered the configuration prompt is returned to so you can save your changes If in standard operating mode when exit is entered the session is end
507. to the timeout mechanism that applies to normal ARP entries NOTE The DHCP Relay and DHCP Server cannot be enabled at the same time no ip dhcp pool pool name Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to create or delete a DHCP pool and places it in DHCP pool configuration mode to configure IP DHCP pool parameters All commands entered while in DHCP pool configuration mode are applied to the specified DHCP pool No DHCP pools are configured by default Example ip dhcp pool poo117 pool name The name of the DHCP pool as 1 20 ASCII printable characters no ip dhcp excluded address ip addr end ip addr Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses that the DHCP server should not distribute to clients The no ip dhcp excluded address command allows you to release previously excluded IP addresses for distribution to clients No IP addresses are excluded by default Up to 30 individual or ranges of IP addresses are supported Example ip dhcp excluded address 132 53 4 2 ip addr Specifies an IP address to exclude or the first IP address in a range of excluded IP addresses end ip addr Specifies the last IP address in a range of excluded IP addresses 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 C 15 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 16 Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands 2 of 3
508. try the call was received in a state other than Null Msg Type 97 Device sending this cause Contact your service Nonexistent or has received a nonexistent representative Unimplemented or not implemented message type while in the call state Device sending this cause has received a status message that indicates an incompatible call state Network Out of 38 Network is not functioning Contact your service Order correctly and the condition representative is expected to continue No Call Suspended 85 A call resume has been No action is needed issued but no calls have been suspended No Circuit Channel 34 No circuit channel is Wait and try again Available currently available to handle the call No Destination 3 Network through which call Contact your service Route has been routed does not representative serve the destination area or device None No causes have been No action is needed generated Non selected User 26 User has not been awarded No action is needed Clearing the incoming call No Route to Specify 2 The device sending or 1 Verify that the network Transit Network receiving this cause does not recognize the transit network that the call is being has been routed through exists 2 Verify that the network serves the device sending the cause September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 14 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 4 of 6
509. ts which provide different levels of intelligence for monitoring managing and reporting performance of the unit The two feature sets include m Basic Diagnostic Feature Set Models with this feature set provide basic FrameSaver capabilities which include Leased Line mode for standard DSU installation and operation Device health and status Layer 1 Physical and Layer 2 Frame Relay performance statistics Basic physical testing and non disruptive PVC diagnostics A troubleshooting DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier for service provider use and remote management Limited RMON Remote Monitoring functionality Multiplexed management PVCs See FrameSaver Diagnostic Feature Set on page 1 5 for other features and additional information m Advanced SLM Feature Set Models with this feature set provide all the basic diagnostic capability plus advanced Service Level Management features When additional SLV data is collected and the unit is accessed from an OpenLane SLM system Web access to the following information is available TruePut Technology using Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR and DDR Web browser access to all diagnostic and reporting functions Historical SLA Service Level Agreement verification and trend reports Real time RMON remote monitoring alarms and configurable alarm thresholds Real time and historical network performance graphs Multiplexed customer PVCs See FrameSaver SLM Feature Set on pag
510. ts send trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Use this feature when peer to peer nearest neighbor calling is desired Display Conditions This option only appears when an ISDN DBM is installed Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 4 91 4 Configuration Options 4 92 Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 5 of 6 Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically If the call cannot be completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable the SNMP trap message is held queued until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory NOTE When the modem port is configured as a network communication link up to 10 SNMP trap messages are held at the port Enable Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Directory Number A Alarm Disable Automatic calls will not be initiated Traps sent to the modem are held until a dial in connection is established Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the internal modem disconnects after the SNMP trap message has been sent This configuration option only applies to modem connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message
511. ts time slot tt of the selected network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than frame relay so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to frame relay service link 1 For easy movement between screens select the DSXAssign function key to go directly to the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen 4 52 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Time Slot Assignment Rule Valid network time slots are either Available or contain a Frame Relay Link 1 assignment gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Frame Relay Network Assignments The Frame Relay Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current assignment status of all time slots on the network interface 2 Enable or disable Time Slot Discovery When enabled the unit examines all time slots not cross connected to other ports to determine which time slots are being used by the network for frame relay traffic These time slots are set to FrameRly1 This is the factory default When disabled time slot assignments must be manually configured 3 If Time Slot Discovery is disabled assign network time slots for use by frame relay service link 1 by typing FrameRly1 in the
512. twork Assignments screen or the DSXAssign function key to go to the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen Time Slot Assignment Rules m To assign a synchronous data port to network or DSX 1 time slots Port 2 s Port Use option must be set for Synchronous Data see Table 4 7 Data Port Physical Interface Options If the DSX 1 interface is disabled only Net1 is available for synchronous data port assignment see the Interface Status option in Table 4 8 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options B gt Procedure Clearing Assignments 4 60 1 Select one of the following menu selection sequences Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Sync Data Port Assignments or Main Menu Easy Install Time Slot Assignment Screen Select an interface in the Assign To field A matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the selected interface appears Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment Repeat Step 3 until the synchronous data port is assigned to all desired time slots 5 Save the configuration Clearing assignments sets all time slots to Unassgn unassigned Main Menu gt Configuration Time Slot Assignment Clear Assignments September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 9128 A2 GB20 80 Select Frame Relay from th
513. twork interface User Data Port TXD Transmit Data Data is being sent to the far end device RXD Receive Data Data is being received from the far end device DTR Data Terminal Ready Shows the current state of the DTR control lead This indicator should always be on RTS Request to Send Shows the current state of the RTS control lead This indicator should always be on 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 7 11 7 Operation and Maintenance Device Messages These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 7 6 Device Messages 1 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n User s access level is 2 or No action needed Read only 3 user is not authorized to change configurations Already Active Test selected is already m Allow test to continue running m Select another test m Stop the test Blank Entries Removed New had been selected from the Administer Logins screen no entry was made then Save was selected m No action needed m Reenter the Login ID Password and Access Level Cannot Delete Trap Manager Delete was selected from the Management PVCs Options screen but the PVC had been defined as a trap destination No action needed or configure another path for traps and try again Cannot Save no Level 1 Login IDs Security wa
514. ual time left for the specific entry or STATIC for configured static entries The third column displays the MAC address for the ARP entry The fourth column displays the ARP type only ARPA is currently supported The fifth column displays the Interface or sub interface for the ARP table entry show bridge Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database show configuration Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays outputs a sequence of commands in the form of ASCII strings that have the effect of setting all configurable parameters to the current values in memory Passwords are write only and not output The text file can be used with a terminal emulation program Refer to Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation in Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router The general format of the show config command is global commands interface n interface n commands interface n sub interface n interface n sub interface n commands interface n sub interface nt1 interface n sub interface nt1 commands interface n l September 2002 C 25 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 26 Table C 13 Show Commands 2 of 4 show configuration saved unsaved Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode All config modes Displays outputs a sequence of commands in the form
515. uate command causes the system to enter a line loopback provided an LLB can be performed in the system s current state Receiving an LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The system ignores the LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the ISDN Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the system s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The system ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the ISDN over the ESF facility data link every second Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable
516. uide m Purpose and Intended Audience 02 220005 xi m Document Organization cee eee xi m Product Related Documents eee eeeee xiii m Conventions Used 000 c eee eee xiv 1 About the FrameSaver SLV System Overview eae 1 1 CSU DSU Specific Features ee eeee 1 2 Router Specific Features 0 200 cece eee eee 1 2 FrameSaver Diagnostic and SLM Feature Sets 1 4 FrameSaver Diagnostic Feature Set 2 2200005 1 5 Additional FrameSaver SLV9126 II and 9128 Il Features 1 9 Additional FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il Features 1 9 FrameSaver SLM Feature Set 02 e eee ee ees 1 10 OpenLane SLM System 0 0000 eee eee 1 11 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes 1 12 2 User Interface and Basic Operation 9128 A2 GB20 80 LOGGING ON AA 2 2 Main MENU ken paaa d nG nG tad RE E N E Gp Lace Gian dias 2 4 Screen Work Areas cee 2 5 Navigating the Screens eee es 2 6 Keyboard Keys mad Mee cole eh i a had 2 6 Function KEYS es naasa an alee Mas eet cas oat NG te 2 7 Selecting from aMenu 0 0 c ee ee 2 8 Switching Between Screen AreaS 000055 2 8 Selecting a Field 0 cee ees 2 9 Entering Information 2 0 cee eae 2 9 Screen Contents s deserria tena cece ee ees 2 9 Navigating the Routers CLI 0 0 c ee eee eee 2 10 CLI K
517. ultiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the unit September 2002 1 5 1 About the FrameSaver SLV Auto Configuration Provides the following automatic configuration features Time Slot Discovery For automatic configuration of all network DSO assignments Frame Relay Discovery For automatic discovery of network DLCls and configuration of a user data port DLCI the PVC connection and a management PVC which is multiplexed with user data DLCls LMI Protocol Discovery For automatic configuration of the protocol being used by the network DLCI Deletion For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCls from the unit s configuration and statistical databases CIR Determination For automatic recalculation of the committed rate measurement interval Tc and excess burst size Be when a DLCl s CIR changes Excess burst size Be and committed burst size Bc are recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to CIR The committed rate measurement interval Tc is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to Other Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported FrameSaver FrameSaver FrameSaver FrameSaver SLV 9126 I1 SLV 9126 SLV 9126 11 SLV 9128 11 Feature Router CSU DSU CSU DSU CSU DSU Through 8 16 64 120 Connections PVCs Dedicated 2 2 2 2 Management PVCs Multiplexed Management PVCs Provides a method of multiplexing mana
518. ultiplexed Customer PVCs Provides a method of multiplexing customer management data and user data with network management data transparently over a single PVC when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit FTP User History Poller Provides a bulk collector using FTP through the OpenLane system that generates a file for data at the time that data is uploaded using FTP Network User History Synchronization Allows correlation of RMON2 User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network Using a central clock called the network reference time all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the network further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides everything needed to monitor network service levels plus throughput with accurate data delivery network latency and LMI and PVC availability Continuous roundtrip latency testing and reporting as well as CIR to transmitted and received data performance statistics are included In addition port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links for accurate calculation of utilization September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 1 About the FrameSaver SLV OpenLane SLM System Being standards based the OpenLane SLM Service Level Management system can be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM s NetView OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane features
519. und Calling ID is required Inbound Calling ID 2 is provided to identify incoming calls from a second phone number assigned to a remote device with a BRI DBM NOTES Inbound Calling ID 2 is only useful when multiple local phone numbers are programmed at the originating site e g a 2B D BRI location For every originating outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed 0 9 Specifies the numbers in the remote device s local phone number Maximum Link Rate Kbps Possible Settings For a BRI DBM 64 128 For a PRI DBM 64 1472 Default Setting 64 Specifies the maximum rate that will be attempted for the frame relay link when it is activated The actual rate achieved on the link depends upon the number of successful calls placed or answered and the negotiated rate on each call NOTE This option takes effect as soon as a change is saved If the rate is increased additional calls will be placed If the rate is decreased calls will be dropped For extra calls to be successful the Maximum Link Rate must be increased at the originating device before it is increased at the answering device 64 An individual frame relay link is formed and a single call is placed using a B channel when the link is activated 128 1472 A constituent link is configured for each
520. ur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25
521. uring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps The ISDN DBM interface can be specified as an interface that monitors and generates SNMP traps Main Menu Configuration Management and Communications SNMP Traps The configuration options for doing this include m Link Trap Interfaces m DLCI Traps on Interfaces m ISDN Dial Control Traps When DBM is selected trap messages are generated for linkUp and linkDown events on DLCls and frame relay links for the originating DBM interface only For peer to peer backup backing up to a neighboring node like a regional node dial control traps can be sent to trap manager s See Table 4 22 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options for configuration information Assigning DLCIs to a Backup Group 4 18 DLCls can be assigned to a Backup Group to reduce backup charges when redundant PVCs have been configured This feature prevents backup as long as any DLCl in the group is operational m Backup is not initiated as long as one DLCI in the group is operational m Backup is terminated as soon as one DLCI in the group becomes operational See Table 4 14 DLCI Record Options for configuration information September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 4 Configuration Options PVC Backup Over the Network Interface Generally backup can be performed on the network interface s frame relay link using a backup PVC as well on an ISDN link the unit does not have to have the ISDN DBM feature In this case create
522. us data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this network interface September 2002 8 27 8 Troubleshooting Payload Loopback 8 28 The Payload Loopback PLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit framing section of the device Use the PLB to determine whether the problem is with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests Oth Framer er td t T1 All l The T1 Interface 1s Interface gt 97 15337 CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected interface While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted A PLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active Line Loopback Repeater Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Payload or Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port
523. when a PRI dial backup module DBM is installed m Active Backup call was in progress m Idle DBM was in Idle mode The ISDN network is transmitting an AIS AIS at Network 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the network interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal Possible reasons include m Upstream FrameSaver unit is transmitting AIS keep alive signal m The network is transmitting an AIS Auto Configuration Active Auto Configuration feature is active which allows automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls as they are reported by the network LMI Back to Back Mode Active The operating mode has been configured for back to back operation Main Menu Control gt Change Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line Backup Active Backup has been established and data is flowing over the alternate DLCI CTS down to Port 1 Device The user data port CTS control lead on the FrameSaver unit is off DBM BRI Card Failed ISDN BRI DBM only One or more of the access unit s integrated circuit chips has failed to internally loop data through the dial backup unit BRI circuit 1 2 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the follo
524. when a Send Pattern Test is Active Select InjectErr to inject a single bit error into the pattern being sent The ResetMon function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a Monitor 511 test pattern is Active Select ResetMon to reset the monitor pattern error counter CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 Line Loopback 9128 A2 GB20 80 8 Troubleshooting The Line Loopback LLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the source of the loopback When used with a pattern test at the remote node LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1 facility Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests Oth Framer ther lt lt T1 All l LLB The T1 Interface 1s Interface l 97 15336 CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchrono
525. wing Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 9128 A2 GB20 80 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 8 Health and Status Messages 2 of 7 Message What It Indicates DBM Download Required ISDN BRI DBM only A download attempt was interrupted and failed to complete The NAM software and DBM software are incompatible DCLB Active Interface A V 54 Loopback is active on the specified interface DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link V2 The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down DTE External LB Active Port n A Data Terminal Loopback is running on the specified user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port n The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on the specified user data port DTPLB Active Port 2 A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB is active on the synchronous user data port DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead from the device connected to the user data port is deasserted EER at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only The error rate of the received ISDN network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing a
526. with Concord Communication s Network Health software In addition Network Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the example in FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report on page 11 9 To get this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following Installation and Setup of Network Health on page 11 2 Discovering FrameSaver Elements on page 11 3 Configuring the Discovered Elements on page 11 4 Grouping Elements for Reports on page 11 5 Generating Reports for a Group on page 11 6 About Service Level Reports About At a Glance Reports About Trend Reports Printed Reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices on page 11 7 September 2002 11 1 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices For additional information about installing accessing and managing FrameSaver SLV devices through Concord s Network Health and for information about applicable reports refer to m Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application m Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application m Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay reports m Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand and use Traffic Accou
527. with the OpenView Web interface Being Web based the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data contained in the database to provide anytime anywhere access to this information via a Web browser Some of the OpenLane system s features include 9128 A2 GB20 80 Real time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement details not averages which can skew performance results of service level agreement SLA parameters Port bursting and EIR Excess Information Rate performance monitoring graphs are available when the software release for the OpenLane SLM system is Release 5 2 or later Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy to use tool for performing tests which include end to end PVC loopback connectivity and physical interface tests For units with ISDN backup capability provides ISDN physical interface and PVC testing when the software release for the OpenLane SLM system is Release 5 2 or later Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be assigned Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered automatically along with their PVCs A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system Firmware downloading provides an easy to use tool for
528. xample frame relay interface dlci 103 dici num Any valid DLCI number that is not already in use on the interface Range for DLCI numbers is 16 1007 The default is None September 2002 C 7 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations IP Routing Commands C 8 Internet Protocol IP routing commands are used to enable and disable IP routing and to create or delete static routes in the routing table To show IP routing and performance statistics see Table C 13 Show Commands Table C 5 IP Routing Commands ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num no ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows manual creation or deletion of static route entries There are no route entries by default A default gateway destination route may be specified by entering a destination IP address and mask of 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 with a default gateway IP address or interface Example ip route 132 53 4 2 255 255 255 255 serial 0 x NOTE Generally routes are specified using a next hop address However routes over unnumbered point to point sub interfaces should specify the sub interface to reach the destination dest ip IP address of the destination host or network or 0 0 0 0 if a default destination gateway is specified dest mask The subnet mask to be used when the destinati
529. ymptom Possible Cause Solutions No receipt or transmission of data Cross Connection of the DLCls are configured incorrectly Verify the PVC connections and DLCls by checking the network discovered DLCls on the LMI Reported DLCls screen DLCI is inactive on the frame relay network m Verify that the DLCI s is active on the LMI Reported DLCls screen If the DLCI s is not active contact the service provider m Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration LMI is not configured properly for the DTE or network Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE or network LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen increments Losing Data Frame relay network is experiencing problems Run PVC Loopback and Pattern tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider Out of Sync If Monitor Pattern was selected it means the test pattern generator and receiver have not yet synchronized CIR settings for the units at each end are mismatched If the message persists it means that 5 packets out of 25 are missing or are out of sequence m Verify that the unit at the other end is configured to Send Pattern Correct unit configurations
530. your changes When Save is complete the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about security configuration options 6 12 September 2002 9128 A2 GB20 80 6 Security and Logins Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one Deleting a Login pp Procedure To delete a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Page through login pages records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until the login to be deleted is displayed 3 Select Delete 4 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete the number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record before the deleted record reappears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 9128 A2 GB20 80 September 2002 6 13 6 Security and Logins Controlling Router CLI Access The FrameSaver SLV 9126 II Router can be managed from an NMS using SNMP or from the router s command line interface CLI There are two methods to access the command line interface m Local access at the router through the COM port or m Access via a Telnet session Telnet access defaults to Administrator level If the current login is at the Operator level only Operator level access is available for the session Telnet access is always enabled The router accepts on

Paradyne 9126-II User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents